Encom
TM
Discover
TM
2011
USER GUIDE
USER GUIDE
Encom Discover is developed and supported by
Pitney Bowes Software Pty Ltd.
Asia Pacic/AustraIia
Level 7, 1 Elizabeth Plaza
North Sydney NSW 2060 Australia
Support
pbbi.support@pb.com
www.pbinsight.com.au
Encom Discover ReIease History
v1.0 December 1994 v6.1 April 2004
v1.1 February 1995 v7.0 May 2005
v1.2 September 1995 v8.0 June 2006
v2.0 August 1996 v8.1 February 2007
v2.1 November 1997 v9.0 July 2007
v3.0 February 1999 v10.0 June 2008
v4.0 July 2001 v11.0 June 2009
v5.0 June 2002 v12.0 June 2010
v6.0 October 2003 2011 June 2011
Pitney Bowes Software Pty Ltd, 2011
Encom
TM
Discover
TM
2011
Table of Contents i
1 Introducing Encom Discover ................................................................. 1
About this Guide........................................................................................ 1
Conventions Used in this Guide................................................................ 2
2 Installing and Configuring Encom Discover......................................... 3
System Requirements............................................................................... 3
Installing Encom Discover......................................................................... 3
Installing from DVD.............................................................................. 4
Installing from the Web........................................................................ 5
Advanced Installation Options.............................................................. 5
Uninstalling Encom Discover ............................................................... 6
Installation Folders............................................................................... 7
Licensing Encom Discover........................................................................ 7
Licensing Procedures for a Hard-Disk Licence.................................... 8
Installing a New Licence................................................................. 9
Upgrading an Existing Licence...................................................... 11
Transferring a Licence.................................................................. 12
Displaying Licence Information..................................................... 14
Troubleshooting............................................................................ 14
Dialog Help ................................................................................... 14
Discover Licence Manager Dialog Box.................................... 14
Request an Activation/Upgrade Code Dialog Box................... 15
Activate Software Dialog Box................................................... 15
Transfer Dialog Box................................................................. 16
Configuring Encom Discover................................................................... 16
Viewing and Changing Discover Folder Locations............................. 17
Overriding the Default Map Status Bar Display.................................. 18
Autosaving and Restoring the Workspace......................................... 18
Dialog Help......................................................................................... 19
Configuration Dialog Box.............................................................. 19
Select Path Dialog Box................................................................. 21
Starting Encom Discover......................................................................... 22
Auto-starting Encom Discover............................................................ 22
Starting Encom Discover Manually.................................................... 24
Running Encom Discover on a Network ............................................ 25
3 Getting Help ........................................................................................... 27
Help......................................................................................................... 27
Technical Support................................................................................... 29
Viewing and Printing the Electronic Manuals.......................................... 30
Table of Contents
ii Encom Discover User Guide
4 Whats New in Encom Discover .......................................................... 31
5 Managing the User Interface and Workspaces .................................. 37
Controlling the Interface.......................................................................... 37
Showing and Hiding Menus, Toolbars, and Other Tools ................... 37
Managing Toolbars............................................................................ 38
Using the Discover Command Search Tool............................................ 40
Dialog Help........................................................................................ 41
Command Search Options Dialog Box......................................... 41
Organising Your MapBasic Tools ........................................................... 42
Managing Your Workspaces................................................................... 44
Favourite Workspaces....................................................................... 44
Checking and Modifying Table Locations in a Workspace................ 45
Preparing a Workspace for Sharing and Archiving............................ 47
Fixing Problems in a Workspace....................................................... 48
Encom Discover Application Menus ....................................................... 50
Discover Menu................................................................................... 50
Map Window Menu....................................................................... 53
Cursor Position Menu.............................................................. 56
Scaled Output Menu..................................................................... 57
Import and Export Menu............................................................... 57
DataSight Menu....................................................................... 60
ioGAS Menu............................................................................ 61
Map Making Menu........................................................................ 61
Data Utilities Menu ....................................................................... 63
DigData Menu.......................................................................... 66
Temporal Trends Menu........................................................... 67
Object Editing Menu..................................................................... 68
Table Utilities Menu...................................................................... 69
Discover Help Menu..................................................................... 72
Surfaces Menu................................................................................... 73
Create Grid Menu......................................................................... 76
Hydrology Menu ........................................................................... 76
Grid Query Menu.......................................................................... 76
Grid Utilities Menu........................................................................ 76
Import Grid File Menu................................................................... 78
Export Grid File or Contours Menu............................................... 79
Images Menu..................................................................................... 79
Drillholes Menu.................................................................................. 80
External Data Formats Menu........................................................ 82
Boundary Digitizing Menu............................................................. 83
GraphMap Menu................................................................................ 83
Geochem Menu................................................................................. 83
ColourMap Menu............................................................................... 85
Tenements Menu............................................................................... 86
Table of Contents iii
Discover 3D Menu.............................................................................. 86
MapInfo Professional Menu Customisations........................................... 88
Encom Discover Toolbars....................................................................... 90
Discover Toolbar................................................................................ 90
Map Window Toolbar......................................................................... 91
Map Making Toolbar .......................................................................... 92
Object Editing Toolbar........................................................................ 93
Surfaces Toolbar................................................................................ 93
Drillholes Toolbar ............................................................................... 94
Cursor Position Toolbar ..................................................................... 95
Enhanced Layer Control .................................................................... 95
6 Map Window Controls........................................................................... 97
Map View Settings .................................................................................. 97
Setting the Default Map View............................................................. 97
Dialog Help ................................................................................... 97
Set Default View Dialog Box.................................................... 98
Saving and Restoring the Mapper State............................................ 98
Saving and Applying View Settings.................................................... 98
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 101
Standard Views Dialog Box................................................... 101
Add View Dialog Box............................................................. 102
Map Projections .................................................................................... 102
Saving and Applying Map Projections.............................................. 102
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 104
Favourite Projections Dialog Box........................................... 104
Choose Projection Dialog Box............................................... 105
Displaying Mapper Projection Details .............................................. 105
Displaying Map Coordinates, Distances and Bearings ......................... 106
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 107
Location Display Dialog Box.................................................. 107
Display a Dynamic Scale Bar Window.................................................. 109
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 110
Scale Bar Shortcut Menu....................................................... 110
Save Scale Bar Dialog Box.................................................... 110
Scale Bar Options Dialog Box................................................ 111
Add a Dynamic Map Grid to a Map Window......................................... 112
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 113
Setup Map Autogrid Dialog Box.................................................. 113
Window Size and Zoom Controls.......................................................... 115
Fit the Map Window to the Selected Object..................................... 116
Zoom to the Extents of the Selected Object..................................... 116
Linking Map Windows ........................................................................... 116
Show Cursor Position in Linked Windows........................................ 118
Matching the Sizes of Linked Windows............................................ 119
iv Encom Discover User Guide
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 120
Map Linking Dialog Box.............................................................. 120
Cursor Position Dialog Box......................................................... 121
7 Importing and Exporting .................................................................... 123
Importing Data with MapInfo and Discover........................................... 123
Import Formats Supported by Discover................................................ 124
Tabular and Vector Data....................................................................... 127
acQuire............................................................................................ 127
Dialog Help................................................................................. 129
Import from acQuire Dialog Box............................................ 129
Select Data from acQuire Dialog Box.................................... 130
Choose Output Files Dialog Box........................................... 130
ASCII Data....................................................................................... 130
Supported ASCII File Formats.................................................... 133
ASCII Import Options.................................................................. 134
Line Number Record .................................................................. 135
Ignored Records......................................................................... 136
Ignored Characters..................................................................... 136
Save and Reload ASCII Template.............................................. 136
Dialog Help................................................................................. 136
ASCII Data Import Dialog Box............................................... 137
Fields Shortcut Menu............................................................. 141
Properties Dialog Box............................................................ 142
Options Dialog Box................................................................ 143
Datamine ......................................................................................... 144
Importing Datamine Points ......................................................... 144
Importing Datamine Perimeters and Strings............................... 145
Exporting to Datamine................................................................ 146
Dialog Help................................................................................. 147
Datamine Export Dialog Box................................................. 147
DataShed......................................................................................... 148
DataSight......................................................................................... 148
Server Authentication................................................................. 149
Access Methods ......................................................................... 149
Prerequisites for Using the DataSight Import Tool ..................... 150
Using the DataSight Import Tool................................................. 150
Dialog Help................................................................................. 152
Setup Database Connection Dialog Box............................... 152
Import from DataSight - Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box.................... 154
Advanced Table Filter Dialog Box......................................... 154
Import from DataSight - Step 2 of 2 Dialog Box.................... 155
DXF.................................................................................................. 155
Export Contours to 3D DXF ....................................................... 157
Export Digitized Boundaries to 3D DXF...................................... 157
Table of Contents v
Geosoft............................................................................................. 158
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 159
Import Geosoft Database Dialog Box.................................... 159
Line Selection Dialog Box...................................................... 160
ioGAS............................................................................................... 160
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 162
ioGAS Importer Dialog Box.................................................... 162
LIDAR LAS....................................................................................... 164
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 164
LAS Import Dialog Box........................................................... 165
MicroMine......................................................................................... 165
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 166
MicroMine Import Dialog Box................................................. 166
Micromine Data Import Dialog Box........................................ 167
Micromine String Import Dialog Box...................................... 167
MineSight......................................................................................... 167
Importing MineSight Points and Polylines................................... 168
Exporting to MineSight................................................................ 168
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 169
MineSight Export Dialog Box................................................. 169
Surpac.............................................................................................. 170
Importing Surpac Strings............................................................. 170
Exporting to Surpac .................................................................... 172
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 172
Surpac String Import Dialog Box............................................ 173
Surpac String Export Dialog Box........................................... 174
Vulcan.............................................................................................. 174
Importing Points and Polylines.................................................... 175
Exporting to Vulcan..................................................................... 175
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 176
Vulcan Import Dialog Box...................................................... 176
Vulcan Export Dialog Box...................................................... 177
Vector Import.................................................................................... 178
Vector Export ................................................................................... 179
Transform Vector Files..................................................................... 180
Raster Imagery...................................................................................... 183
Rectifying Raster Images................................................................. 183
ALG/ECW/J PEG2000...................................................................... 183
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 186
Open ECW/P, ALG or J P2 Image Dialog Box....................... 186
ER Mapper Algorithm Referencing ECW Images ............................ 187
Encom EGB ..................................................................................... 188
Importing an EGB Image ............................................................ 188
Exporting as an EGB Image ....................................................... 189
Saving a Map Window as a Registered Raster Image................ 190
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 190
EGB Import Dialog Box.......................................................... 190
vi Encom Discover User Guide
Export Map to Encom PA Dialog Box.................................... 191
Surface Grids........................................................................................ 191
ER Mapper Algorithm Referencing ER Mapper Grids ..................... 193
ASCII Grid........................................................................................ 193
X Y Z values file format .............................................................. 194
Z values only file format.............................................................. 195
HGT Grid......................................................................................... 197
Alternative Grid Import Tools........................................................... 197
BIL Grid ...................................................................................... 199
ER Mapper Grid.......................................................................... 200
ESRI ASCII Grid......................................................................... 202
Geosoft Grid............................................................................... 204
Minex Grid.................................................................................. 205
Surfer Grid.................................................................................. 207
Vertical Mapper Grid................................................................... 208
USGS SDTS TAR Grid............................................................... 209
Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid......................................... 212
Export Grid to ASCII File ................................................................. 213
Export Grid ...................................................................................... 213
Drillholes............................................................................................... 214
Discover Drillhole Projects............................................................... 214
Export Drillholes as 3D DXF Traces................................................ 214
gINT................................................................................................. 214
WinLoG............................................................................................ 217
8 Working with Tables ........................................................................... 221
Opening and Closing Tables ................................................................ 221
Favourite Tables.............................................................................. 221
Opening Multiple Tables.................................................................. 224
Closing All Tables............................................................................ 225
Refreshing Tables with Database Connections.................................... 227
Searching and Replacing Text in Tables.............................................. 229
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 230
Text Search Dialog Box.............................................................. 230
Selecting Table Records....................................................................... 231
Select by Group............................................................................... 231
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 233
Select by Group Dialog Box ....................................................... 233
Sorting Tables....................................................................................... 234
Changing the Map Bounds of a Mappable Table.................................. 236
Splitting Tables ..................................................................................... 237
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 239
Table Split Dialog Box................................................................ 239
Group Properties Dialog Box...................................................... 240
Digitizing and Data Entry...................................................................... 241
Table of Contents vii
Setting Increments and Constant Values......................................... 243
Manual Data Entry........................................................................... 244
Automated Data Entry...................................................................... 244
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 245
Data Entry to Columns Dialog Box.............................................. 245
Increments and Constant Values Dialog Box.............................. 245
Adding Unique Identifiers to Table Records.......................................... 247
Updating Multiple Columns ................................................................... 248
Working with Multiple Tables................................................................. 251
Packing Multiple Tables ................................................................... 251
Appending Multiple Tables............................................................... 252
Importing Multiple MID/MIF Files ..................................................... 252
Exporting Multiple MID/MIF Files ..................................................... 253
Reprojecting Multiple Tables............................................................ 253
Multi-table, Multi-field Editing........................................................... 253
Field Display ............................................................................... 254
Field Editing................................................................................ 255
9 Data Processing and Statistics.......................................................... 259
Pre-processing and Cleaning Data....................................................... 259
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 260
Data Handling Options Dialog Box.............................................. 260
Classifying Data.................................................................................... 262
Classifying Data by Colour, Size, and Symbol................................. 262
Multi-field Classification.................................................................... 265
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 265
Point Classification Dialog Box................................................... 266
Classify by Colour Tab .......................................................... 267
Classify by Size Tab ............................................................. 269
Classify by Symbol Tab ........................................................ 270
Specify Output Table Dialog Box................................................ 272
Trivariate Point Classification........................................................... 272
Setting Point Styles..................................................................... 275
Displaying a Point Style Legend................................................. 275
Null Values.................................................................................. 276
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 276
Trivariate Point Classification Dialog Box................................... 276
Specify Output Table Dialog Box................................................ 279
Set Point Styles Dialog Box........................................................ 279
Pick Symbol Dialog Box.............................................................. 280
Normalizing or Levelling Data............................................................... 280
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 282
Levelling Utility Dialog Box.......................................................... 282
Computing Summary Statistics ............................................................. 284
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 287
viii Encom Discover User Guide
Statistics Dialog Box................................................................... 287
Computing a Correlation Matrix............................................................ 290
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 290
Correlation Statistics Dialog Box................................................ 290
10 Coordinates and Projections ............................................................. 293
Calculating Distances Between Points in Separate Tables.................. 293
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 295
Distance Calculator Dialog Box.................................................. 295
Displaying Cursor Coordinates in a Map Window................................. 296
Updating Coordinates........................................................................... 296
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 298
Update Coordinates Dialog Box................................................. 298
New Column Name Dialog Box.................................................. 299
Coordinate Transformations ................................................................. 299
Performing a Once-Off Transformation........................................... 301
Plane Transformation...................................................................... 303
Affine Transformation...................................................................... 305
Creating a Custom Affine Projection........................................... 306
Using a Custom Affine Projection in MapInfo............................. 308
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 309
Coordinate Transformation Dialog Box....................................... 309
Transform Coordinates Dialog Box............................................. 312
Reprojecting Coordinates ..................................................................... 314
Reprojecting a Table........................................................................ 314
Dialog Help................................................................................. 316
Reproject TAB File Dialog Box.............................................. 316
Reprojecting Multiple Tables ........................................................... 317
Generating Traverse Lines and Peg Coordinates................................. 318
Local Grid Definition Options........................................................... 321
Grid Line Parameters....................................................................... 322
Grid Parameters .............................................................................. 322
Output Options................................................................................. 323
Advanced Options ........................................................................... 324
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 325
Local Grid Layout Dialog Box..................................................... 325
Grid Type Tab........................................................................ 326
Grid Parameters Tab............................................................. 326
Advanced Options Dialog Box.................................................... 329
11 Working with Map Objects ................................................................. 331
Objects and Layers............................................................................... 331
Creating Objects from a Table.............................................................. 332
Row Delimited Polylines .................................................................. 333
Table of Contents ix
Column Delimited Polylines ............................................................. 334
Line on One Row Polylines.............................................................. 335
XYZ Grid.......................................................................................... 336
Creating and Editing Objects from the Keyboard.................................. 336
Selecting the Object Type................................................................ 336
Draw a Point..................................................................................... 337
Draw a Line...................................................................................... 338
Draw a Polyline/Polygon.................................................................. 339
Enter Nodes by Coordinates....................................................... 339
Enter Nodes by Distance, Bearing.............................................. 339
Draw an Arc, Ellipse or Rectangle ................................................... 340
Edit Node Coordinates..................................................................... 341
Selecting Objects .................................................................................. 341
Select by Proximity........................................................................... 341
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 343
Proximity Search Dialog Box................................................. 344
Select by Graphical Style................................................................. 345
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 347
Select by Style Dialog Box..................................................... 348
Copying, Moving and Transforming Objects ......................................... 349
Offsetting Copies of an Object......................................................... 349
Moving, Scaling and Rotating Objects ............................................. 350
Aligning Objects ............................................................................... 352
Manipulating Lines, Polylines and Polygons......................................... 354
Smoothing........................................................................................ 355
Thinning........................................................................................... 356
Thin Polyline by Node Number ................................................... 356
Thin Polyline by Node Position................................................... 357
Cutting.............................................................................................. 358
J oining.............................................................................................. 358
Inserting Nodes................................................................................ 360
Changing Line Direction................................................................... 363
Creating Donut Polygons ................................................................. 363
Clipping............................................................................................ 365
Splitting Multiple Polylines and Polygons......................................... 366
Using Polyline and Polygon Attributes .................................................. 367
Assigning Values to and from Polygons........................................... 367
Contents to Container................................................................. 368
Container to Contents................................................................. 369
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 369
Assign Values Dialog Box...................................................... 369
Assigning Values to Polygons from a Grid....................................... 370
Calculating Line Orientation............................................................. 371
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 371
Line Orientation Dialog Box................................................... 372
Extracting Nodes.............................................................................. 372
Dialog Help ................................................................................. 373
x Encom Discover User Guide
Node Extraction Dialog Box................................................... 373
Calculating Area Change................................................................. 374
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 376
Compute Area Change Dialog Box............................................. 377
Conditioning and Converting Linework into Polygons........................... 379
PolyBuilder Dialog........................................................................... 381
Linework Layer ........................................................................... 381
Text Layer................................................................................... 382
Menus......................................................................................... 382
PolyBuilder Toolbar .................................................................... 382
Preferences ..................................................................................... 383
Linework..................................................................................... 384
Polygons..................................................................................... 385
Field Information......................................................................... 385
Digitize Linework.............................................................................. 385
Check Linework............................................................................... 389
Error Flags.................................................................................. 391
Correct Linework.............................................................................. 392
Extend and Break Linework........................................................ 392
Fix Linework ............................................................................... 394
Create Polygons .............................................................................. 399
Polygon Errors............................................................................ 401
Donut Polygons .......................................................................... 402
Attribute Polygons with Text....................................................... 402
Additional Linework Utilities............................................................. 404
Break Linework........................................................................... 405
J oin Linework.............................................................................. 406
Filter Linework............................................................................ 407
Colouring Map Objects ......................................................................... 407
Colour Map Objects from Look-up Tables....................................... 408
Creating Colour Look-up Tables................................................. 408
Create a Colour Table from an Existing Map.............................. 410
Create a Colour Table from a Thematic Map............................. 412
Edit a Colour Table..................................................................... 413
Apply a Colour Map to Map Objects........................................... 414
Create a Legend from a Colour Table........................................ 416
Export a Colour Map to Discover Mobile.................................... 417
Saving and Applying Thematic Map Settings .................................. 417
Save Thematic Map Setting in MapInfo...................................... 418
Save Thematic Map Setting with Auto-Shade............................ 418
Apply Auto-Shade Setting to Table ............................................ 419
Use Other Auto-Shade Files....................................................... 420
Use Auto-Shade with Other Discover Functions ........................ 420
Dialog Help................................................................................. 420
AutoShades Dialog Box......................................................... 420
Add Thematic Map Dialog Box.............................................. 421
Colour Map Objects by RGB Values ............................................... 422
Table of Contents xi
Formatting Vector Objects..................................................................... 424
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 426
Plot Vectors Dialog Box.............................................................. 426
Cloning Object Styles............................................................................ 428
Linking Objects to External Documents ................................................ 430
Setting Up Hotlinks........................................................................... 431
Creating a Hotlink............................................................................. 432
Opening Linked Documents............................................................. 434
12 Map Making.......................................................................................... 435
Creating Scaled Maps........................................................................... 435
Create Scaled Output Map............................................................... 436
Map Scale and Map Size............................................................ 437
Frame Setup............................................................................... 437
Configure Frame Settings........................................................... 438
Position Scaled Output Map ....................................................... 440
Accept Map Position................................................................... 442
Configure Map Grid Settings....................................................... 442
Enter Scaled Output Title Block Details...................................... 442
Modifying Scaled Output Layout...................................................... 443
Preserving the Linked Map Window's Scale/Extents ....................... 443
Printing a Scaled Output Layout ...................................................... 444
Creating Additional Scaled Output Maps ......................................... 444
Scaled Output and Standard Map Sheets........................................ 445
Scaled Output Hints ......................................................................... 446
Exit Scaled Output ........................................................................... 447
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 448
Scaled Output Dialog Box........................................................... 448
Scaled Output Configuration Dialog Box..................................... 449
Scaled Output Map Position Dialog Box..................................... 450
Add a Map Grid..................................................................................... 451
Map Grid Projection......................................................................... 452
Grid Spacing.................................................................................... 452
Map Grid Styles................................................................................ 452
Save and Overlay Map Grids........................................................... 454
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 455
Overlay Map Grid Dialog Box...................................................... 455
Grid Label Options Dialog Box.................................................... 457
Add a Scaled Frame to the Layout........................................................ 458
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 459
Add Scaled Frame to Layout Dialog Box.................................... 459
Add a Title Block and Scale Bar............................................................ 460
Scale Bars........................................................................................ 461
Title Block and Scale Bar Options.................................................... 462
Title Block Options...................................................................... 463
xii Encom Discover User Guide
Scale Bar Options....................................................................... 463
Other Options ............................................................................. 463
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 464
Titleblock Dialog Box.................................................................. 464
Title Block and Scale Bar Options Dialog Box............................ 465
Using Object Styles .............................................................................. 466
Apply Styles from List...................................................................... 467
Maintain Styles Library.................................................................... 468
Edit an Existing Map Object Style............................................... 468
Add or Delete a Map Object Style.............................................. 468
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 469
Map Styles Dialog Box ............................................................... 469
Add a Map Legend ............................................................................... 470
Legend Tables and Columns........................................................... 470
Legend Style.................................................................................... 472
Legend Order................................................................................... 473
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 475
Create Legend 1 Dialog Box ...................................................... 475
Create Legend 2 Dialog Box ...................................................... 475
Legend Order Dialog Box........................................................... 477
Legend Order from Column Values Dialog Box.......................... 477
Add and Format Text and Labels ......................................................... 478
Adding Titles to Frames................................................................... 478
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 478
Add Frame Titles Dialog Box...................................................... 479
Adding Text Labels.......................................................................... 479
Advanced Labelling Options....................................................... 481
Formatting Text................................................................................ 484
Dialog Help................................................................................. 485
Format Text Dialog Box......................................................... 485
Modifying MapInfo Label Angles...................................................... 485
Dialog Help................................................................................. 486
Label Angles Dialog Box....................................................... 486
Updating Labels an Tables.............................................................. 486
Updating Text Labels from Table................................................ 487
Updating Table from Text Labels................................................ 487
Colouring Text Labels with a Pattern.......................................... 488
Dialog Help................................................................................. 488
Update Label Text from Table Dialog Box............................. 488
Update Table from Text Dialog Box...................................... 489
Colour Objects Dialog Box.................................................... 489
Adding Line and Point Labels.......................................................... 489
Dialog Help................................................................................. 491
Line and Point Labels Dialog Box.......................................... 492
Apply SeeThru Shading........................................................................ 493
SeeThru Shading Pattern Type....................................................... 494
SeeThru Shading Pattern Density and Orientation.......................... 495
Table of Contents xiii
SeeThru Shade Pattern Library....................................................... 495
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 496
See Thru Pattern Library Dialog Box.......................................... 496
Apply Geological Line Styles and Annotations...................................... 498
Structure Line Styles........................................................................ 501
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 502
Line Annotation Dialog Box......................................................... 502
MapShop............................................................................................... 504
The MapShop Menu......................................................................... 505
Batch Map Sheet Generation and Printing....................................... 506
Styles ............................................................................................... 509
Printing Standard Maps.................................................................... 511
Map Series....................................................................................... 514
Creating a New Map Series........................................................ 514
Open Map Series........................................................................ 516
Templates ........................................................................................ 516
Creating Templates..................................................................... 516
Generate New Template............................................................. 517
Template Toolbar........................................................................ 526
Adding Text Labels ..................................................................... 527
Finalizing the template................................................................ 529
Edit Existing Map Template........................................................ 531
Configure Map Templates........................................................... 531
Indexes............................................................................................. 532
Compiling and printing a Map Index ........................................... 533
Key Maps ......................................................................................... 537
Labelling Tools................................................................................. 539
Configuring MapShop...................................................................... 540
MapShop Configuration Tool ...................................................... 540
Configuring MapShop for Server-Located Templates and Map
Series.......................................................................................... 542
13 Capturing Maps as Images and Movies ............................................ 543
Saving a Map Window as a Registered Raster Image.......................... 543
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 545
Create Registered Raster Dialog Box......................................... 545
Making Movies and Animations from Map Windows............................. 547
Create Animation File....................................................................... 548
Iterating Through Multiple Tables................................................ 550
Iterating Through Field Values.................................................... 550
Play Animation File .......................................................................... 552
Edit Animation File........................................................................... 554
Create Movie File............................................................................. 555
AVI Movie File Format................................................................. 555
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 556
xiv Encom Discover User Guide
Window Animator Tool................................................................ 556
Create/Edit Tab .......................................................................... 557
Play Tab ..................................................................................... 558
Video Compression Dialog Box.................................................. 559
14 Viewing Data in Three Dimensions ................................................... 561
15 Graphs and Profiles............................................................................ 565
General Purpose Graphs...................................................................... 565
Getting Started with GraphMap....................................................... 567
Time-Series Graphs.............................................................................. 571
Temporal Data Format..................................................................... 572
Setting Up Temporal Trends Graphs............................................... 573
Creating Temporal Trends Graphs.................................................. 574
Querying Temporal Trends Graphs................................................. 576
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 577
Temporal Trends Setup Dialog Box............................................ 577
Temporal Trends Linegraph Display Parameters Dialog Box..... 578
Temporal Trend Graph Query Dialog Box.................................. 580
Surface Grid Profiles............................................................................. 580
Stacked Profiles.................................................................................... 581
Dialog Help...................................................................................... 584
Stacked Profile Dialog Box......................................................... 584
16 Using the GraphMap Tool .................................................................. 587
Starting GraphMap ............................................................................... 587
GraphMap Menus and Toolbars........................................................... 588
File Menu......................................................................................... 588
Quick Access Toolbar...................................................................... 589
Menu Tabs....................................................................................... 591
Sidebar Windows............................................................................. 594
Creating Graphs ................................................................................... 597
Graph Builder................................................................................... 598
Axis/Field Assignments.................................................................... 598
Graph Types.................................................................................... 602
Selecting and Tranforming Data Columns....................................... 605
Preconditioning Data ............................................................................ 607
Creating Derived Columns.................................................................... 609
Viewing Data Values............................................................................. 612
Arranging and Modifying Graph Displays ............................................. 614
Closing Graphs................................................................................ 614
Hide and Show Windows................................................................. 615
Arranging Graphs ............................................................................ 617
Table of Contents xv
Adding a Graph to a Map Window................................................... 618
Zoom, Pan and Rotation.................................................................. 619
Axis, Scale, Background, and Other Display Options...................... 621
Current Graph Controls.................................................................... 621
Selecting Data in Graphs ...................................................................... 622
Saving Selections............................................................................. 623
Viewing Selections in MapInfo and GraphMap................................ 624
Displaying Object Information.......................................................... 624
Clearing Selections .......................................................................... 624
Creating Permanent Selection Regions........................................... 625
Multi-Table Relationships...................................................................... 627
GeoLocated Graphs.............................................................................. 629
Define Graph Type........................................................................... 630
Create GeoLocated Graphs Wizard................................................. 632
View GeoLocated Graphs................................................................ 633
Global Options ................................................................................. 635
Displaying Statistics .............................................................................. 636
Changing the Style of Graph Objects.................................................... 637
Colour............................................................................................... 638
Advanced Colour Options........................................................... 638
Size.................................................................................................. 641
Advanced Sizing Options............................................................ 641
Symbol ............................................................................................. 642
Visibility............................................................................................ 643
Advanced Visibility Options......................................................... 643
Load and Save Styles from Legend................................................. 644
Displaying Legends.......................................................................... 645
Apply RGB Colours from Table........................................................ 645
GraphMap Settings ............................................................................... 646
Mouse Buttons Settings ................................................................... 646
Global Settings................................................................................. 646
General Options............................................................................... 647
Reset Layout.................................................................................... 647
Graph Window Settings ................................................................... 647
17 Working with Images .......................................................................... 649
Processing Images................................................................................ 649
Images and RAM Size ..................................................................... 650
Multi-image Processing.................................................................... 650
Registering and Rectifying Raster Images............................................ 651
Image Selection............................................................................... 651
Using the Rectify Image tool ............................................................ 653
Choose Image Projection............................................................ 654
Add (or edit) Map Control Points................................................. 655
Save Control Points .................................................................... 656
xvi Encom Discover User Guide
View Ground Control Points ....................................................... 656
Synchronise Modified Ground Control Points to Map/Image Control
Point Locations........................................................................... 656
Synchronise Modified Map/Image Control Point Locations to Ground
Control Points............................................................................. 656
Rectify......................................................................................... 657
Rectify Image Options ..................................................................... 657
Accuracy.......................................................................................... 658
Transformation Methods.................................................................. 658
Reprojecting an Image.......................................................................... 659
Image Tool............................................................................................ 661
Displaying Image Properties................................................................. 662
Enhancing an Image............................................................................. 663
Applying Image Filters .......................................................................... 664
Sharpness Filters............................................................................. 665
Edge Detect Filters .......................................................................... 665
Other Filters..................................................................................... 666
Clipping an Image................................................................................. 666
Rotating an Image ................................................................................ 668
Converting an Image to Another Format............................................... 668
Modifying Image Transparency............................................................. 670
18 Working with Drillholes ...................................................................... 673
Drillhole Data Workflow......................................................................... 674
Data Formats........................................................................................ 674
Drillhole Data Formats..................................................................... 675
Collar Table................................................................................ 675
Downhole Survey Table ............................................................. 676
Downhole Data Tables ............................................................... 677
Grid and Contour Surfaces......................................................... 678
Surface Geology......................................................................... 679
Section Lines.............................................................................. 679
Costean Data Formats..................................................................... 682
Costean Collar Tables................................................................ 683
Costean Survey Tables .............................................................. 684
Costean Downhole DataTables.................................................. 688
Costean Grid and Contour Surfaces........................................... 690
Importing Drillhole Data from Other Drillhole Applications.................... 690
Creating and Managing Drillhole Projects............................................. 690
Creating a New Drillhole Project...................................................... 691
Validating a Drillhole Database........................................................ 698
Validate Collars .......................................................................... 700
Validate Surveys......................................................................... 701
Validate Downholes.................................................................... 703
Validation Report........................................................................ 705
Table of Contents xvii
Project Database Caching............................................................... 712
Sharing Discover Drillhole Projects.................................................. 713
Modifying and Deleting Drillhole Projects......................................... 715
Assigning Costean/Trench Tables to the Project............................. 716
Opening Drillhole Projects................................................................ 719
Session Manager ............................................................................. 720
Creating a Subset of a Project......................................................... 721
Packaging Drillhole Projects ............................................................ 722
Desurveying Method............................................................................. 723
Creating Sections and Plans................................................................. 724
Horizontal Plan................................................................................. 724
Vertical Section................................................................................ 727
Dialog Help....................................................................................... 733
Section and Plan Creator Dialog Box.......................................... 733
Define Tab .................................................................................. 734
Offset Multiple Tab...................................................................... 739
Annotate Tab .............................................................................. 741
Label Editor Dialog Box......................................................... 743
Downhole Data Tab.................................................................... 744
Surfaces Tab............................................................................... 745
Managing Sections and Plans............................................................... 747
Display Section Parameters............................................................. 749
Open Sections.................................................................................. 750
Regenerate Sections........................................................................ 751
Rename a Section............................................................................ 752
Copy a Section................................................................................. 752
Add a Section................................................................................... 752
Close Sections ................................................................................. 752
Delete Sections................................................................................ 753
Sync Section Lines........................................................................... 753
Displaying Downhole Data.................................................................... 754
Missing Downhole Data Tables................................................... 759
Text Labels....................................................................................... 760
Source Data................................................................................ 761
Data Handling Options................................................................ 761
Style............................................................................................ 762
Position and Orientation.............................................................. 763
Format......................................................................................... 764
Downhole Graphs ............................................................................ 765
Source Data................................................................................ 766
Data Handling Options................................................................ 766
Scale........................................................................................... 767
Style............................................................................................ 768
Position....................................................................................... 769
Trace Shade..................................................................................... 770
Structure Ticks ................................................................................. 771
Display........................................................................................ 773
xviii Encom Discover User Guide
Depth Labels.................................................................................... 773
Using Setting Templates.................................................................. 774
Saving Setting Templates........................................................... 774
Using Existing Setting Templates............................................... 775
Sharing Settings Templates Between Users.............................. 776
Importing/Exporting Drillhole Projects and Templates................ 776
Displaying Downhole Logs.................................................................... 776
Define Log Display........................................................................... 778
Log Display Parameters .................................................................. 779
Global Settings ................................................................................ 781
Legend Editor ....................................................................................... 782
Create New Legend......................................................................... 784
Modifying Legend Entries ................................................................ 785
Additional Legend Modification Tools.............................................. 788
Importing Legends........................................................................... 789
Export Legends................................................................................ 790
Legend Configuration...................................................................... 790
Create Section Legend......................................................................... 791
Adding Sections to a Layout................................................................. 792
Adding a Map Grid to Sections............................................................. 795
Creating a Section Collar Plan.............................................................. 797
Interrogating Drillholes.......................................................................... 797
Digitizing Boundaries............................................................................ 798
Calculating Sectional Resources.......................................................... 798
Setup Resource Parameters ........................................................... 800
Downhole Compositing......................................................................... 804
Select Drillholes to Composite......................................................... 805
General Settings.............................................................................. 805
Composite Data Handling Options .................................................. 806
Composite by Cut-off Grade............................................................ 807
Composite by RL or Downhole Depth............................................. 810
Composite by Downhole Depth.................................................. 811
Composite by RL........................................................................ 812
Composite by Attribute .................................................................... 813
Generating 3D Coordinates.................................................................. 815
Calculating Maximum and EOH Values ............................................... 816
Analyse Maximum Downhole Grades.............................................. 816
Analyse EOH Downhole Grades and Data Values.......................... 818
Saving Display Settings........................................................................ 820
19 Working with Surfaces ....................................................................... 823
Introduction to Surface Gridding........................................................... 825
MapInfo Professional and Grid Files................................................ 827
Supported Grid Formats .................................................................. 827
Preferred Output Grid Format.......................................................... 829
Table of Contents xix
Creating Grids....................................................................................... 829
Interactive Gridding............................................................................... 829
Using the Interactive Gridding Tool.................................................. 830
Gridding Tool Preview Display......................................................... 831
Gridding Tool Input Tab................................................................... 833
Data Conditioning ....................................................................... 834
Grouping..................................................................................... 837
Breaklines ................................................................................... 839
Coincident Points........................................................................ 840
Statistics Explorer ....................................................................... 840
Gridding Tool Method Tab............................................................... 840
Minimum Curvature..................................................................... 842
Kriging......................................................................................... 843
Inverse Distance Weighting........................................................ 846
Spatial Neighbour ...................................................................... 849
Triangulation............................................................................... 850
Density Grid................................................................................ 851
Distance Grid.............................................................................. 853
Gridding Tool Search Tab................................................................ 854
Searching.................................................................................... 855
Anisotropy................................................................................... 856
Sample Selection........................................................................ 856
Gridding Rule.............................................................................. 857
Gridding Tool Geometry Tab............................................................ 857
Gridding Tool Output Tab................................................................. 859
Statistics Explorer ............................................................................ 862
Spreadsheet................................................................................ 863
Zoom, Selection and Display Controls........................................ 865
Display Modulation...................................................................... 866
Subsetting................................................................................... 866
Univariate.................................................................................... 866
Bivariate...................................................................................... 871
Spatial ......................................................................................... 873
Variogram................................................................................... 875
Model Variograms....................................................................... 877
Large and Multi-file Gridding................................................................. 880
When to Use Large and Multi-file Gridding...................................... 882
Using the Large and Multi-file Gridding Tool.................................... 882
Running the Gridding Tool .......................................................... 882
Re-running the Gridding................................................................... 884
Input Data Files................................................................................ 885
Gridding Workflows.......................................................................... 887
Triangulation .............................................................................. 887
Inverse Distance Weighting........................................................ 888
Minimum Curvature (Full)............................................................ 889
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)................................................... 890
Data Density ............................................................................... 891
xx Encom Discover User Guide
Data Point Separation (Distance)............................................... 891
Stamp Only................................................................................. 892
Interpolation Settings....................................................................... 893
Data Conditioning....................................................................... 893
Gridding Properties..................................................................... 893
Options ....................................................................................... 895
Gridding Methods ............................................................................ 897
Triangulation............................................................................... 897
Inverse Distance Weighting........................................................ 899
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)................................................... 901
Minimum Curvature (Full)........................................................... 903
Full minimum curvature vs stamped minimum curvature methods...
904
Data Density............................................................................... 905
Output Grid...................................................................................... 907
Converting Vector Files to Grids........................................................... 909
Interrogating a Grid............................................................................... 911
Interactive Query............................................................................. 912
Summary Statistics.......................................................................... 912
Statistics by Polygonal Region........................................................ 913
Grid Colour and Shading...................................................................... 913
Methods........................................................................................... 914
Transparency................................................................................... 916
LUT Editor........................................................................................ 916
Create Look-Up Table ..................................................................... 918
Sun-Shading.................................................................................... 919
Sun Shade.................................................................................. 920
Sun Highlight.............................................................................. 920
Histogram........................................................................................ 921
Percentile and Data Break Stretch Types................................... 922
Display a Colour Legend................................................................. 924
Filtering Grids ....................................................................................... 924
Preview Windows ............................................................................ 926
Grid Filter Information...................................................................... 926
Padding............................................................................................ 927
Applying Grid Filters ........................................................................ 928
Filling Holes ..................................................................................... 928
Saving the Filtered Grid................................................................... 928
Grid Filter Settings........................................................................... 929
Contouring a Grid ................................................................................. 930
Creating Contours............................................................................ 930
Contour Smoothing.......................................................................... 934
Labelling Contours........................................................................... 935
Positioning Contour Labels.............................................................. 936
Creating Polygonal Regions by Selection Criteria................................ 939
Select Cells by Surface Property..................................................... 939
Select Cells by Multiple Value Ranges............................................ 940
Table of Contents xxi
Creating Grid Profiles............................................................................ 942
Data Selection.................................................................................. 944
Interrogating Profiles........................................................................ 946
Navigating the Preview window....................................................... 947
Colouring and Controlling Profiles.................................................... 948
Line-of-Sight..................................................................................... 948
Customizing the Preview Appearance............................................. 949
Output .............................................................................................. 949
Creating Voronoi Polygons ................................................................... 950
Calculating Surface Properties and Volumes........................................ 952
Calculating the Volume Between Two Grids.................................... 952
Calculating Volumes by Level .......................................................... 953
Calculating Curvature....................................................................... 953
Calculating Cut-and-Fill Volumes..................................................... 953
Calculating Surface Areas................................................................ 953
Computing Cell Values by Expressions ................................................ 953
Creating an Expression............................................................... 956
Manipulating Grids ................................................................................ 958
Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool............................................... 959
Changing the Settings for the Grid Utilities Tool ......................... 961
Saving the Output Grid ............................................................... 962
Batch Processing Grids with Grid Utilities........................................ 963
Grid Utility Tools............................................................................... 965
Classify ....................................................................................... 967
Grid to Grid Clip.......................................................................... 967
Clip.............................................................................................. 968
Convert ....................................................................................... 970
Create RGB ................................................................................ 971
Curvature.................................................................................... 971
Cut/Fill......................................................................................... 972
Edit.............................................................................................. 974
Fill Holes ..................................................................................... 976
Flip.............................................................................................. 976
Merge.......................................................................................... 976
Outline......................................................................................... 978
Overlay........................................................................................ 978
Replace....................................................................................... 979
Reproject..................................................................................... 979
Resample.................................................................................... 981
Rotate ......................................................................................... 982
Shift............................................................................................. 982
Slope........................................................................................... 982
Split............................................................................................. 983
Statistics...................................................................................... 983
Surface Area............................................................................... 985
Vectorize..................................................................................... 986
Viewshed .................................................................................... 987
xxii Encom Discover User Guide
Volume ....................................................................................... 990
Dividing Grids into Tiles........................................................................ 991
Tile Layout....................................................................................... 992
Tile Naming...................................................................................... 993
Assigning Values from a Grid to Map Objects...................................... 993
Pre-computing Grid Statistics ............................................................... 994
Grid Handler Preferences..................................................................... 996
Initial Display.................................................................................... 997
Statistics Sampling.......................................................................... 997
Default Output Grid Format ............................................................. 997
Grid Drivers...................................................................................... 998
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis .......................................................... 999
Hydrology Workflow.............................................................................. 999
Fill Pits and Depressions .................................................................... 1006
Stream Centering (Burn-in)............................................................ 1006
Pit Fill ............................................................................................. 1007
Natural Pits and Depressions ........................................................ 1007
Flow Direction and Thresholding........................................................ 1009
Flow Direction and Slope (D8)....................................................... 1009
Flow Accumulation......................................................................... 1011
Define Flow Threshold................................................................... 1012
Flow Direction and Slope (DInfinity) .............................................. 1012
Stream Network and Watersheds....................................................... 1013
Stream Classification..................................................................... 1013
Watershed Processing................................................................... 1014
Distance to Stream........................................................................ 1015
Process Custom Outlets..................................................................... 1015
21 Working with Structural Data........................................................... 1017
About Structural Data ......................................................................... 1017
Displaying Structural Data as Orientated Symbols............................. 1018
Structural Data Options ................................................................. 1020
Digitizing Structural Data.................................................................... 1022
Dip and Plunge Angles ....................................................................... 1023
Discover Structure Codes................................................................... 1024
Dialog Help......................................................................................... 1026
Structural Data Manager Dialog Box............................................. 1026
Structural Data Mapper Dialog Box............................................... 1027
Structural Data Dialog Box............................................................ 1029
Table of Contents xxiii
22 Tenements ......................................................................................... 1031
Apply for an Australian Mineral Tenement.......................................... 1032
Application Tables.......................................................................... 1035
Interactive Block Selection............................................................. 1036
Manual Block Selection.................................................................. 1037
Displaying Graticular State Reference Grid........................................ 1038
Searching Australian Tenements........................................................ 1040
Manage Tenement Tables and Holder Aliases.............................. 1041
Downloading Tenement Data.............................................................. 1043
23 Replaced Utilities .............................................................................. 1047
Replaced Import and Export Tools...................................................... 1047
DXF Import..................................................................................... 1047
Dialog Help ............................................................................... 1048
DXF Import Dialog Box........................................................ 1048
Gemcom BT2 Import...................................................................... 1050
Dialog Help ............................................................................... 1051
Gemcom BT2 Import Dialog Box......................................... 1051
Convert v2.1 Grids ........................................................................ 1052
Replaced Drillhole Tools ..................................................................... 1052
Define New Section or Plan........................................................... 1053
Desurveying Method................................................................. 1053
Vertical Section......................................................................... 1054
Previewing the Section Envelope ........................................ 1055
Section Definition Parameters ............................................. 1056
Horizontal Plan.......................................................................... 1057
Plan Definition Parameters .................................................. 1058
Display Options......................................................................... 1058
Downhole Data .................................................................... 1058
Surfaces............................................................................... 1059
Annotation............................................................................ 1060
Multiple Sections.................................................................. 1061
Plot Section or Plan........................................................................ 1062
Calculate 3D Coordinates .............................................................. 1062
Calculating 3D Coordinates Midpoint........................................ 1064
Validate Drillhole Database............................................................ 1065
Modifying Invalid Data............................................................... 1067
Define New Polyline Section or Plan.............................................. 1070
Define New Trench or Costean...................................................... 1074
Create Trench Display.............................................................. 1075
Create Trench Plans................................................................. 1075
Create Trench Sections ............................................................ 1076
View Definition.......................................................................... 1077
Apply Downhole Trench Data................................................... 1079
xxiv Encom Discover User Guide
Combine Drillhole and Trench Section Views........................... 1079
Replaced Surface Tools ..................................................................... 1080
Select by Elevation, Slope, Aspect................................................ 1081
Grid Handlers................................................................................. 1081
Calculate Volume for a Level......................................................... 1082
Compute Slope or Aspect Grid...................................................... 1083
Contour a Grid............................................................................... 1083
Enhanced Layer Control (ELC)........................................................... 1085
Opening and Closing the ELC Window......................................... 1086
ELC Window Controls.................................................................... 1087
Configuring the ELC ...................................................................... 1089
Using the ELC................................................................................ 1089
Shortcut Menus ........................................................................ 1090
Layer Aliases ................................................................................. 1091
Layer Groups................................................................................. 1093
Limitations of the Grouped View............................................... 1096
Menus, Tools, and Dialog Boxes................................................... 1096
ELC Shortcut Menu.................................................................. 1096
ELC Map Shortcut Menu.......................................................... 1097
ELC Layer Shortcut Menu........................................................ 1098
Layer Control Options Dialog Box............................................ 1100
Favourites Dialog Box .............................................................. 1101
Window Properties Dialog Box................................................. 1102
Acknowledgements .......................................................................... 1103
Appendices ....................................................................................... 1105
A Customising Title Blocks ................................................................. 1107
Company Logo ................................................................................... 1107
Title Block Parameters........................................................................ 1111
Placeholders....................................................................................... 1112
Scale Bar ............................................................................................ 1114
B Projections and Transformations.................................................... 1115
Encom NTv2 Transformation.............................................................. 1115
MapInfo NTv2 Multiple Vector Reproject............................................ 1116
C Grid Calculator Syntax ..................................................................... 1119
Logical Operators ............................................................................... 1119
AND Operator................................................................................ 1119
Table of Contents xxv
NOT Operator ................................................................................ 1120
OR Operator................................................................................... 1120
XOR Operator................................................................................ 1121
IF Operator..................................................................................... 1122
Arithmetic Operators ........................................................................... 1123
Anti-Log Functions .............................................................................. 1123
Comparison Operators........................................................................ 1124
Boolean Operators.............................................................................. 1124
Trigonometric Operators ..................................................................... 1125
D Grid Filter Descriptions .................................................................... 1127
The Filtering Process .......................................................................... 1127
Available Grid Filters........................................................................... 1129
Smoothing Filters ........................................................................... 1129
Averaging Filters....................................................................... 1130
Gaussian Filters........................................................................ 1130
Enhancement Filters ...................................................................... 1131
Sharpening filters...................................................................... 1131
Line and Edge Enhance Filters................................................. 1132
Laplacian Filter.......................................................................... 1132
Laplacian of Gaussian .............................................................. 1132
Sobel Filters.............................................................................. 1133
Roberts Cross Filters ................................................................ 1133
Sun Angle Filters....................................................................... 1134
User-Defined Custom Filters.......................................................... 1134
Advanced Filters ............................................................................ 1134
Geophysical FFT Derivative Filters................................................ 1135
FFT Vertical Derivative Filters................................................... 1135
FFT Reduction to Pole Filter..................................................... 1135
FFT Reduction to Pole (Low Latitude) Filter ............................. 1136
FFT Reduction to Equator Filter................................................ 1137
Two Dimensional FFT Filter Descriptions ...................................... 1138
FFT Continuation Filter ............................................................. 1139
FFT Low Pass Filter.................................................................. 1139
FFT High Pass Filter................................................................. 1140
FFT Band Pass Filter................................................................ 1140
E Styles and Symbol Fonts.................................................................. 1141
Line Styles........................................................................................... 1141
Style Library........................................................................................ 1142
Geological Symbol Font...................................................................... 1142
Structural Symbol Font........................................................................ 1147
Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code ............................. 1148
Structure Symbols Ordered by Name............................................ 1153
xxvi Encom Discover User Guide
Hydrographic Symbol Font................................................................. 1158
Environmental Symbol Font................................................................ 1161
F Supported Data File Formats........................................................... 1163
Supported File Formats by Data Type................................................ 1163
Tabular and Vector Data................................................................ 1163
Raster Images ............................................................................... 1167
Gridded Surfaces........................................................................... 1168
Drillholes........................................................................................ 1170
Supported File Formats by File Name Extension............................... 1171
G Customising MapShop ..................................................................... 1179
Index .................................................................................................. 1189
1 Introducing Encom Discover 1
1 Introducing Encom Discover
Encom Discover is an extension to MapInfo Professional developed especially for
geoscientists. Encom Discover runs with MapInfo Professional
version 9.5 or
later on Windows
in ASCII format. Datamine ASCII files consist of header rows defining the field
names followed by the rows of data.
MapInfo files can also be exported in Datamine ASCII format so they can be read
directly into Datamine.
Importing Datamine Points
Importing Datamine Perimeters and Strings
Exporting to Datamine
Importing Datamine Points
Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII Import as Points
To import a Datamine ASCII point file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Datamine ASCII Import as Points.
The Advanced ASCII Import tool automatically recognises the standard
Datamine ASCII point file structure and makes the relevant selections.
Select the Show header check box to view the Datamine header
information. Click the Expand button to view the advanced import options.
For information about any settings on this dialog, see ASCII Data Import
Dialog Box. To modify the automatic assignments, see ASCII Data.
2. Click Import.
3. You are then asked to select the output table and location, and select a
projection.
Example Datamine ASCII point file:
7 Importing and Exporting 145
I N
FI LE CREATED BY SYSTEM USI NG DATAMI NE ON 03/ 05/ 28
8 8
COLOUR N 1 1 - 0. 100000E+31
XP N 1 2 0. 000000E+00
YP N 1 3 0. 000000E+00
ZP N 1 4 0. 000000E+00
PTN N 1 5 0. 000000E+00
PVALUE N 1 6 0. 000000E+00
SYMBOL N 1 7 - 0. 100000E+31
LSTYLE N 1 8 - 0. 100000E+31
1. 0 5669. 462 3481. 314 10148. 0 1. 0 182. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5670. 037 3478. 527 10148. 0 2. 0 182. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5668. 771 3478. 072 10148. 0 3. 0 182. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5668. 072 3481. 049 10148. 0 4. 0 182. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5669. 462 3481. 314 10148. 0 5. 0 182. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5666. 332 3442. 354 10148. 0 1. 0 183. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
1. 0 5665. 804 3441. 783 10148. 0 2. 0 183. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
Importing Datamine Perimeters and Strings
Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII Import as Polylines
To import a Datamine ASCII string file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Datamine ASCII Import as Polylines.
The Advanced ASCII Import tool automatically recognises the standard
Datamine ASCII string (polyline) file structure and makes the relevant
selections. Select the Show header check box to view the Datamine
header information. Click the Expand button to view the advanced import
options. For information about any settings on this dialog, see ASCII Data
Import Dialog Box. To modify the automatic assignments, see ASCII Data.
2. Click Import.
3. You are then asked to select the output table and location, and select a
projection.
146 Encom Discover User Guide
Example Datamine ASCII perimeter or string file:
I N
FI LE CREATED BY SYSTEM USI NG DATAMI NE ON 03/ 05/ 28
9 9
St r i ng_N N 1 1 - 0. 100000E+31
COLOUR N 1 2 - 0. 100000E+31
XP N 1 3 0. 000000E+00
YP N 1 4 0. 000000E+00
ZP N 1 5 0. 000000E+00
PTN N 1 6 0. 000000E+00
PVALUE N 1 7 0. 000000E+00
SYMBOL N 1 8 - 0. 100000E+31
LSTYLE N 1 9 - 0. 100000E+31
10. 0 1. 0 6034. 375 4083. 493 9045. 26 1. 0
176. 0 201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6031. 418 4082. 272 9045. 213 2. 0 176. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6028. 923 4080. 577 9045. 14 3. 0
176. 0 201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6027. 251 4078. 672 9045. 131 4. 0 176. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6025. 765 4076. 356 9045. 239 5. 0 176. 0
201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6025. 11 4075. 285 9045. 262 6. 0
176. 0 201. 0 1001. 0
10. 0 1. 0 6024. 77 4073. 3 9045. 316 7. 0
176. 0 201. 0 1001. 0
Exporting to Datamine
Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII Export
To export a MapInfo table as a Datamine ASCII file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Datamine ASCII Export.
The Datamine Export Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Under File details, click the Input table box and select the table to be
exported.
3. In the Output Datamine box, type or edit the output file name, or click the
browse button to navigate to the output folder and file.
7 Importing and Exporting 147
4. Under Elevation, click the Z value from column box and select the field
that defines the elevation, or type a default elevation in the Default Z
value box.
5. Under Attributes, select additional data fields (other than the X, Y, Z
coordinates) to be exported into the output file. To select multiple columns,
click and drag, or hold the SHIFT or CTRL key while you select columns.
6. If required, create a coordinate transform using the boxes under
Coordinate Transform.
7. Click OK to start the export.
Dialog Help
Datamine Export Dialog Box
Datamine Export Dialog Box
File details
Input table
Click to select the table to be exported.
Output Datamine
Click the browse button to select the output folder and type the output file name.
Elevation
Z value from column
Click to assign a column in the input table to the Datamine ZP elevation field. If
<None>is selected, the value in the Default Z value box is assigned to all points.
Default Z value
Type a default elevation.
Attributes
Select the attribute columns from the input table to be exported. Hold the CTRL or
SHIFT key to select multiple columns.
148 Encom Discover User Guide
Coordinate transform
Transform the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the form of the equations X =aX+b,
Y =aY+b, Z =aZ+b. For each coordinate, type the constant a in the Multiply by
box and the constant b in the Add/Subtract box. To export the coordinates
untransformed, set a=1 and b=0.
See also
... Datamine
DataShed
Discover>Import and Export>DataShed Database Import
The DataShed Database Import utility is an installation option for users working
with DataShed
Oasis
Montaj
data and string files into MapInfo tables. Discover reads the
MicroMine file, creates an appropriately structured table and inserts the data.
166 Encom Discover User Guide
To import a MicroMine file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Micromine Import.
2. You are asked to select the input file and output table, and then the
MicroMine Import Dialog Box is displayed.
3. Select the input file data type:
Data file: Select if the file contains sample and drillhole information,
including survey and downhole data files. The Micromine Data
Import Dialog Box is displayed.
String file: Select if the file contains string (polyline) data. The
Micromine String Import Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Select the import options:
For string files, select the fields in the input file that define the X and
Y coordinates, and the string ID. Options are also provided for
creating closed polygons and defining the line style.
5. Click OK to start the import.
Dialog Help
MicroMine Import Dialog Box
Micromine String Import Dialog Box
MicroMine Import Dialog Box
MicroMine File Type
Data file: Select if the file contains sample and drillhole information,
including survey and downhole data files.
String file: Select if the file contains string (polyline) data. The Micromine
String Import Dialog Box is displayed.
See also
... MicroMine
7 Importing and Exporting 167
Micromine Data Import Dialog Box
See also
...MicroMine
Micromine String Import Dialog Box
Get X coordinates from column
Click to assign an input field as the X coordinate.
Get Y coordinates from column
Click to assign an input field as the Y coordinate.
Get ID from column
Click to assign an input field as the ID column.
Convert closed polylines to regions
Select to convert closed polylines (polygons) to regions.
(Line style)
Click to select the line style.
See also
...MicroMine
MineSight
The MineSight Import utility enables you to import MineSight
Archive ASCII
files into MapInfo tables. The data can either be imported as points representing
each vertex in the string file, strings (polylines) or as closed strings (polygons).
7 Importing and Exporting 175
MapInfo files can be exported in Vulcan Archive ASCII format so they can be read
straight into Vulcan.
Importing Points and Polylines
Discover>Import and Export>Vulcan Archive Import
To import a Vulcan archive file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Vulcan Archive Import.
The Vulcan Import Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Next to the Input file box, click the browse button and select the input file.
3. In the Output file box, type or edit the output table name, or click the
browse button to navigate to the output folder and file.
4. In the Create Object type box, choose the object type.
5. Click Set Projection and choose the projection that the data coordinates
were recorded in.
6. If required, create a coordinate transform using the boxes under
Coordinate Transform.
7. Click OK to start the import.
Exporting to Vulcan
Discover>Import and Export>Vulcan Archive Export
To export a MapInfo table as a Vulcan archive file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Vulcan Archive Export.
Note The X, Y coordinate values will not be imported into the browser and the Z value
will be an average of the vertex Z values for each string in the original file
because MapInfo does not support multiple vertex records per object in a
browser.
176 Encom Discover User Guide
The is Vulcan Export Dialog Box displayed.
2. Under File details, click the Input file box and select the table to be
exported.
3. In the Output file box, type or edit the output file name, or click the
browse button to navigate to the output folder and file.
4. In the Name field box, select the column assigned to the Name field
(HoleID, for example) in the output file.
5. In the Value field box, select the column assigned to the Value field in the
output file.
6. In the Z field box, select the field that defines the elevation, or select the
Use fixed Z value check box and type the elevation in the adjacent box.
7. Under Attributes, select additional data fields (other than the X, Y, Z
coordinates) to be exported into the output file. To select multiple columns,
click and drag, or hold the SHIFT or CTRL key while you select columns.
8. If required, create a coordinate transform using the boxes under
Coordinate Transform.
9. Click OK to start the export.
Dialog Help
Vulcan Import Dialog Box
Vulcan Export Dialog Box
Vulcan Import Dialog Box
File details
Input file
Click the browse button to select the Surpac file to be imported.
Output file
Click the browse button to select the output folder and type the output TAB file
name.
7 Importing and Exporting 177
Create object type
Auto Select: Create either point, polyline or polygon objects depending
on whether there are single or multiple line entries per block of data.
Points Only: Create points for each vertex in the string file. Use this
option if you wish to import the string vertices only and preserve the
original string file X, Y, Z coordinate information.
Set Projection
Click to select a MapInfo projection.
Coordinate transform
Transform the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the form of the equations X =aX+b,
Y =aY+b, Z =aZ+b. For each coordinate, type the constant a in the Multiply by
box and the constant b in the Add/Subtract box. To import the coordinates
untransformed, set a=1 and b=0.
See also
...Vulcan
Vulcan Export Dialog Box
File details
Input file
Click the browse button to select the Mapinfo table to be exported.
Output file
Click the browse button to select the output folder and the output file name.
Output type
Select from the available options: Auto select, Points only, or Labels only.
Name field
Select the column assigned to the Name field (HoleID, for example) in the output
file.
178 Encom Discover User Guide
Value field
Select the column assigned to the Value field in the output file.
Z field
Select the column assigned to the Z coordinate in the output file.
Use fixed Z value
If the Z field is not assigned, select the check box and type a Z value.
Attributes
Select columns from the input table to be exported as attribute fields. Hold the
CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple columns.
Coordinate transform
Transform the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the form of the equations X =aX+b,
Y =aY+b, Z =aZ+b. For each coordinate, type the constant a in the Multiply by
box and the constant b in the Add/Subtract box. To import the coordinates
untransformed, set a=1 and b=0.
See also
... Vulcan
Vector Import
Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
The Vector Import wizard enables the importing of a wide range of 2D and 3D
vector formats into native TAB files. The tool can also batch import multiple files
and convert them into multiple TAB files. The supported file formats are:
3D Studio .3DS Google keyhole markup language .KML
AutoCAD .DXF GPS eXchange .GPX
Datamine wireframe *PT.DM, *TR.DM LizardTech MrSID .SID
ER Mapper vector .ERV MapInfo Professional .MIF
ESRI Shapefiles .SHP MapInfo Professional .TAB
ESRI TIN .ADF Surpac string .STR
Gemcom BT2 .BT2 Surpac wireframe .DTM, .STR
GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL, .VS Vulcan triangulation .00T
7 Importing and Exporting 179
To import a vector file:
1. Select Discover>Import or Export>Vector Import.
2. Select the file format you wish to import and click OK.
3. Select the files to import. Select multiple files by holding down the CTRL
key as you click on each file name. Click Open.
4. Review the Output folder location and if it is a 3D file, define the View
Angle by selecting Convert to 2D, viewed from the.
5. Click Import. The files are automatically opened in MapInfo Professional.
6. You may be prompted to select a projection for the output TAB files.
See also
...Transform Vector Files.
...Vector Export
Vector Export
Discover>Import and Export>Vector Export
The Vector Export wizard enables the exporting of a native TAB file to a wide
range of 2D vector formats. The tool can also batch export multiple TAB files and
convert them into multiple vector files.
The supported file formats are:
Note All files must be in the same projection.
Note The projection list available in the Discover Vector Import utility is stored in a
separate file to the MapI nf ow. pr j file. If you want to import into a custom
coordinate system which has been added to the MapI nf ow. pr j file then copy
the custom projection line into the Encom.prj file located in the
. . . \ Pr ogr amFi l es\ Encom\ Common\ Pr oj ect i ons folder.
AutoCAD .DXF
CSV text file .CSV
Encom .TKM
ESRI Shapefiles .SHP
180 Encom Discover User Guide
To export a vector file:
1. Select Discover>Import or Export>Vector Export.
2. Select the TAB files to export from those open in MapInfo. Select multiple
files by holding down the CTRL key as you click on each file name. Click
Open.
3. Review the Output folder location.
4. Click Export.
See also
... Transform Vector Files
... Vector Import
Transform Vector Files
Discover>Import and Export>Transform Vector File
The Transform Vector File utility can transform, reproject, and convert a wide
range of vector file formats. The following input file formats are supported:
GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL, .VS
Google keyhole markup language .KML
GPS eXchange .GPX
MapInfo Professional .MIF
MapInfo Professional .TAB
Surpac string .STR
3D Studio .3DS
AutoCAD .DXF
Datamine wireframe (point and triangle) .DM
ER Mapper vector .ERV
ESRI shapefiles .SHP
ESRI TIN .ADF
Gemcom .BT2
GOCAD vector .TS, .PL, .VS
Google Keyhole Markup Language .KML
GPS exchange .GPX
LizardTech MrSID .SID
7 Importing and Exporting 181
When converting between file formats (with or without transformation and/or
reprojection), the following output vector file formats can be created:
The Transform Vector File dialog
MapInfo Professional .MIF
MapInfo Professional .TAB
Surpac string .STR
Surpac wireframe .DTM , .STR
Vulcan triangulation .00T
AutoCAD .DXF
CSV text file .CSV
Encom .TKM
ESRI shapefiles .SHP
GOCAD vector .TS
Google Keyhole Markup Language .KML
GPS exchange .GPX
MapInfo Professional .MIF
MapInfo Professional .TAB
Surpac string .STR
182 Encom Discover User Guide
A range of Transformation options are available as independent X, Y and/or Z
operations, allowing vector objects to be scaled, offset and/or rotated.
Vector files can also be Reprojected to accommodate absolute coordinate
handling in Discover 3D. For instance, if all of your MapInfo data is in a UTM
projection, but an ore body DXF model from a CAD program is in a different
projection, this option will enable the DXF to be reprojected into the same
projection as the rest of the 3D data. Enable the Reproject Coordinates option,
and set the appropriate Source and Target projections using the Choose
buttons.
Other processing options include:
Convert to 2D - converts an appropriate 3D input Vector file into a 2D
view. It can be viewed from each axial direction.
Convert to point cloud - converts all nodes/vertices in the input vector
object to individual point objects in the output vector file.
Smooth polylines and polygons - applies a line smoothing filter, with a
width defined over the nearest nodes.
Correct polygon vertex order problems - checks the node order in all
polygon objects. Outer parts will be stored clockwise and inner holes will
be stored counter-clockwise.
Compress polylines and polygons - removes any nodes with a spacing
less than the defined distance.
Convert closed polylines to polygons - converts any closed polyline
objects to a polygon object. This is particularly useful for formats such as
DXF which do not have a polygon object type, but do have closed polyline
objects.
Convert polylines with on point to point objects and polygons with
two points to polylines - removes any erroneous objects.
Note The projection list available in the Discover Vector Import utility is stored in a
separate file to the MapI nf ow. pr j file. If you wish to reporejct into a custom
coordinate system which has been added to the MapI nf ow. pr j file then copy
the custom projection line into the Encom. pr j file located in the
. . . \ Pr ogr amFi l es\ Encom\ Common\ Pr oj ect i ons folder.
7 Importing and Exporting 183
Raster Imagery
Discover provide supports a number of different located image formats (see
Supported Data File Formats) and tools for importing and exporting raster
imagery:
Rectifying Raster Images
ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
ER Mapper Algorithm Referencing ECW Images
Encom EGB
Saving a Map Window as a Registered Raster Image
Rectifying Raster Images
Use Images>Rectify Image to import and register other types of raster imagery.
For more information, see Registering and Rectifying Raster Images.
See also
...Importing an EGB Image
...ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
...Saving a Map Window as a Registered Raster Image
ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/JPEG2000 Import
Use the Discover ALG/ECW/J PEG2000 tool to:
Load and correctly register ECW or J P2000 located images in MapInfo
Professional.
Automatically import ER Mapper algorithm (.ALG) files referencing ECW
imagery, BILs or ERMapper grids.
Load and open images from an ECWP or IWS image server. ECWP files
are defined by a URL that starts with a ecwp: / / prefix.
184 Encom Discover User Guide
To open a local ALG/ECW/JP2 image file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click ECW/
JPEG2000 Import.
The Open ECW/P, ALG or JP2 Image Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Under Open, select Open ECW, JP2 or ALG file. to open a file from the
local disk or network.
3. Click the Open button and select an image file to open. The image is
displayed under Preview and its details are displayed under Image
properties. Use the preview toolbar to examine the image.
4. If an appropriate projection is found in the image file, this will be
automatically set and displayed in the Image Projection box, otherwise
click the browse button next to the Map Projection box and select a
MapInfo projection. Do not override the projection defined in the input file;
instead, import the file, and then use Images>Reproject Image to
reproject the image.
5. Check the dimensions of the Image in Columns x Rows, and further
information can be found under the Information button.
Note This functionality does not support .ALG files referencing linked ECWP,
embedded .ERV, or dynamic links.
7 Importing and Exporting 185
6. Select the Open Image as Raster radio button.
7. Click Open.
To open an ECW/JP2 image file from an Image Server:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click ALG/
ECW/JPEG2000 Import.
The Open ECW/P, ALG or JP2 Image Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Under Open, select Open file from Image Server.
3. Type or paste the URL link in the text box. Make sure to include the
ecwp: / / prefix.
4. Click the Load button to open the ECWP link in the preview area.
5. If an appropriate projection is found in the image file, this will be
automatically set and displayed in the Image Projection box, otherwise
click the browse button next to the Map Projection box and select a
MapInfo projection. Do not override the projection defined in the input file;
instead, import the file, and then use Images>Reproject Image to
reproject the image.
6. Check the dimensions of the Image in Columns x Rows, and further
information can be found under the Information button.
7. Select the Open Image as Raster radio button.
8. Click Open. You are pormpted to select an output file name and location.
When processed, this generates both a TAB and an IWS file on the local
disk. The IWS is a metadata file listing details about the Image Web
Server ECWP link.
ECWP Image web servers can be found via the internet, or on local database
servers. There is a number of free access and subscription based websites which
provide access to ECW imagery databases via the internet.
When ECWP file is opened in Discover, a local TAB file and a local metadata link
file with the extension IWS is created. The IWS file contains information such as
the URL location of the ECWP file.
Note ECW/J PEG2000 grids are not supported by the Discover Surfaces module.
186 Encom Discover User Guide
If you have an ECW which contains no embedded registration, these can also be
registered in MapInfo using this tool. When non-projection information is found,
you can select the desired projection and enter in the top-left corner and pixel
height and width, which is then used to automatically determine and register the
image corner points.
See also
... Importing an EGB Image
... Rectifying Raster Images
... Reprojecting an Image
... Converting an Image to Another Format
Dialog Help
Open ECW/P, ALG or JP2 Image Dialog Box
Open ECW/P, ALG or JP2 Image Dialog Box
Open
Open ECW, JP2 or ALG file: Open a file from the local disk or network.
Open file from Image Web Server (ECWP): Open a file from an Image
Web Server.
File
Click the Open button to select the input file and location. When selected, the
image is displayed under Preview, and its properties are displayed under Image
properties.
Image properties
The properties of the selected image file are displayed.
Columns x Rows
Displays the number of columns and rows in the raster grid. Click to display
additional information about the grid.
(Grid Information)
Click to display information about the raster grid, including the coordinate
range, number of columns and rows, and other data.
7 Importing and Exporting 187
Image projection
If available, the projection defined in the input file is displayed.
Map projection
To change or set the image projection, click the browse button and select a
MapInfo projection.
Top left
Displays the top-left coordinates registered in the input file.
Open image as
The image can be opened as either a raster or grid. However, ECW/J PEG2000
grids are not supported by the Discover Surfaces module.
Preview
The imported image is displayed.
Preview toolbar
Use the controls to zoom in and out, zoom to extents, zoom to true scale, and
restore previous view.
ER Mapper Algorithm Referencing ECW Images
See ALG/ECW/JPEG2000.
Note Do not override the image projection. To reproject an image after it has been
imported, use Images>Reproject Image.
Note This functionality does not support .ALG files referencing linked ECWP,
embedded .ERV, or dynamic links.
188 Encom Discover User Guide
Encom EGB
Importing an EGB Image
Exporting as an EGB Image
Importing an EGB Image
Discover>Import and Export>Encom PA Located Image Import
Discover can automatically import EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) files
created in Encom PA or Discover 3D. EGB files are text header files that are used
to open and display image files such as .BMP, .J PG, and .PNG in 3D
georeferenced space.
Example Encom Georeferenced Bitmap (EGB) file:
Geor ef er enceI mage Begi n
Comment s = " "
Ver si on = " 1. 0"
I mage = " Kangar oo_Fl at s_Geochem_Map. png"
I mageFor mat = PNG
Geomet r y = QUAD
Coor di nat eSpace Begi n
Pr oj ect i on = " Tr ansver se Mer cat or ( Gauss- Kr uger ) "
Dat um= " Aust r al i an Geodet i c 1966 ( AGD 66) "
Uni t s = " km"
Coor di nat eSpace End
Regi st r at i on Begi n
TopLef t = 373570, 5380784. 86, 0
TopRi ght = 400692. 53, 5380784. 86, 0
Bot t omLef t = 373570, 5356994. 78, 0
Bot t omRi ght = 400692. 53, 5356994. 78, 0
Regi st r at i on End
Geor ef er enceI mage End
To import an EGB located image:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Encom PA Located Image Import.
The EGB Import Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Under File details, next to the Input EGB file box, click the browse button
and select the input file.
7 Importing and Exporting 189
3. In the Output TAB file box, type or edit the output table name, or click the
browse button to navigate to the output folder and file.
4. If a transparent colour is defeined in the input file, select Use transparent
colour from EGB.
5. Click Set Projection and choose the projection that the image
coordinates were created in.
6. If required, under Coordinate Transform, reassign the X and Y
coordinates. For example, you can map the Z field in a vertical section as
the Y field in the map window.
7. Click OK to start the import.
See also
...ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
...Rectifying Raster Images
Exporting as an EGB Image
Discover>Import and Export>Encom PA Located Image Export
MapInfo files can be exported as EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) files so
they can be read straight into Encom PA or Discover 3D. The MapInfo map
window is converted into a PNG file with an associated EGB (Encom
Georeferenced Bitmap) header file.
To export a map window as an EGB located image:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and then click
Encom PA Located Image Export.
The Export Map to Encom PA Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Under Windows available for export, select the map window to be
exported.
3. In the Height for Z axis box, type the elevation (Z) in metres.
4. Click OK to start the import.
190 Encom Discover User Guide
Exporting Drillhole Sections as EGB Images
You can also export sections and plans from a Discover drillhole project using
Drillholes>Import or Export>Export Sections as Encom PA Located Image.
This will correctly register a plan or cross-section in 3D.
See also
... ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
... Rectifying Raster Images
Saving a Map Window as a Registered Raster Image
Use Discover>Map Window>Convert Map to Registered Raster to save a
map window as a registered raster image. For more information, see Saving a
Map Window as a Registered Raster Image.
See also
... Importing an EGB Image
... Exporting as an EGB Image
... ALG/ECW/JPEG2000
... Rectifying Raster Images
Dialog Help
EGB Import Dialog Box
Export Map to Encom PA Dialog Box
EGB Import Dialog Box
Imports an EGB (Encom Georeferenced Bitmap) file into a MapInfo table.
File details
Input EGB file
Click the browse button to select the EGB file to be imported.
Output TAB file
Click the browse button to select the output folder and the output TAB file name.
Use transparent colour from EGB
If defined, select to import the transparent colour setting from the EGB file.
7 Importing and Exporting 191
Set Projection
Click to select a MapInfo projection. The projection defined in the EGB and the
selected projection are displayed.
Coordinate transform
Select the fields in the EGB file that you want mapped to the X and Y coordinates
fields in the output table. For example, you can map the Z field in a vertical section
as the Y field in the map window.
See also
...Importing an EGB Image
Export Map to Encom PA Dialog Box
Windows available for export
Select the map window to be converted.
Height for Z axis
Type a Z value.
See also
...Exporting as an EGB Image
Surface Grids
Use MapInfo Professionals File>Open option to import the following grid file
types, and set the Files of Types to Grid Image:
ASEG GXF (.GXF)
Band Interleaved by Line (.BIL including .HDR)
DTED (..DIR, .DT1, .DT2)
ER Mapper (.ERS)
ESRI/Arc ASCII (.ASC, .TXT)
ESRI/Arc Binary (.ADF)
ESRI/Arc FLT binary (.FLT)
192 Encom Discover User Guide
Geopak (.GRD)
Geosoft (.GRD)
GeoTIFF with embedded elevation (.TIF)
Landmark (.GRD)
MapInfo Grid (.MIG)
Minex (.XYZ)
Surfer ASCII (.GRD)
Surfer Binary (.GRD)
USGS (.USG)
USGS DEM (.DEM)
USGS SDTS (.TAR)
Vertical Mapper (.GRD)
The formats above can also be imported from the Surfaces>Import Grid File
menu (see Alternative Grid Import Tools); however, File>Open is the
recommended method.
Use Discover Surfaces>Import Grid File menu to import the following grid file
types:
ASCII Grid
HGT Grid
Use Discover Surfaces>Export Grid File menu to export grids:
Export Grid to ASCII File
Export Grid
Other tools:
Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid
7 Importing and Exporting 193
ER Mapper Algorithm Referencing ER Mapper Grids
See ALG/ECW/JPEG2000.
ASCII Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
Discover can convert and register ASCII format grids, i.e. text file format, so they
can be displayed and queried using the Discover Surfaces module. ASCII grid
files may contain X, Y and Z values or just Z values only.
ASCII grid import dialog configured for an XYZ value format
To import an ASCII Grid:
1. Open the ASCII Grid Import dialog
2. Use the Browse button to select the ASCII grid File to Import (*.TXT,
*.ACS or *.CSV formats)
Note This functionality does not support .ALG files referencing linked ECWP,
embedded .ERV, or dynamic links.
194 Encom Discover User Guide
3. The Output Grid will automatically be assigned with the same name as
the input grid and default to the preferred grid format specified in
Discover>Configuration>Grid Handlers. Both the saved grid name and
saved grid type can be modified using the Browse button adjacent to the
Output Grid control.
4. Use the File Format pull-down list to select whether the grid file contains
X, Y and Z values or Z values only. The dialog options for these formats
are discussed further below.
5. If there are null cell values used such as -9999 enter these into the Null
cell value window.
6. Select a colour look-up table to display the grid once it is created from the
Image Shading pull-down list.
7. Select the projection of the ASCII grid using the Map Projection button.
8. Select a Coord Type either the Cell Lower Left Corner or the Cell Center.
This specifies at which point the XY coordinates refer to in each cell.
9. Press OK to complete the ASCII grid import process.
X Y Z values file format
XYZ ASCII files contain a row for each cell listing its X and Y coordinate
information and Z value. In the Coord type control (bottom of the dialog), the XY
coordinates must be specified as referring either to the Cell Centre or the Cell
Corner point.
7 Importing and Exporting 195
ASCII XYZ file displayed in a text editor
Z values only file format
If the ASCII grid file contains Z values only, the Import Properties dialog is
automatically displayed requesting further grid information:
196 Encom Discover User Guide
Import Properties dialog
The following information must be specified for a Z-values only grid:
the number of rows and columns in the grid
the origin (XY coordinates) of the grid
the grid cell size.
Discover can automatically obtain this information if the grid to import is an ESRI
ASCII Grid as the grid dimensions are stored in the Header of this grid file type.
If the grid file does not contain a header the grid dimensions will need to be
entered manually.
Discover also must know where to start importing the grid from and whether to
import by row or column. When complete, click OK to return to the ASCII Grid
Import dialog.
7 Importing and Exporting 197
HGT Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>HGT Grid
NASA Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) data is available in a binary
height file format (*.HGT). Discovers HGT Importer imports both 1 and 3 arc-
second HGT files as ERMapper grids for use in the MapInfo environment.
To import a HGT file:
1. From within the tool, first select the appropriate arc-second size (1 or 3
seconds).
2. Press Process files, and select one or more HGT files to import. Press
OK to generate the necessary ERS header and TAB file/s
3. Close the dialog, and use MapInfos File>Open to browse for the newly
created TAB files. Open these.
A source of HGT grid files is NASAs FTP site at ftp://e0srp01u.ecs.nasa.gov/
srtm/version2/. This has both SRTM1 (1 arc-second) data covering the US and its
territories and possessions, and SRTM3 (3 arc-second) data covering the world.
Alternative Grid Import Tools
The formats below can be imported from the Surfaces>Import Grid File menu;
however, File>Open is the recommended method for these formats.
BIL Grid
ER Mapper Grid
ESRI ASCII Grid
Geosoft Grid
198 Encom Discover User Guide
Minex Grid
Surfer Grid
Vertical Mapper Grid
USGS SDTS TAR Grid
The Discover Surfaces>Import Grid File option provides a method that enables
the user to check the grid header file during the import process.
When importing the grid files Discover will attempt to read the grid geometry
information from the grid file header. If Discover cannot access the grid geometry
information it will check the grid file size, the number of cells and the cell size to
ensure that the grid geometry is valid. Modify or enter any additional information
necessary in the registration dialog. When importing a grid using Discover specify
an appropriate MapInfo Projection for the grid file so it can be correctly registered.
When a grid is imported into MapInfo, a .TAB file is created that defines the
filename, format ("raster") and the origin and extents of the data. The coordinate
system and projection information is also specified. The TAB file also contains
metadata relating to the statistics and colour applied to the display of the grid in
MapInfo. The following is an example TAB file containing grid display metadata
for an ER Mapper grid:
! t abl e
! ver si on 500
! char set Wi ndowsLat i n1
Def i ni t i on Tabl e
Fi l e " png_composi t esr t m. er s"
Type " RASTER"
( 128. 999583333333, 0. 000416638889) ( 0, 0) Label " Pt 1" ,
( 155. 000415626633, 0. 000416638889) ( 31201, 0) Label " Pt 2" ,
( 128. 999583333333, - 11. 000416254411) ( 0, 13201) Label " Pt 3" ,
( 155. 000415626633, - 11. 000416254411) ( 31201, 13201) Label " Pt 4"
Coor dSys Ear t h Pr oj ect i on 1, 104
Uni t s " degr ee"
Rast er St yl e 6 1
begi n_met adat a
" \ Encom" = " "
" \ Encom\ Gr i d" = " "
" \ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay" = " "
" \ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Mi n Cel l Val ue t o Col our " = " - 60. 00000000000"
" \ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Type" = " 3"
" \ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunEl evat i on" = " 60. 0"
" \ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Max Cel l Val ue t o Col our " = " 4805. 000000000"
7 Importing and Exporting 199
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Col our i ng" = " "
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Col our i ng\ I nt er pol at eCol or " = "1"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunHi ghl i ght El evat i on" = "60. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ MaxCel l Val ue" = " 4805. 0000000000"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunI nt ensi t ySat ur at i on" = " 100. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunCol or Sat ur at i on" = " 0. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunAzi mut hDeg" = " 45. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunHi ghl i ght I nt ensi t y" = "40. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunHi ghl i ght " = " 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunHi ghl i ght Azi mut h" = " 315. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunHi ghl i ght Sat ur at i on" = " 0. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ LUT" = " pseudocol or . l ut "
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ Mi nCel l Val ue" = " - 60. 000000000"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunShadowDept h" = " 50. 0"
"\ Encom\ Gr i d\ Di spl ay\ SunShadi ng" = " 0"
"\ I sReadOnl y" = " FALSE"
end_met adat a
BIL Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>BIL Grid
The Band Interleaved by Line (BIL) format for storing gridded surface data is a
popular format and is readable by many other software packages, such as ER
Mapper and Arc/Info. The BIL format simply stores each grid cell value
sequentially starting at the upper left and proceeding by row towards the lower
right. The geometry of the BIL grid file is defined in an associated .HDR file (that
states the number of rows and columns as well as other information).
The BIL format used by Discover allows grid cells of any values to be stored, as
well as null cell values (grid cells that do not have an interpolated value). Discover
can also read BIL files created in other software and on UNIX workstations.
Discover can automatically register BIL grids (and the corresponding .HDR file)
using the information in the .HDR file. For the grid to register correctly select an
appropriate MapInfo projection using the CoordSys button to correspond with the
coordinate system of the BIL file.
200 Encom Discover User Guide
BIL Grid import parameters with selected projection
ER Mapper Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>ER Mapper Grid
The ER Mapper software image/grid format is described in detail in the ER
Mapper Open Standards documentation. The grid format is unchanged from
Versions 3.x, 4.x, 5.x and 6.x of ER Mapper. The standard raster image that may
be displayed by ER Mapper software can be imported as a Discover grid. The
image/grid is actually defined by two files, a header (.ERS file) plus a binary data
file. The content of the .ERS file is defined in ER Mapper documentation but an
example is shown below:
Dat aset Header Begi n
Ver si on= ' 5. 5'
Last Updat ed= Thu Mar 3 23: 38: 11 GMT 1995
Sensor Name= ' GEOTEM'
SenseDat e= Fr i Nov 19 06: 07: 58 GMT 1996
Dat aSet Type= ERSt or age
Dat aType= Rast er
Byt eOr der = MSBFi r st
Coor di nat eSpace Begi n
Dat um= ' AGD66'
7 Importing and Exporting 201
Pr oj ect i on= ' TMAMG53'
Coor di nat eType= EN
Uni t s= ' METERS'
Rot at i on= 0: 0: 0. 0
Coor di nat eSpace End
Rast er I nf o Begi n
Cel l Type= Si gned32Bi t I nt eger
Nul l Cel l Val ue= - 9999999
Cel l I nf o Begi n
Xdi mensi on= 50
Ydi mensi on= 50
Cel l I nf o End
Nr Of Li nes= 128
Nr Of Cel l sPer Li ne= 320
Regi st r at i onCoor d Begi n
East i ngs= 327600
Nor t hi ngs= 8595050
Regi st r at i onCoor d End
Nr Of Bands= 2
BandI d Begi n
Val ue= ' Channel 16'
Uni t s= ' ppm'
BandI d End
BandI d Begi n
Val ue= ' Channel 3'
Uni t s= ' ppm'
BandI d End
Rast er I nf o End
Dat aset Header End
202 Encom Discover User Guide
ER Mapper Grid import parameters with selected projection
Discover automatically registers an ER Mapper dataset (an .ERS file and
accompanying grid file). Select the appropriate coordinate system using the
CoordSys button and the registration dialog displays the information from the ER
Mapper header file.
ESRI ASCII Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>ESRI ASCII Grid
Discover can automatically register ESRI ASCII grids, so they can be displayed
and manipulated using the Discover Surfaces module.
Note When ER Mapper grids are created by Discover the Datum and Projection
variables in the .ERS file are NOT set to the projection of the input data points.
Instead the Datum and Projection fields are set to RAW, RAW by default. To
open an .ERS grid which has been created by Discover in ER Mapper these
variables must be edited and replaced with the correct ER Mapper Projection
and Datum variables that equate to the projection of the original point data used
by Discover. If the RAW, RAW variables are not replaced with the correct
Projection & Datum information the .ERS file will not open in ER Mapper 6.0 or
later.
Note Any *.ERS files created as a virtual dataset are not registered.
7 Importing and Exporting 203
The structure of ESRI ASCII grid file (opened in a text editor).
ESRI ASCII grids generally have a six line header at the beginning of the file
which contains information relating to the number of rows and columns in the grid,
the lower left hand corner X and Y coordinates, the grid cell size and the null data
value. Each entry under the header represents the z value of a grid cell. The order
of the data is from left to right along each row at a time.
To import an ESRI ASCII grid:
1. Open the Import ESRI ASCII grid dialog by selecting the
Surfaces>Import Grid Files>ESRI ASCII Grid menu option.
2. Use the Browse button to navigate to and select the target grid. The
importer will automatically detect the ESRI ASCII grid geometry and
populate the dialog with the correct details.
3. By default the grid projection will not be defined. Click on the Projection
button and choose the correct projection for the grid.
4. To import the grid into MapInfo click the OK button.
204 Encom Discover User Guide
The ESRI ASCII Grid Importer Dialog
Geosoft Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>Geosoft Grid
The Geosoft binary grid format is composed of two elements:
a 512 byte grid header
the grid/image data
Specific details of the contents of these files can be obtained from Geosoft
(Toronto, Canada). Some revisions of the grid format have been made and the
import utility within Discover has been established to comply with the grid format
current as of March 2000.
When importing a Geosoft grid select an appropriate MapInfo coordinate system
using the CoordSys button to enable the Geosoft grid to be correctly registered.
Note Discover supports both uncompressed and compressed Geosoft Grids
7 Importing and Exporting 205
Geosoft Grid import parameters with selected projection
Minex Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>Minex Grid
Discover has the facility to Import Minex Grid files. The Minex .XYZ grid format
is typically used in Surpac Minex software package for the display of 3D surfaces.
The Minex Grid utility is capable of importing multi-banded .XYZ datasets.
206 Encom Discover User Guide
Typical Minex XYZ Grid ASCII data format
The geometry of the Minex grid is defined in the header of the grid file:
Origin - Grid origin located at the lower left grid cell centre
Extent - Refers to the dimensions of the grid
Mesh - Size of the grid cells
Rotation - Rotation applied to the grid.
X and Y - Start position and length for X and Y data values
Band* - Start position and length for each data band.
To import a Minex grid, navigate to Surfaces>Import Grid Files>Minex Grid
menu option.
Note The Minex utility is not currently designed to display rotated grids upon import.
To rotate a grid after it has been imported use the Surfaces>Grid
Utilities>Rotate tool. Although Discover can import multi-banded Minex grids,
the grid will not be separated into its component bands on import. To separate a
multi-banded grid, use the Discover>Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Split utility.
7 Importing and Exporting 207
Minex Grid Importer Dialog
In the Import Minex grid dialog use the Browse button to navigate to the folder
where the grid file is located and select the grid.
The importer will automatically detect the Minex grid geometry and populate the
dialog with the correct details. If you wish to alter the grid registration this can be
done within the Import Minex Grid dialog.
By default the grid projection will not be defined. Click on the Projection button
and choose the correct projection for the grid.
To import the grid into MapInfo click the OK button.
Surfer Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>Surfer Grid
Discover supports the Surfer GS Binary Grid file format. These grid files have a
.GRD file extension. When importing a Surfer GS Binary grid Discover will
automatically determine the grid dimensions and grid geometry. The projection in
which the grid was originally created must be known prior to import as the Surfer
binary grid format does not contain any coordinate system information.
When importing a Surfer grid select an appropriate MapInfo coordinate system
using the CoordSys button to enable the Surfer grid to be correctly registered.
208 Encom Discover User Guide
Surfer Grid import parameters with selected projection
Surfer ASCII grids may be imported using the Import ASCII Grid option but will
need to be modified to conform to standard ASCII grid import format. Any header
information would need to be removed from the file and the grid then imported
using the ASCII Grid Import Z-values only option. The number of grid rows and
columns, the grid origin and grid cell size information from the original header
information will need to be entered manually.
Vertical Mapper Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>Vertical Mapper Grid
Vertical Mapper grids are supported in MapInfo Professional 5.5 or later as read
only files. A Vertical Mapper grid is a binary format grid with the file extension
default of .GRD. Vertical Mapper can export a number of different grid formats
including ASCII grids.
Discover includes a read/write Grid Handler for Vertical Mapper format grids so
they can be read and modified by the Discover Surfaces utilities. An appropriate
MapInfo coordinate system must be selected using the CoordSys button to
enable the Vertical Mapper grid to be correctly registered.
7 Importing and Exporting 209
Vertical Mapper Grid import parameters with selected projection
In order to modify a grid created by Vertical Mapper using Discover the Vertical
Mapper grid file must be toggled on within Discover. See Surfaces>Import Grid
File>Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid for more information.
For information on the formats of each of the above, refer to the Vertical Mapper
User Guide.
USGS SDTS TAR Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>USGS SDTS TAR
The United States Geological Survey (USGS) provides Digital Elevation Model
(DEM) data across the entire United States. One of the formats which is provided
free of charge to the general public is DEM data captured at 1:24,000 or 7.5
minute scale. This 1:24,000 scale provides elevation data in 30 x 30 meter
spacings with each DEM tile corresponding to the USGS 7.5 minute topographic
quadrangle map series for the United States.
Note When a Vertical Mapper grid is associated with Discover the grid will not be able
to be modified in Vertical Mapper until the format handling is toggled back to
Vertical Mapper. This is done by re-selecting the Surfaces>Import Grid
File>Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid menu option.
210 Encom Discover User Guide
1:24,000 scale DEM data is available in SDTS format only. Spatial Data Transfer
Standard (SDTS) format is a standard industry file format used to share or
transfer spatial data between different computer systems. The 1:24,000 DEM
data files in SDTS format can be downloaded from GIS Data Depot http://
gisdatadepot.com/dem, from MapMart.com at www.mapmart.com, and from
Advanced Topographic Development and Images (ATDI) at www.atdi-us.com.
Once the appropriate DEM file is selected from one of the websites listed above,
download both the DEM data file and the corresponding text file to your computer.
The DEM dataset is made up of a number of files which have been packaged
together as a .TAR archive file and then saved using the gzip compression format.
For example, the Bear Hole 1:24,000 DEM from Big Horn county, Montana
download file is named 1630650.DEM.SDTS.TAR.GZ. The corresponding
1630650.DEM.SDTS.TXT file can be opened using any text editor such as
WordPad, NotePad, etc and contains information about the DEM data including
cell size, grid origin and projection information which will be required in order to
import the DEM data successfully.
In Windows Explorer open the 1630650.DEM.SDTS.TAR.GZ file using WinZip or
an equivalent zip file software application. A message similar to the following
should appear:
The Discover USGS DEM import utility uses the contained .TAR file to import,
extract and display the DEM data. Therefore do not decompress the contents of
this file to a temporary folder and open it but click NO in order to display the
contents of the 1630650.DEM.SDTS.TAR.GZ file in WinZip:
7 Importing and Exporting 211
1. Copy this zipped 1630650.dem.sdts.tar file into a folder in Windows
Explorer. The DEM data is now ready to import using Discover.
2. Select Import Grid File>USGSDEM Grid from the Discover>Surfaces
menu.
3. Browse to the folder in Windows Explorer containing the DEM .TAR file
and click Open.
The Discover USGSDEM Grid Registration dialog is displayed with the number of
columns and rows, the top left X and Y grid coordinates and the cell height and
width already populated.
212 Encom Discover User Guide
Click on the CoordSys button and select the correct projection. The 1:24,000
DEM grids are generally in the Universal Transverse Mercator (NAD 27 for US)
projection and the correct zone information can be found in the corresponding
TXT file discussed earlier. Click OK to create the grid. The DEM grid is displayed
in grey scale in a new map window and can be used with any of the Discover
Surfaces grid menu options and tools. To re-open the USGS DEM grid simply
select the .TAB file in the MapInfo File>Open dialog.
Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid
Surfaces>Import Grid File>Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid
Use the Toggle Support for Vertical Mapper Grid menu item to associate a
Vertical Mapper grid with Discover. Once a Vertical Mapper grid has been
associated with Discover, the grid cannot be used within Vertical Mapper until the
toggle is turned off. Turn off the toggle by re-selecting the Toggle Support for
Vertical Mapper Grid menu.
Note Vertical Mapper only recognizes a vertical mapper gird when opened as a raster
layer in Mapinfo Pro, whereas Discover handles grid as true interactive grid
layers in Mapinfo Pro.
7 Importing and Exporting 213
Export Grid to ASCII File
Surfaces>Export Grid File or Contours>Export Grid to ASCII File
There may be instances where a Discover grid is to be used with other software
that cannot read binary grids. In this case, the safest way to transfer the grid is in
ASCII format. Discover provides the option of exporting the grid as either XYZ
values or Z values only per line. It can also create an ESRI ASCII grid file.
The following parameters can be set in the ASCII Grid Export dialog:
Grid Origin specifies the location of the first cell written to the file. The
grid will be written sequentially from this point.
Cell Origin sets whether the XY co-ordinates refer to the cell centre or
lower-left corner point.
Export by sets whether the file will be written row-by-row or column-by-
column.
Delimiter the value delimiter method used in the file (e.g. tab, comma,
etc) .
Null Cell Value value written for null cells this overrides any inherent
null value in the grid.
Precision precision of numbers written to the file.
Note for ESRI ASCII export format, only the Cell Origin, Null cell value and
Precision options are available.
Export Grid
Surfaces>Export Grid File or Contours>Export Grid
Discover can convert (export) any supported grid to an alternative grid format.
This allows a grid created in Discover to be used with another software packages.
This menu option opens the grid Convert Tool; this can also be accessed from
Surfaces>Grid Utilities.
Note When exporting to the ESRI ASCII format, only the Cell Origin, Null cell value
and Precision options are available.
214 Encom Discover User Guide
Drillholes
Discover Drillhole Projects
Export Drillholes as 3D DXF Traces
gINT
WinLoG
Discover Drillhole Projects
Drillhole projects can be imported and exported (for sharing between Discover
users) from the Drillhole Project Manager (see Sharing Discover Drillhole
Projects).
Export Drillholes as 3D DXF Traces
To export a Discover drillhole project as 3D DXF traces:
1. On the Drillholes menu, click Project Manager, and open the drillhole
project you want to export.
2. On the Drillholes menu, point to External Data Formats, and then click
Export Drillholes to 3D DXF.
The desurveyed drillhole traces for the complete project, or a selection of holes,
are exported as 3D DXF vector objects. This is useful when sharing a drillhole
project with other 3D applications or for viewing very large projects (thousands of
holes) in Discover 3D. This does not export downhole dataonly the hole traces
are exported.
See also
... Sharing Discover Drillhole Projects
gINT
Drillholes>External Data Formats>gINT Importer
The gINT
=
n
i
h
i x x
K
n
x f
) 1 (
2
1
u I
) 1 ( ) 1 ( u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
4
3
2
u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
16
15
2 2
u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
32
35
3 2
u I u
)
2
1
exp(
2
1
2
u
) 1 ( )
2
cos(
4
u I
19 Working with Surfaces 853
Density Grid Tab
Distance Grid
The Distance gridding method produces a grid which records the minimum
distance to the input data features at every grid node. A distance envelope can
be specified to clip the grid at a maximum distance from the nearest feature. Any
grid node that is outside this envelope will be assigned a null value.
When the input data is loaded it is classified as either point data or polyline data
depending on the source of the data and the type of object that was loaded. By
default the method will consider all input data as point locations. Optionally, you
can add to this the input polyline data. In this case the method will also check the
perpendicular distance to the nearest polyline in addition to looking at all point
data.
Distance Tab
854 Encom Discover User Guide
In the examples below the first grid has been computed considering all the input
data as point locations. The second grid has added to this the polyline
information. In both cases a distance envelope has been applied.
Distance Grid points only Distance Grid points and polylines
Gridding Tool Search Tab
The Kriging and Inverse Distance Weighting methods, when selected, both
display the Search tab, along with their individual control tabs. These methods,
if not optimised, can quickly becomes unworkable as the number of input data
points increases beyond a few thousand. To improve the performance of these
algorithms and to ensure these methods are suitable for large datasets, a search
radius can be used to restrict the number of input points that contribute to each
interpolation. This introduces a number of problems. For example the algorithm
may not find a sufficient number of points within the search radius to make a
reasonable estimation or, the spatial distribution of the points within the search
radius may not be uniform so that the estimation becomes directionally biased.
19 Working with Surfaces 855
The Search tab using the IDW gridding method
The Search tab provides controls to resolve these issues by determining the
shape, size and orientation of the search ellipse used to locate data points during
interpolation. Specifying an appropriate size and orientation for the search ellipse
is important. Setting it smaller than the average data spacing may result in a large
number of the interpolated grid cells being assigned a null value and therefore
displayed as white in the output grid. Conversely, if the search ellipse is set to be
too large then significant edge effects or grid artefacts may result around the edge
of the grid. The Search tab is subdivided into a number of sections:
Searching
By default Discover uses a circular search with a radius specified via the Search
Distance option. If the node cannot be estimated from the points located within
the search radius then the search radius can be incrementally increased and the
searching repeated using Search Expansions. The increased radius is likely to
encompass more input points and consequently the node may be able to be
interpolated. At each stage the actual search radius used will be equal to the
stage number multiplied by the initial search radius. The number of allowable
increments is limited because after a while this process becomes self defeating
and it is wiser to specify a larger initial search radius.
To optimise performance, choose an initial search radius that is likely to
encompass the minimum number of required input points most of the time. It can
sometimes be very difficult to make this decision but the tool will always make a
suggestion to get started with.
856 Encom Discover User Guide
If the spatial distribution of the data points is not uniform (or not uniformly random)
then the use of search expansions may not be enough to populate the grid
successfully. For example, a dataset may have regional data located on two
kilometre centres and local data in parts of the study area on 100 metre centres.
To produce a suitable grid of the whole region that characterises the detail in the
high resolution areas would require small search radius in these areas and a large
search radius elsewhere.
The solution is to use additional refinement Grid Passes which grid the data
multiple times - once for each pass - at increasingly higher resolution. The gridded
results from each pass are then used as additional input data for the next pass.
The grid cell size and search parameters are scaled up by a factor of two for each
additional grid pass for example if you use three additional passes then the first
pass scales up these parameters by a factor of eight, the second by a factor of 4,
the third by a factor of two. The final pass grids the data at the requested
resolution with the specified searching parameters.
Anisotropy
By default the search radius is isotropic creating a circular search area. However
directional bias can be applied by enabling an Elliptical Search.
The dimensions of the search ellipse can be controlled by specifying the length of
the major and minor axes. The major axis is defined by the Search Distance
value in the Searching section (above), whilst the minor axis is governed by the
Minor search distance option. The Major axis Orientation control determines
the rotation angle of the major axis.
If elliptical searching is used with the Inverse Distance Weighting method, it
also allows the use of the Elliptical weighting option under the Inverse Distance
Weighting tab. This option modifies the data point weighting so that they are
isotropic with respect to angle within the search ellipse in other words it removes
the directional bias from the weighting
Sample Selection
Input points close to the grid node may not be uniformly distributed e.g. they
may all be on one side of it. This will introduce a directional bias into the
estimation. This can be resolved by using search sectors.
Discover provides options for specifying 1, 2 or 4 search sectors. By adjusting the
Number of search sectors and Minimum points required (in each sector) the
appearance and smoothness of the output grid can be varied. If any of the sectors
contain fewer than the minimum number of specified points, the interpolated grid
cell value for that node is assigned a null value.
19 Working with Surfaces 857
If four sectors are used then each covers 90 degrees of arc (centred about NE,
NW, SE, SW). If two sectors are used then each covers 180 degrees of arc
(centred about North, South). Using only one search sector effectively turns the
option off.
Using 2 or 4 search sectors can significantly improve the appearance of a grid if
the input data has been collected on widely spaced lines. Using a one sector
search ellipse may result in grid node values being estimated from data points
from a single direction. This might generate unrealistic or sharp slopes between
the lines producing a rough or stepped grid. Using a two or four sector search with
an appropriate search distance should generally eliminate or reduce this effect.
Experiment with the use of search sectors and examine the difference these can
have on the output grid.
Specifying the Use nearest neighbours option enables you to use only the
closest Maximum number of samples found within each search sector in each
estimation. Contributions from other points within the search radius are ignored.
The Use nearest neighbours option controls the Maximum number of
samples that are used in each sector when interpolating each grid node value.
When this option is selected Discover uses the closest points (up to the maximum
specified in each sector) to interpolate each grid cell. Any excess data points
within the search ellipse are ignored in the calculation.
Gridding Rule
Enabling the Customise gridding rule option allows a node to be gridded only if
a specified minimum number of sample points are located in at least a specified
minimum number of sectors. If a node fails to meet this rule, it will be assigned a
null value.
Gridding Tool Geometry Tab
This tab controls the main parameters for determining the geometry of the output
grid. The Cell Parameters control determines the size of each grid cell in the
output image and is measured in the same data units as the input tab file. For
most geographic data these units are in metres; however Discover supports all of
the MapInfo units of measurement. During the loading process, Discover
automatically computes an optimised grid cell size based on the distribution and
density of the input data. This cell size can be modified and Discover only uses
square grid cell dimensions.
When a large dataset is loaded the Auto Apply box is disabled and the Compute
Best Parameters button is active. Use this button to calculate an optimal grid cell
size.
858 Encom Discover User Guide
The extents of the Data coverage to define the Grid Bounds automatically can be
modified by entering new coordinates into the Min and Max X and Y columns. The
full extents of the original data coverage are displayed by default. If the
coordinates have been modified select the Reset to Input Extents button to
return to the original data coverage.
The Grid bounds control the boundary extents of the output grid and can be used
to reduce the size of the output grid if required. The number of Rows and
Columns in the output grid is also displayed. These values are automatically
calculated from the Data Coverage Min and Max X and Y fields, which are usually
the input data extents. You can manually override these to increase or decrease
the extents of the output grid.
The Grid Geometry tab indicating the cell size, extent and number of rows and columns
Note When creating a surface, the grid cell size selected is important. As a general
rule of thumb the grid cell size should not be made smaller than approximately
one fifth of the average data spacing. Reducing the grid cell size beyond this limit
may cause the grids appearance to become smoother but can also introduce
unwanted irregularities in the output image. Assigning an excessively small grid
cell size will also increase computation time and file size. Discover suggests an
optimal grid cell size for the data but experiment with alternative values.
19 Working with Surfaces 859
Gridding Tool Output Tab
The Output tab provides a number of controls for saving the gridded image. The
left side of the dialog provides a summary report for the grid process and lists the
primary gridding parameters chosen. This information may be copied to the
windows clipboard by selecting the information with the mouse and using the
Windows Copy and Paste commands. This may be useful for reporting or archive
purposes.
The Grid Output showing summary information and clipping options
Below the summary box is a pull-down list containing the Discover supported grid
formats. Interactive gridding supports output in the following formats:
Arc/ESRI ASCII
BIL
ER Mapper (Multi-banded)
Geosoft
MapInfo MIG
Surfer
Vertical Mapper
860 Encom Discover User Guide
To save a grid, select the appropriate format from the list. Click the Save button.
The output grid file is assigned a default name and will be saved in the same
directory as the input data. It is possible to alter the file name and directory path
by clicking on the small button at the right end of the path name box. The Output
tab is accessible at any stage during the gridding process so it is not necessary
to wait for the preview window to complete drawing before saving the final grid.
The Smooth grid control allows the appearance of the output image to be
smoothed by applying a Gaussian smoothing filter to the grid. In most situations,
enabling the smooth grid function removes high frequency noise in the grid and
enhances the appearance of your image.
The Clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the
interpolated grid, so that it more closely approximates the distribution of the input
data. Enabling this option can improve the appearance of the output grid for
irregular input data where the gridding method (usually Triangulation or Minimum
Curvature) has interpolated the grid over large gaps within the data. Options
available include:
Creating a Buffer around the input data at a user-specified distance. The
gridded data outside the buffer is then removed.
The Near value of the Near/Far option is the distance the grid is to be
clipped back to from the convex hull of the data points. The Far distance
is the distance between the points to interpolate between. Areas in the
grid which lie between data points greater than the Far distance value
grid will be displayed as null or white.
The Convex Hull option clips the output grid to the smallest convex
region/polygon enclosing the dataset. This convex region is found
conceptually by stretching a rubber band around the points so that all of
the points lie within the band. The convex region can be expanded by a
specified Buffer value.
The Concave Hull option starts with a Convex Hull region, and then
removes/erodes triangles on its edge that have an outward facing angle
greater than a defined tolerance (specified under the Options button).
This new concave region can then be expanded by a specified Buffer
value.
19 Working with Surfaces 861
Multiple field gridding output options
If multiple fields or groups have been selected for gridding then three output
options are available:
Separate grids - each selected field is created as a separate grid which is
named using the original source table with the field name extension. E.g.
Geochem_Cu, Geochem_Pb, etc.
Multi-banded grid - multiple fields are gridded and saved to a single
ERMapper Multi-banded grid.
Create RGB Image - if three fields are selected for gridding they can be
saved as an RGB image. Each field is saved as a red, green or blue
channel in the resulting image. The RGB grid is first loaded into the
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Create RGB Grid dialog before the final RGB
GeoTiff image is created.
When the Gridding Tool parameters have been selected and the grid surface is
completed, press the Save button. This button closes the Gridding Tool dialog,
saves the grid surface into the specified file and updates the original map window
with the surface grid. The surface grid is displayed using the same look-up table
as selected in the Gridding Tool dialog prior to saving.
862 Encom Discover User Guide
Statistics Explorer
The Statistics Explorer is a series of dialogs that enables you to examine any
dataset both statistically and spatially.
To access the Statistics Explorer one or more fields must be selected and applied
within the Gridding Tool. It can be accessed from two locations:
the Statistics Explorer button on the Gridding Tool Input Tab
the Variogram button on the Kriging tab. Accessing the Statistics Explorer
through the Kriging tab allows the creation and editing of Model
Variograms.
The components of the Statistics Explorer window
19 Working with Surfaces 863
The Statistics Explorer window is divided into two main sections; the upper
Spreadsheet window and the lower Property Page window. The contents of
these depend on the view selected; the Statistics Explorer has four views,
selectable from drop list at the top left of the window. These present graphical and
statistical information using different Property Pages, which can be controlled
using the Property Page tabs in the middle of the window. These views are:
The Univariate view examines a single field in the input data and presents
basic summary statistics and histogram analysis.
The Bivariate view examines any two fields in the input data and presents
scattergram plots and basic summary statistics.
The Spatial view plots the data using its spatial X, Y and Z coordinates
and presents basic summary statistics.
The Variogram view computes a variogram grid and displays directional
semi-variogram data. This allows the creation of sample variograms, and
creation and editing of model variograms.
The Statistics Explorer allows data to be selected in the spreadsheet or any of the
univariate, bivariate or spatial views using the Selection Tools at the base of the
window. The explorer can then collapse the dataset to the current selection, and
display the statistics for this new data subset.
Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet comprises the top half of the Statistics Explorer dialog, and
displays the records for the currently viewed selection.
It uses the following colour codes to highlight records:
The currently selected data points are highlighted red
The currently selected data point is highlighted purple
Invalid data is highlighted orange (e.g. coincident data)
The current key and ancillary fields are highlighted purple
864 Encom Discover User Guide
The spreadsheet pop-up menu can be accessed by right clicking on any column
header. This provides a number of column resizing options (including the various
Fit to options). Alternatively, columns and rows can be resized by clicking on
their boundaries and dragging.
The Spreadsheet pop-up menu
The spreadsheet can also be sorted by any column using the Sort menu options.
The Statistics option returns a basic statistical summary of any field.
The statistics summary for an arsenic field
Data points can be selected from the spreadsheet (if valid for the current view) by
clicking on the row header; use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to unselect stations
and make multiple selections. A range of cells can be also be selected by clicking
and dragging the mouse. These selection operations are treated exactly the same
way as graphical selections and the undo/redo operations can be applied.
19 Working with Surfaces 865
The key field (whilst in univariate mode) or the ancillary field (whilst in bivariate
mode) can be changed by double clicking on the field header in the spreadsheet.
Zoom, Selection and Display Controls
Each of the view types incorporates a number of property pages, discussed
further under the relevant view sections. Depending on the view type, some or all
of the following controls may be available within a property page window:
Zoom controls
The Zoom controls toolbar
Use the three buttons in the middle to Zoom In, Zoom Out and Pan.
The Restrict Zoom button on the left restricts zooming and panning to the
horizontal dimension only.
The Fit to Data button on the right cancels any zoom and returns to the
default view showing all data.
Selection Tools
The Selection controls toolbar
When a single data point is selected in any graph (using the Pointer tool, see
Zoom, Selection and Display Controls) the spreadsheet will scroll to the
appropriate record.
The Selection tools provide a powerful data selection capability. The Pointer
button displays a cursor which can dragged through the graph. It may be
displayed as either a vertical bar or a cross hair depending on graph type. In all
cases, the pointer snaps to the closest station and this station is then
highlighted purple in the spreadsheet.
Data can also be selected using Rectangle or Polygon selection, although the
polygon selection is not available in all graphs. Selected stations are coloured
red unless colour modulation is enabled in which case they are coloured black.
Each selection operation can either select the enclosed stations (include option)
or unselect the enclosed stations (exclude); this is toggled using the Include/
Exclude button.
866 Encom Discover User Guide
Display Modulation
The graph can be also be Colour and/or Size Modulated by any field in the
dataset. Select the required fields from the drop lists at the base of the graph. To
cancel colour or size modulation, select <None>. A simple pseudocolour look-up
table is used and a linear colour stretch is employed.
Subsetting
Univariate
The univariate view examines a single field in the input data and presents basic
summary statistics and histogram analysis. It incorporates three property pages:
A Scattergram graph of the data point index verses key field
Statistical information for the key field.
A Histogram of the key field. When this is displayed, the spreadsheet will
show a detailed breakdown of the histogram data.
The univariate view requires a key field to be defined. This field is selected from
the second drop list at the top of the dialog. The key field can be changed at any
time to examine any field in the dataset.
Each selection operation is placed onto a stack which allows you to Undo and
Redo operations. Buttons are also provides to Unselect All and Select All. The
selection can also be Inverted.
Making a selection within a graph (which supports selections) or the spreadsheet
view will activate the Collapse button at the top of the Statistics Explorer
window.
This button extracts the selected data points from the dataset to create a new
subset. The spreadsheet and graph views will be redrawn to focus on this
subset. Only the subset will be considered in any statistical computations or
graphs. Further selections can be made to examine the data in greater detail.
The Expand button allows a previous level/subset to be redisplayed. If this
button is disabled then the view has returned to the original dataset.
19 Working with Surfaces 867
Univariate graph display
The Graph page plots the key field versus station index. Graph controls are
detailed in Zoom, Selection and Display Controls above.
The properties of the graph can be obtained by double clicking on an appropriate
area of the graph. For example, click in the bottom and left margins to obtain
properties of the X and Y axes. This property page enables you to change the axis
extents and change the axis mapping between linear and logarithmic. When
using logarithmic axes, you must elect to leave some data space surrounding
zero as linear.
868 Encom Discover User Guide
Specifying an axis range
Statistics of the chosen field
The Statistics page presents basic summary statistics for the key field, as detailed
below:
Note These axes property pages are not available for univariate or spatial graphs.
19 Working with Surfaces 869
Sample Count
The total number of samples in the dataset.
Valid Sample Count
The total number of valid (non-null/selected)
samples in the dataset.
Invalid Sample Count
The total number of invalid (null/unselected)
samples in the dataset.
Minimum
The minimum value of all valid samples.
Maximum
The maximum value of all valid samples
Mean
The mean (average) value of all valid samples.
Variance
The variance of all valid samples.
Standard Deviation
The standard deviation of all valid samples.
S/N Ratio
The signal to noise ratio of all valid samples.
Coefficient of skewness
The skewness of all valid samples.
Skew direction
The skew direction (positive/negative) of all valid
samples.
Median
The value of the centre value in the sorted dataset.
Mode
The most frequently occurring valid value in the
dataset.
Lower quartile
The value of the dataset at the 25 percent quartile.
Upper quartile
The value of the dataset at the 75 percent quartile.
Interquartile range
The range of the data between the lower and upper
quartiles.
870 Encom Discover User Guide
Histogram distribution of the selected field
The Histogram page presents an equal width histogram of the key field. An
equal width histogram is one built by dividing the valid data range into a large
number of equal width bins and then computing the frequency of occurrence of
key field values in each bin.
To be effective a large number of bins are used and these are grouped together
depending on the scale at which the histogram is viewed. When multiple bins are
being grouped together each consolidated bin is drawn with a back border. When
zoomed in sufficiently to see individual bins, no black border is drawn. Also, the
thickness of the bin is no longer equal to the assigned min/max values of the bin;
it now relates to the actual min/max values of the data assigned to the bin.
The cumulative histogram is also displayed as a heavy green line. This indicates
the percentage of data that is below the current value at any point. The upper and
lower quartiles are displayed against the X and Y axes as dotted lines.
The spreadsheet displays the bin information including the bin data range,
number of samples in each bin and the range of the actual data assigned to the
bin. It also displays the cumulative histogram values.
The Zoom, Selection and Display Controls work normally in this graph. The
selections are indicated as a percentage of stations selected in each bin. This is
displayed as a red base. Note that no selections can be made from the
spreadsheet in this mode.
19 Working with Surfaces 871
Bivariate
Display of Bivariate data distribution with Key and Ancillary selection fields indicated
The Bivariate view requires the user to define two input fields the key
(horizontal) field and the ancillary (vertical) field. Make these selections from the
drop lists at the top of the explorer (indicated in screenshot above).
Two property pages are presented. The Graph page shows a scattergram of the
ancillary field plotted against the key field. The Statistics page presents summary
statistics for the bivariate distribution as well as a spreadsheet of the conditional
expectation. You can copy and paste from this spreadsheet into Microsoft Excel.
872 Encom Discover User Guide
The Graph page displays a linear regression as a blue line. A conditional
expectation curve is also displayed as a green line. It also displays a quantile vs.
quantile (q-q) curve as a purple line from 5% to 95% at steps of 5%.
For both pages, the Spreadsheet displays the complete dataset. A full range of
selection tools are available both graphically and in the spreadsheet.
The following statistical definitions are used:
Sample Count
The minimum number of samples in both fields
Valid Sample Count
The total number of valid (non-null/selected)
samples in one or both fields.
Invalid Sample Count
The total number of invalid (null/unselected)
samples in one or both fields.
Valid data range
The range of valid common samples in the key and
ancillary fields (X,Y).
Minimum
The minimum value of all valid samples.
Maximum
The maximum value of all valid samples.
Mean
The mean (average) value of all valid samples.
Covariance
Sum of squares of product of the difference
between the field mean and each sample
Correlation coefficient
Covariance normalized by the product of the fields
standard deviations.
Inertia
Half the sum of squares of difference between the
two fields
Rank coefficient
Spearman rank coefficient
Regression
Linear regression fit to all valid samples
Intercept
Value of the ancillary field at the origin.
Slope
Slope of the ancillary field versus the key field.
Conditional Expectation
Expected value of V at any U.
19 Working with Surfaces 873
Bivariate statistical data ranges and distribution
Spatial
The Spatial view does not require the user to define any fields (unless the View
Extraction option on the Statistics page is used; see below). The data will be
automatically plotted using its spatial coordinates in an isotropic view. If the data
has less than two spatial dimensions no spatial view will be available.
A Graph page showing the spatial plot is presented. All Zoom, Selection and
Display Controls are available. Data points can be colour or size modulated.
874 Encom Discover User Guide
Displaying the Spatial distribution of the data
The Spatial Statistics pages
19 Working with Surfaces 875
The Statistics page displays basic summary statistics for the spatial fields. It also
has a Regular spatial extraction export option. This creates a new dataset using
multiple regular sized cells covering the entire spatial extents of the existing
dataset. The size of these cells are defined using the X and Y Extent windows.
The Region Overlap control allows cells to overlap adjacent cells by up to 50%.
Regular spatial extraction requires the prior specification of a Key field in order
to calculate summary statistics for each new output cell. The output dataset can
be viewed using the View extraction button, which opens it in a new instance of
the Statistics Explorer. The Save Extraction button allows this output dataset to
be saved as a multi-banded ERMapper grid file.
Variogram
The Variogram view requires the user to define a key field which will be used in
tandem with the spatial coordinates to compute a sample variogram. If the data
has less than two spatial dimensions no variogram view will be available.
A variogram shows the degree of correlation between data in a spatial dataset in
different directions and at different distances.
It can take a long time to compute a variogram and in most cases it will not be
possible to compute the complete variogram for the entire data set unless it is
relatively small (<10,000 samples). Variogram computations are restricted by:
Capping the maximum range (distance between points) that will be
considered. This also restricts the maximum lag.
Capping the number of input samples that will be considered.
876 Encom Discover User Guide
Display of the calculated variogram
A default spatial variogram is computed using parameters that should ensure that
the computation time is of the order of a few seconds. Thereafter the range and
maximum sample number can be modified and the variogram can be recomputed
by clicking the Recompute Variogram button. Note that if the maximum number
of samples is set to minus one, then all samples will be computed. It is not advised
to include all samples in the data set if it exceeds 10,000 samples as the
computation time required to build the variogram could be extremely long. If the
number of samples is restricted the algorithm will look at a sub-set of samples that
are evenly distributed spatially within the dataset. In many cases it is desirable to
increase the range and increase the maximum number of samples to improve the
statistical reliability of the variogram.
19 Working with Surfaces 877
This procedure generates a radial variogram grid (lower left). The directional
variogram can then be quickly extracted from this grid. The directional variogram
is plotted on the right and the source data is shown in the spreadsheet. Only the
zoom tools are available in this graph (no data selection is possible).
The plot on the left shows the variogram grid. The red sectors represent the area
of the grid that was used to extract the directional variogram. This area is
controlled via Direction (0 to 360 degree clockwise from North) and Width
(degrees of arc) controls. If the width is 180 degrees then you have obtained the
omni-directional variogram and direction is irrelevant. Otherwise, you will obtain
a direction dependent variogram. You can change the direction of the variogram
from the Direction spin buttons or simply click and drag you mouse across the
variogram grid plot. The width can only be changed via the Width spin control.
The variogram records several parameters including the moment of inertia (semi-
variogram), covariance and pair count. Both the variogram grid plot and the
directional variogram plot display the parameter selected in the Display drop list.
Model Variograms
If the Statistics Explorer has been opened via the Variogram button within the
Kriging tab of the Gridding Tool, a Model Variogram also can be created, edited
and displayed. In this case an option is added to the Sample page to show the
model variogram curve in addition to the sample variogram curve.
A Model property page is also available to manipulate the model variogram. The
model variogram will be automatically initialized to a reasonable model fitting the
data. You can press the Initialise Model button at any time to reset the model to
this default.
The model is plotted to a range controlled via the range edit parameter. By default
this is equal to the sample variogram range.
The model variogram is displayed as a grid and also as a directional extraction
just like the sample variogram. The sample variogram curve can be plotted for
comparison. As before, the extraction direction can be controlled via the edit
buttons or by dragging the cursor across the variogram grid display.
In the upper right the model nests are displayed. Each nest corresponds to
semivariogram model. Individual nests can be edited, added, cloned and deleted
via the buttons on the right. Alternatively double clicking on a nest in the list allows
editing.
878 Encom Discover User Guide
Displaying the sample and model variograms
Editing or adding a nest presents the following dialog; if adding a new nest the
dialog is presented as a wizard.
Select the Model Type from the range available
19 Working with Surfaces 879
The Model Type page allows you to change or select an appropriate model for
the nest. A description of the model is presented. The coordinates displayed for
the model are not representative of the actual model coordinates.
Controlling the parameters of the variogram
The Parameters page allows the editing of the model parameters. At the top right
is a drop-list of model types.
The graph presents the sample variogram, the model variogram excluding the
current nest you are editing or adding, the current nest and the final model
variogram including the current nest. The model parameters are presented below
the graph and can be directly edited. Also, most model parameters can be edited
graphically by dragging the blue tags that are presented on the graph axes. For
example, with the spherical model the left vertical axes allows the editing of the
sill and the bottom horizontal axis allows range to be edited.
The sample variogram grid is displayed in the bottom left. Drag the cursor in this
graph to edit the direction of the model variogram. This will also change the
direction for the sample variogram extraction. Note that the width of the extraction
is equal to the width of the extraction on the main Sample page and cannot be
modified here.
880 Encom Discover User Guide
Editing the variogram nest
The Anisotropy tab controls the range of the model along two axes the major
and minor axes. The direction of the major axis is shown on the nest grid preview
on the left. The final model preview is shown on the right.
The major axis range will be equal to the range established on the Parameters
page. The minor axis range can be used to introduce anisotropy to the model. If
the minor axis range is equal to the major axis range then the model is isotropic.
If it is larger than the major axis range then the model will have a smaller
contribution in the minor axis direction.
The principal parameters of each nest can be altered graphically via the model
page. Select the nest from the model list and manipulate the principal parameters
via the blue edit tags in the variogram plot.
Large and Multi-file Gridding
Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file Gridding
The Large and Multi-file gridding tool is a powerful grid interpolator which can
construct gridded surfaces from extremely large datasets. Interpolated grids can
be created from a single input file or from multiple input files of point data or
gridded data in any of the following formats:
19 Working with Surfaces 881
ASCII text (.txt, .asc, csv, xyz), including zip compressed ASCII
MapInfo .TAB
ASPRS .LAS
LizardTech MrSID compressed Lidar (MG4)
Gridded formats (Arc ASCII, Arc Flt, ER Mapper, BIL, MapInfo, Geosoft,
MinEx, Surfer, Vertical Mapper)
Geosoft database .GDB
The Large and Multi-file gridding tool is best suited to gridding very large, closely
spaced point datasets, such as those commonly acquired by airborne Light
Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data surveys. The tool can also be used to
assemble a large number of adjoining grid tiles into a single large contiguous grid.
An example of this use case is assembling multiple Shuttle Radar Topography
Mission Arc ASCII grid files into a single continuous grid. This method of
interpolation works best with relatively even spaced points that cover semi-
rectangular survey areas containing minimal internal holes or areas of missing
data.
For moderate-sized point datasets (e.g. <2 million points) or situations where
some experimentation with interpolation methods is required the Interactive
gridding tool is a more flexible and suitable choice.
When to Use Large and Multi-file Gridding
Using the Large and Multi-file Gridding Tool
Input Data Files
Gridding Methods
Interpolation Settings
Output Grid
882 Encom Discover User Guide
When to Use Large and Multi-file Gridding
As a rule of thumb if the number of points in the input dataset exceeds 3 million
points or the number of cells in the output grid is greater than 6,000 columns x
6,000 rows (360,000,000 cells) or there are multiple input files the Large and
Multi-file gridding tool is the appropriate tool to use. For all datasets which fall
below this size threshold the interactive gridding tool is the most flexible and best
tool to use. For practical purposes the maximum size of the combined input
datasets that the Large and Multi-file gridding tool can process is 2 billion points
and the maximum size of the output grid(s) is 1 terabyte.
Using the Large and Multi-file Gridding Tool
Running the Gridding Tool
Re-running the Gridding
Running the Gridding Tool
For more information about the settings available from dialog boxes, see
Interpolation Settings.
1. On the Surfaces menu, point to Create Grid, and click Large and Multi-
file.
The Large and Multi-file Gridding dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Input, to select input files that are stored in a single directory:
Press the Browse for files button on the top right of the dialog. On
the open file dialog adjust the file type filter at the bottom to the
appropriate type (.TAB, . ASCII, .LAS, .SID, .ZIP or one of the
supported grid formats) and select the files to grid.
Or for input files that are stored in a multiple directories:
Press the Browse for folder button, second button down on the
top right of the dialog. On the Select file format dialog which
appears choose the file type filter which is appropriate for the type
of input data, press OK and select the top level directory from which
to search for files to grid.
19 Working with Surfaces 883
3. Depending on the format of the files chosen you may be prompted to
assign the column field order for the input dataset. To do this press the
Assign Column order button. On the Select data fields dialog choose
the field for the X coordinate and Y coordinate. If the input dataset(s) are
LIDAR LAS files these fields will be automatically assigned. From the field
list select the data column(s) you wish to grid. If the chosen input files are
zip compressed files and the zip file contain more than one file (e.g. an
ASCII data file and a metadata or .PRJ file) you will need to specify a file
name mask to filter out the correct file to grid. Under Input data format
enter a file name mask to uniquely identify the name of the file in the .zip
archive that you wish to grid. The mask can contain characters that are
part of the file name and/or the extension. For example *.txt or myfile.* or
*.asc are all valid masks. The mask will be applied automatically and
when a valid file is found you will see a preview of the content in the File
preview region.
4. Assign the appropriate projection for the input data files by pressing the
Choose Projection button in the bottom right of the dialog.
Note If you are unfamiliar with the distribution of statistics of your input files you can
examine the spatial statistics of any of the selected input data files using the
Statistics Explorer. To launch the Statistics Explorer select an input file and then
press the Statistics Explorer button (on right of file format dialog).
5. If desired, modify the name that has been assigned in the Group alias
property for the group in the input manager grid control by double-clicking
in the cell and typing in a new name.
6. To change the properties of a group of input files, first select the group you
wish to modify in the input manager and then press the File format button
on the right of the dialog. On the format dialog you can add or remove files
from a group as well as change the input data format and projection.
7. If you are familiar with the spatial distribution and coverage of the input
data enable the Define cell size control and change the cell size from
<Auto>to an appropriate value that is suitable for the input data and for
your analytical needs. Should you need assistance in choosing an
appropriate cell size you can press the Compute cell size button and the
software will attempt to analyse a small subset of the data and estimate an
appropriate value. However it is generally recommended that if you are
not sure what cell size to assign for the output grid that you leave the
Define cell size disabled so the software can compute an appropriate
value once it has completed an analysis of the data distribution.
8. Optional steps:
884 Encom Discover User Guide
Re-running the Gridding
Press the Data conditioning button to configure any null values or
data ranges you may wish to exclude during the gridding process.
Define the grid geometry by specifying the Origin X and Origin Y
coordinate of the lower left corner of the output grid as well as the
grid dimension in rows and columns.
Press the Advanced settings button and modify the Options as
necessary. For a large gridding job you may need to set the
Temporary directory path to an alternative hard drive which has
plenty of free space available to store an entire copy of the input
dataset. You may also wish to adjust the Scan data extents control
to perform a quick scan of the input data as well as constrain the
maximum memory that will be used by the software during the
gridding process.. Use the Output grid Data type to change the
numeric data type that will be used for the output grid. Choosing an
appropriate data type for the output grid could have a large impact
on the size of the output grid file. See Output Grid for more
information
9. Press the Save file button and select an appropriate file path for the final
grid file(s). Ensure that you select a location with plenty of free space to
store the output files. It is recommended that for large datasets the output
grid(s) are stored on a separate disk drive to the input data.
10. Press the Projection button and choose an appropriate projection for the
output grid file. It is recommended that the projection of the output grid file
is set to the same projection as the input file(s). By default the output
projection will be set to the first input file(s) projection.
11. (Optional) Disable the Auto open output file(s) if you do not want the
output grid file(s) to be automatically opened into MapInfo on completion
of the gridding process.
12. Press the Process button to commence gridding.
At the completion of gridding a control file containing a complete set of
parameters used by the gridding engine are saved to a text file in the same
location as the output grid. The control file is created with the same name as the
output grid file and has .final.txt appended to the end.
19 Working with Surfaces 885
Input Data Files
The main features of input files that can be read are:
One or more input files are supported.
A range of commonly used input formats can be read including .TAB,
.LAS, .CSV, space or tab delimited text files (including zip compressed
files),, MrSID MG4 LIDAR files and a number of common grid files.
Input files can be located in a single directory or hierarchically in multiple
directories.
Input files can be specified in groups. A group of input files share common
properties such as format (i.e. file structure) and projection. If the file
format or projection of any of the input files is different they should be
separated into their own group.
Input file formats
Input files can be provided in any of the following formats:
MapInfo .TAB
The TAB reader can read simple MapInfo .TAB files which contain
mapped objects. The coordinate and projection information is extracted
from the mapped objects and the X,Y point coordinates are obtained for
every node of simple or multi-part objects. The data field information which
is used for interpolation can be obtained from any corresponding attribute
field in the .TAB file.
ASPRS .LAS
LAS is an industry standard public format used for the interchange of
LIDAR data. The file format is defined and maintained by the ASPRS
organisation (www.asprs.org). Discover supports versions 1.0, 1.1 and 1.2
of the LAS specification and can extract "Z" (elevation) as well as RGB
(red, green, blue) and intensity information.
Should you wish to create another grid using a different field from the same input
data or recreate the same grid with slightly modify settings you can reload the
saved control file. To do this first open the Large and multi-file gridding tool. Next
press the load control file button (the last button at the top right of input
manager). When the control file is successfully loaded you can modify the
settings as necessary and then press the Process button to create a new grid.
886 Encom Discover User Guide
MrSID MG4 compressed LiDAR
MrSID MG4 LiDAR files are a new version of the MrSID format that
supports compressed LiDAR point data. The files are created using the
LizardTech LiDAR Compressor software. For more information on this
format please refer to LizardTech (http://www.lizardtech.com). These files
have an extension of *.MG4 and may be loaded directly into the gridding
tool.
Geosoft database (GDB)
Standard geophysical data format.
ASCII data readers
ASCII Space, Comma or Tab Delimited (Fast)
This is the faster of the two text readers. It expects data to be stored in
columns with a space, tab or comma separating each value in a row. The
text reader can skip multiple header lines at the start of a file but once it
starts reading data it expects the remainder of the file to be clean and void
of inline comments or other formatting changes. For well structured, clean
data this is the best method to use.
ASCII Generic Text (Slow)
This is a general text reader which handles a wider range of delimiters. It
can also detect and skip header lines as well as empty fields (e.g.
consecutive commas with no data between them) and can adjust to
formatting changes within the input file(s). It will also read files with
unusual delimiters such as a pipe (|).
Grid file readers
There are several readers available for loading gridded data files (e.g.
*.ERS, *.GRD, *.BIL, *.ASC) as input to the Large and Multi-file gridding
tool. All the common industry grid formats that are supported by Discover
can be loaded as input.
Input file groups
Projection information can be assigned to each group of input files. The
projection information specified must correspond to the spatial reference
the data is stored in. If no projection is assigned to the input data it will be
assigned the projection of the output grid.
You may modify the group alias name for each group of input files to help
distinguish them in situations where a lot of groups have been added.
19 Working with Surfaces 887
Gridding Workflows
The following gridding methods are available:
Triangulation
Inverse Distance Weighting
Minimum Curvature (Full)
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
Data Density
Data Point Separation (Distance)
Stamp Only
Triangulation
The Triangulation gridding method consists of eight operational phases:
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the data extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input data set is read and spatially sorted into a
collection of tiles. Unwanted or null readings are cleansed and
coordinates are reprojected into the output grid coordinate
system if required.
888 Encom Discover User Guide
Inverse Distance Weighting
The Inverse Distance Weighting gridding method consists of seven operational
phases:
Phase 7. The spatially sorted input data is triangulated and the
interpolated values are written to the output file.
Phase 8. The triangulated grid(s) are finalized and corresponding header
information and.TAB files are written to disk. All temporary files
an allocated memory is then released.
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the data extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input data set is read and unwanted or null readings
are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the output
grid coordinate system if required. The points are stamped into a
spatially indexed file and an inverse distance weighting
algorithm is applied to interpolate new grid values from the set of
input points that lie within the specified search radius (Inverse
Distance Weighting Properties).
Phase 7. The interpolated data file is finalized and written to the output
grid file along with the corresponding header information
and.TAB files. All temporary files and allocated memory is then
released
19 Working with Surfaces 889
Minimum Curvature (Full)
The Minimum Curvature (Full) gridding method consists of thirteen operational
phases:
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete.
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is spatially sorted into a collection of
tiles. Unwanted or null readings are cleansed and coordinates
are reprojected into the output grid coordinate system if
required.
Phase 7. The spatially sorted input data is now stamped into the grid.
Phase 8. A multi-resolution grid pyramid is constructed and filled from
bottom to top.
Phase 9. The clip mask is built, based on the clipping parameters defined
in the minimum curvature properties dialog.
Phase 10. The source mask pyramid is focussed in each level to allow
more grid cells to be unconstrained in the gridding procedure.
Phase 11. The pyramid is filled and refined from the top down applying
minimum curvature at each level.
Phase 12. The final phase of minimum curvature interpolation is performed
upon the output grid.
Phase 13. The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with
their corresponding header information and.TAB files. All
temporary files are removed and allocated memory is released
890 Encom Discover User Guide
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
The Minimum Curvature (Stamped) gridding method consists of twelve
operational phases:
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete.
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3).
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is now stamped into the grid. Unwanted
or null readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected
into the output grid coordinate system (if required).
Phase 7. A multi-resolution grid pyramid is constructed and filled from
bottom to top.
Phase 8. The clip mask is built, based on the clipping parameters defined
in the minimum curvature properties dialog.
Phase 9. The source mask pyramid is focussed in each level to allow
more grid cells to be unconstrained in the gridding procedure.
Phase 10. The pyramid is filled and refined from the top down applying
minimum curvature at each level.
Phase 11. The final phase of minimum curvature interpolation is performed
through the pyramid.
Phase 12. The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with
their corresponding header information and TAB files. All
temporary files are removed and allocated memory is released.
19 Working with Surfaces 891
Data Density
The Data Density gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
Data Point Separation (Distance)
The Data Point Separation gridding method consists of seven operational
phases:
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete.
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is now scanned and unwanted or null
readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the
output grid coordinate system (if required).The points are
stamped into the grid file and accumulated densities are
computed within the specified search radius using chosen the
kernel weighting function.
Phase 7. The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with
their corresponding header information and.TAB files. All
temporary files are removed and allocated memory is released
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available and all input files
are validated.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
892 Encom Discover User Guide
Stamp Only
The Stamp Only gridding method consists of seven operational phases:
Phase 3.
Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete.
Phase 4.
Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
Phase 6.
The entire input dataset is now scanned and unwanted or null
readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the
output grid coordinate system (if required). The points are
accumulated and separation distances are computed within the
defined search radius. The interpolated values are stamped into
the output grid file.
Phase 7.
The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with
their corresponding header information and.TAB files. All
temporary files are removed and allocated memory is released.
Phase 1. A quick analyse of your computer is performed to establish the
amount of RAM and free disk space available. All input files are
validated. Note depending on the number, size and type of input
files selected this phase can take some time.
Phase 2. The first 65,000 data stations are loaded to determine spatial
statistics of the data.
Phase 3. Each input data file is scanned to determine the dataset extents
and spatial distribution statistics. Some data will be skipped
during this phase if the Scan data extents property is set to any
value other than complete.
Phase 4. Preliminary gridding parameters and temporary data storage
requirements are estimated from the spatial statistics obtained
during the initial data scan (phase 3)
Phase 5. Gridding properties and memory requirements are established
19 Working with Surfaces 893
Interpolation Settings
Data Conditioning
Gridding Properties
Options
Data Conditioning
Data conditioning is a pre-processing operation which is applied to the input data
prior to gridding. It allows you to define a NULL value as well as ranges of data,
with upper and lower caps, in order to exclude them from the gridding process.
The data conditioning process only applies to valid input data. Should any of the
fields in the input data set for a given point (i.e. X, Y or the field values) have a
NULL (or missing) value then the entire point is discarded. For more information,
see Data Conditioning.
Gridding Properties
Because the gridding process is relatively autonomous it is possible to leave the
gridding properties set to their default settings and the software will attempt to
automatically compute an appropriate set of parameters for the output grid by
examining the field and spatial statistics of the input file(s). If you are unfamiliar
with the distribution or range of the input data sets then leaving the gridding
properties on their default settings is recommended.
If you are familiar with the input dataset and know in advance what the spatial
extents and distribution of the data is like and you have a good understanding of
the field range then you can manually adjust the gridding properties to best suite
the input and output data requirements.
Phase 6. The entire input dataset is now scanned and unwanted or null
readings are cleansed and coordinates are reprojected into the
output grid coordinate system (if required). The points are then
stamped directly into the output grid file(s).
Phase 7. The output grid(s) are finalized and written to disk along with
their corresponding header information and.TAB files. All
temporary files are removed and allocated memory is released.
894 Encom Discover User Guide
Define cell size
This property controls the size (or resolution) of each cell in the output grid file.
The size is measured in the spatial units of the output grid coordinate system. The
default cell value is "Auto" which indicates that the software will attempt to
compute an appropriate cell size for the output grid by analysing the spatial
statistics of the input data. Providing the source data is regularly spaced and
evenly distributed across the entire survey area the automatic cell size estimation
algorithm will choose a reasonable cell size. However if the data distribution is
clustered or skewed then it is strongly recommended that you set the cell size to
an appropriate value manually.
As a general rule of thumb the output grid cell size should not be set to a value
that is less than
1
/
5
the average spacing of the input data. A cell size of
1
/
3
the
average data spacing is good starting point. Another important aspect of the cell
size which must be taken into consideration, particularly on large datasets, is that
halving its size will have the effect of double the file storage requirements of the
output grid. For example if you set a cell size of 2 m and the output grid requires
100 MB of disk space, then reducing the cell size to 1 m will increase the storage
space requirements for the output grid to 400 MB.
Compute cell size
The compute cell size button will compute a default cell size for the input data. It
attempts to do this by analysing the spatial statistics of a small subset
(approximately 65,000 stations) of the first input file. Depending on the regularity
and spatial coherence of this small subset of data the estimated cell size may or
may not be assigned an optimal value.
If you are unfamiliar with the dataset and you are not sure what value to set for
the cell size then it is recommended that you leave the property set to "Auto".
When configured this way the software will attempt to adjust the cell size to an
appropriate value after it has examined the complete spatial statistics of the input
data.
19 Working with Surfaces 895
Define grid geometry
The define grid geometry properties control the spatial extent and size of the
output grid file. By default these values will be automatically computed by the
software to fully encompass the input data once it has scanned all the data files
and established the spatial statistics and data distribution. If you need to constrain
the output grid to a larger or smaller area than the extents of the input dataset then
you can override the default settings and specify the extents manually. By
configuring the grid extents to an area which is smaller than the extents of the
input dataset you will effectively clip it to the defined grid geometry. If the output
grid geometry is smaller than the input data then any input data that does not
overlap with it will be discarded prior to gridding. The grid geometry is controlled
by the Origin X and Origin Y coordinate values, which specify the centre
coordinate of the lower left grid cell and the height and width are specified by the
number of rows and columns measured in grid cells respectively.
Advanced settings
The advanced settings allow you to control a number of properties relating to the
memory and temporary storage location that is used during gridding, the
resolution at which the initial data scan is done, and output grid data type. Details
of each of these properties are described below.
Options
Maximum memory use
This control is used to constrain the amount of physical memory (RAM) that the
software will attempt to use during the gridding process. The default control
setting is disabled and in this state the software will attempt to use up to 80% of
available physical memory (to a maximum of 2 GB) during gridding. While it is
possible to constrain the amount of RAM that is available to the software during
the gridding process; doing so will reduce the gridding performance significantly
if the software has to repeatedly page tiles of data between disk and memory in
order to perform the gridding operation.
To achieve best performance on large datasets it is advisable that you close all
running applications and free up as much physical memory (RAM) as possible
before commencing gridding. For very large datasets (>50 million points) it is
recommended that the software is run on a machine with between 2 and 4 GB of
RAM.
Note The gridding tool is a 32-bit program, and therefore cannot address more than
4GB of RAM on a 64-bit operating system.
896 Encom Discover User Guide
Scan data extents
Controls the resolution at which the software initially scans the input data files to
establish the preliminary spatial statistics during the first phases of gridding. The
default behaviour is to scan all lines of the input data. It is possible to speed up
the initial scan of the input files by adjusting the scan data extents control to one
of the following settings:
Complete: scans every line of each input data files
Fine: scans approximately 12% (1-in-8) of the lines from each input data
file
Course: scans approximately 3% (1-in-32) of the lines from each input
data file
Overview: scans approximately 0.75% (1-in-128) of the lines from each
input data file
Bounds: acquires the data extents from information stored in the files
(e.g. LAS or grid formats such as .ERS and, GRD) if available or performs
an Overview scan if unavailable.
For datasets that have a relatively even spatial distribution of input points setting
the scan data extents control to Overview will provide the best compromise
between speed and a representative statistical sample.
Temp directory
The Temp directory is used to temporarily store the spatially sorted input data tiles
which are used during the gridding process. If all of the input data can fit into
system memory then no temporary files will be created and the entire process will
occur in RAM. If the input dataset is very large (>10 million points) then it will be
necessary to store a copy of the input data on disk during the gridding process.
By default the temporary directory is set to the Windows system temporary
directory; however it may be necessary to map it to an alternative storage location
depending on the size of the input dataset.
Note You should always ensure that you have at least the same amount of free
temporary storage space as the total size of the input dataset. A good rule of
thumb is to set the temp path to a location that has 2x as much storage space as
the size of the input dataset.
19 Working with Surfaces 897
Gridding Methods
Triangulation
Inverse Distance Weighting
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
Minimum Curvature (Full)
Data Density
Triangulation
The triangulation gridding method performs a Delaunay triangulation with linear
interpolation. The method works by first triangulating the input data into a TIN
mesh. It then calculates a value at the centre of each cell in the output grid using
linear interpolation from the triangle that overlaps with coordinate of the centre of
each grid cell. In order for the software work with huge datasets that could
potentially contain billions of triangles on PCs with limited available memory, the
input data is scanned, spatially sorted and divided into tiles. Each of the tiles is
then triangulated and the resulting TIN mesh is either stored in memory or if there
is insufficient memory available it is stored on disk in temporary files. Once the
dataset has been triangulated into a TIN mesh the output grid is constructed by
interpolating cell values from the triangles.
Because the triangulation process is relatively autonomous it is possible to leave
the gridding properties set to their default settings and the software will attempt to
automatically compute an appropriate set of parameters for the output grid by
examining the field and spatial statistics of the input file(s). If you are unfamiliar
with the distribution or range of the input data sets then leaving the gridding
properties on their default settings is recommended.
If you are familiar with the input dataset and know in advance what the spatial
extents and distribution of the data is like and you have a good understanding of
the range of values in the field(s) being gridded then you can manually adjust the
gridding properties to suite the input and output data requirements.
Triangulation Properties
The triangulation properties can be used to influence the geometry of the data
structures, the number of points and memory that will be used to triangulate each
tile of input points.
898 Encom Discover User Guide
Maximum triangle side length
This parameter applies to the triangulation phase of gridding and can be used to
minimize or eliminate long thin triangles that may be created across large holes
or gaps in the data or between widely separated points that lie around the
perimeter of the dataset. By default triangles that are created with a length that is
greater than half the diagonal length of a tile will be discarded. The size of the tiles
used during triangulation are determined automatically by the software after it
analyses the spatial statistics of the input points, however you can modify the size
of the tiles by applying a Triangle patch multiplier.
Distance specified in data units
This parameter is used to control the units of distance that the Maximum triangle
side length property is measured in. By default this control is disabled and the
maximum distance unit is expressed as a ratio of the tile (or patch) size. If you
wish to constrain the Maximum triangle side length to a fixed value that is
measured in absolute data units (e.g. 100 m) then enable this control and enter
in the appropriate value. If the entered value is large and exceeds the size of an
individual tile of data then it may have no effect on the output grid.
Note: If the coordinate system of the input data is Longitude/Latitude then the
absolute distance units need to be specified in fractions of a degree (Arc
seconds).
Triangle patch multiplier
The triangle patch multiplier can be used to modify the number and size of tiles
(or patches) that the software will segment the input data into before sequentially
triangulating it. The tile size is automatically determined by the software following
a detailed analysis of the spatial statistics of the input data. Under special
circumstances the patch size can be modified by applying a Triangle patch
multiplier. Increasing the default value of 1 to a higher number will create larger
patches and may assist in the infilling of large holes or gaps in the dataset,
however it will also increase peak memory usage during the gridding phase. For
very large datasets increasing the Triangle patch multiplier will reduce the number
(but not the storage requirements) of temporary files that are created during the
gridding phase. For most datasets a patch multiplier of 1 or 2 will be sufficient.
Increasing the patch multiplier beyond a value of 4 would be rarely necessary.
19 Working with Surfaces 899
Inverse Distance Weighting
Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW) is a universal technique that can be applied to
a wide range of spatial data. IDW uses weighted average interpolation to estimate
grid cell values and can be used as either an exact or a smoothing interpolator.
Each grid cell value in an output surface is calculated using a weighted average
of all data point values that lie within a specified search radius surrounding the
grid cell. The IDW method is optimal when the data has a fairly uniform
distribution of input points across the area to be gridded, and some degree of
smoothing is beneficial.
In order for the software work with huge datasets that could potentially contain
billions of points on PCs with limited available memory, the input data is scanned,
cleansed and stamped into a temporary grid. The grid is then divided into tiles and
each tile is then interpolated using the IDW algorithm. The intermediate grids are
either stored in memory or if there is insufficient memory available they are stored
on disk in temporary files. Once the dataset has been interpolated the output grid
is constructed by stitching together the interpolating tiles into a continuous grid.
Before commencing a gridding operation it is important that the IDW Properties
are appropriately configured for the input dataset. If you are familiar with the input
dataset and know in advance what the spatial extents and distribution of the data
is like and you have a good understanding of the range of values in the field(s)
being gridded then you can manually adjust the IDW properties to best suite the
input and output data requirements.
Inverse Distance Weighting Properties
The IDW properties can be used to influence the geometry and smoothness of
the output grid file.
Model
This parameter controls the weighting model that is used to average the data
points that are located within the search distance radius. The following four
weighting models are available:
Gaussian
The weight assigned to each input value is determined according to a 2D
Gaussian function centred on the grid node. The shape and standard deviation of
the Gaussian function is proportional to the Range value. Larger range values
produce flatter functions Gaussian functions and a smoother grid. The Nugget,
Range and Distance radius values are measured in increments of the output grid
cell size.
900 Encom Discover User Guide
Linear
Each input points weight is proportional to its Euclidian distance from the grid
node being interpolated. The linear weight model enables the Nugget and Range
parameters to be adjusted in order to vary the weight assignments. At distances
less than the Nugget distance the weight model will be 1 (i.e. all data will
contribute equally). At distances beyond the nugget value the weighting factor will
be applied according to the selected model. The Range parameter is used to set
the outer distance threshold for which the weight model is applied. Any samples
which exceed the Range and are less than the Distance radius will be assigned
an equal weight. The Nugget, Range and Distance radius values are measured
in increments of the output grid cell size.
Exponential
Each input points weight is proportional to its Euclidian distance from the grid
node being interpolated raised to the specified power. Increasing the power value
will cause smaller weights to be assigned to closer points and more distant points
to be assigned equal but large weights. Increasing power values will therefore
cause each interpolated grid node to more closely approximate the sample values
closest to it. As with the Linear model the Nugget and Range properties can be
modified to constrain that distance over which the exponential weight model is
most effective.
Power
The default option, each input points weight is proportional to the inverse of its
distance to the specified Power from the grid node. Increasing the weighting
power reduces the influence distant points have on the calculated value of each
grid node. Large power values cause grid cell values to approximate the value of
the nearest data point, while smaller power values will result in data values being
more evenly distributed among neighbouring grid nodes. The weighting value
defaults to 2 (i.e. the weight of any data point is inversely proportional to the
square of its distance from the grid cell) which is appropriate for most situations.
If required, the weighting value can be altered to any positive value.
Distance Radius
It is important to set an appropriate size for the search distance radius. Setting it
smaller than the average data spacing may result in a large number of the
interpolated grid cells being assigned a null value and therefore displayed as
transparent in the output grid. Conversely, if the search distance is set to be too
large then significant grid smoothing or artefacts may occur. The search distance
radius is measured in increments of the output cell size.
19 Working with Surfaces 901
To optimise performance, choose a search radius that is likely to encompass the
minimum number of required input points most of the time. It can sometimes be
very difficult to make this decision but a good rule of thumb is to keep the search
distance to a value less than or equal to 5x the output cell size.
Distance Taper
Taper controls allow you to apply a taper function to the interpolated value of each
grid node based on its distance to the nearest valid sample point. The taper
function is applied using a linear weighting model thereby adjusting the expected
grid node values towards the background value. Between a distance of zero and
the NEAR distance the taper function is assigned a constant value of 1 (i.e. no
modification is made to the grid node). Between the NEAR and FAR distance the
taper function is applied as a linear weighting between the grid node value and
the background value. Beyond the FAR distance grid nodes are assigned the
background value.
Minimum Curvature (Stamped)
The Minimum Curvature gridding method is widely used in many branches of
science and research. This method creates an interpolated surface similar to a
thin, linearly elastic plate passing through each of the data values defined in the
input dataset. An important criterion in creating a surface is that it has a minimum
amount of bending forced upon it to conform to the data points. The degree of
bending is constrained by a percentage change tension parameter. Minimum
curvature gridding generates the smoothest surface possible while attempting to
honour the data as closely as possible. Like all gridding methods, minimum
curvature gridding is not an exact interpolation technique and therefore some
error may occur between the input data point values and the interpolated surface
values
Minimum Curvature (Stamped) Properties
The minimum curvature (Stamped) properties can be used to influence the
geometry and smoothness of the output grid file.
Stamping Method
This parameter controls the accumulation rules that are applied when multiple
data points fall within a single grid cell. There are several options available:
Average all (last in weighted): averaged all data points
First Only: the first point value is assigned to the cell. All subsequent
points are discarded.
902 Encom Discover User Guide
Last Only: the last point value is assigned to the cell.
Average All: averages all coincident point values.
Average All (inverse distance weighted): averages all coincident points
by applying an inverse distance weighting function.
Radius
The radius control defines a distance radius around a grid cell to search for valid
input points. Distance is measured in increments of the output grid cell size.
Clipping
The clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the
interpolated grid, so that it more closely approximates the distribution of the input
data. Options available include
None
No clipping is applied to the output grid. With none selected the entire
output grid will be filled with interpolated values.
Near
The Near value represents the distance, in cell size increments, that the
grid is to be clipped back to from the convex hull of the data points. Areas
in the grid which lie beyond the Near distance will be assigned null.
Setting a Near only clip value will have the same effect as setting a buffer
clip distance.
Near and Far
The Far distance is the maximum distance for which interpolation will
occur between input points. Any area in the grid that has data points
greater than the Far distance value will be displayed as null.
19 Working with Surfaces 903
Minimum Curvature (Full)
The Minimum Curvature gridding method is widely used in many branches of
science and research. This method creates an interpolated surface similar to a
thin, linearly elastic plate passing through each of the data values defined in the
input dataset. An important criterion in creating a surface is that it has a minimum
amount of bending forced upon it to conform to the data points. The degree of
bending is constrained by a percentage change tension parameter. Minimum
curvature gridding generates the smoothest surface possible while attempting to
honour the data as closely as possible. Like all gridding methods, minimum
curvature gridding is not an exact interpolation technique and therefore some
error may occur between the input data point values and the interpolated surface
values
Minimum Curvature (Full) Properties
The minimum curvature (Stamped) properties can be used to influence the
geometry and smoothness of the output grid file.
Stamping Method
This parameter controls the accumulation rules that are applied when multiple
data points fall within a single grid cell. There are several options available:
Average all (last in weighted): averaged all data points
First Only: the first point value is assigned to the cell. All subsequent
points are discarded.
Last Only: the last point value is assigned to the cell.
Average All: averages all coincident point values.
Average All (inverse distance weighted): averages all coincident points
by applying an inverse distance weighting function.
Radius
The control defines a distance radius around a grid cell to search for valid input
points. Distance is measured in increments of the output grid cell size.
Clipping
The Clip control provides a number of options for clipping the extents of the
interpolated grid, so that it more closely approximates the distribution of the input
data. Options available include
904 Encom Discover User Guide
None
None
No clipping is applied to the output grid. With none selected the entire
output grid will be filled with interpolated values.
Near
TThe Near value represents the distance, in cell size increments, that the
grid is to be clipped back to from the convex hull of the data points. Areas
in the grid which lie beyond the Near distance will be assigned null.
Setting a Near only clip value will have the same effect as setting a buffer
clip distance.
Near and Far
The Far distance is the maximum distance for which interpolation will
occur between input points. Any area in the grid that has data points
greater than the Far distance value will be displayed as null.
Full minimum curvature vs stamped minimum curvature methods
Although the operational phases for these methods appear to be very similar,
there are important processing and operational differences between the two
techniques. It is important to consider these differences carefully when deciding
which gridding method to use. The primary operational difference between the
stamped minimum curvature and full minimum curvature methods is that the
stamped method is faster and requires less hardware resources (disk space
memory and processing power) than the full minimum curvature method. The
stamped minimum curvature method is generally faster because it does not
spatially sort or retain a full temporary copy of the input data during phase 3.
Instead it stamps the input data directly into a temporary grid. In contrast the full
minimum curvature method spatially sorts and stores a complete temporary copy
of the input data in addition to stamping the points into a temporary grid. The two
methods also differ during the final interpolation phase where the full minimum
curvature gridding operation loads the spatially sorted temporary data again to
complete the interpolation. Loading the data a second time requires additional
processing time.
The additional performance cost incurred by the full minimum curvature algorithm
is often rewarded in terms of better grid quality and estimation accuracy. The
method is able to produce a better estimation for grid cells that contain one or
more input data points. In comparison the stamped method may simply shift the
data values to the centre of each cell (depending on the data accumulation
methodology selected). The full method is able to make a better estimate of the
cell value in these cases by taking into account the actual position of the input
data value(s) rather than just the cell centre which may improve the estimates for
all surrounding grid cells.
19 Working with Surfaces 905
Due to the potential improvement that the full minimum curvature method offers
in output grid quality it is the recommended method, except where you determine
the improvement in the grid quality will not be detectable or significant, or that the
additional processing cost will be too high.
The stamped minimum curvature method may be more appropriate in the
following situations:
Re-interpolating existing gridded data onto a finer mesh. If the fine mesh is
carefully designed so that the centre of the existing grid cells always fall in
the centre of the cells of the new grid, then stamped minimum curvature
will return the same result as the full method. However, if the cells are
non-aligned then the full method will produce a better result.
The output grid cell size is very small compared to the input data spacing.
As a guideline if the grid cell size is 8x to 10x smaller than the input data
spacing. In this case the input data value will be close to the centre of the
cell into which it is stamped.
The output grid cell size is large compared to the input data spacing. As a
guideline if the grid cell size is 2x larger than the input data spacing then
you are more likely to want the grid cell estimation to represent the
average value of the observations within the cell.
Noisy data. If the input data has a high level of noise then there is little
reason to more accurately represent it by using the full minimum curvature
method.
Large data measurement footprint. If the data observations represent an
average of a large footprint (e.g. radar) then stamped minimum curvature
may be sufficiently accurate. However, where the observations represent
an accurate point measurement of a smooth continuous field then full
minimum curvature should always be used.
Data Density
The Density gridding method produces a grid which records a measure of the
point density at each grid node. The density at each grid node is determined
independently using a kernel estimator function
906 Encom Discover User Guide
Data Density Properties Kernel
The Kernel Density Estimator method is a non-parametric density estimator. It
uses a similar approach but it weights the input samples by a kernel function that
is normally a function of the normalized distance of the sample to the grid node.
To achieve a good result with the KDE function it is more important to choose an
appropriate search radius sometimes referred to as the bandwidth than to
choose an appropriate kernel function. If the bandwidth is too small the density
will be under-smoothed whereas if the bandwidth is too large the density will be
over-smoothed and lacking in resolution.
Given a kernel function K and a search radius (or bandwidth) h, the estimated
density at any point x is given by
where n is the number of samples. The following kernel functions are supported:
Kernel K(u)
Uniform
Triangle
Epanechnikov
Quartic
Triweight
Gaussian
Cosinus
)
) (
(
1
) (
=
n
i
h
i x x
K
n
x f
) 1 (
2
1
u I
) 1 ( ) 1 ( u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
4
3
2
u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
16
15
2 2
u I u
) 1 ( ) 1 (
32
35
3 2
u I u
)
2
1
exp(
2
1
2
u
) 1 ( )
2
cos(
4
u I
19 Working with Surfaces 907
Radius
To achieve a good result with the Density gridding function it is more important to
choose an appropriate search radiussometimes referred to as the bandwidth
than to choose an appropriate kernel function. If the bandwidth is too small the
density will be under-smoothed whereas if the bandwidth is too large the density
will be over-smoothed and lacking in resolution. The radius distance is measured
in increments of the output cell size.
Normalise by area
This control converts the data frequency values into spatial density values by
dividing the value of each cell by the area of the search radius.
Bias by input field value
When enabled this control interprets the selected input field(s) as a count of the
number of observations at that location. It allows a single point to represent more
than one observation.
Data Point Separation
The data point separation gridding method produces a grid which records the
distance to the closest input data features to each grid node.
Data Point Separation Properties
The distance radius specifies the maximum distance to search for valid input
points. The distance is specified in increments of the output grid cell size.
Output Grid
Data Type
The data type control is used to set the numeric storage type for the interpolated
values in the output grid. It is advisable to select the appropriate data type that
most efficiently represents the range of data that will be stored in the output grid.
For example a signed 2-byte integer is generally suitable for storing typical
elevation data at 1m vertical resolution. The table below lists the available options
and the valid data range that can be stored by each of the data types.
Data Type Bytes Range of Values
Unsigned byte 1 0 to 255
Signed byte 1 -128 to 127
Unsigned short 2 0 to 65,535
908 Encom Discover User Guide
The automatic option will set the output format to an appropriate data type based
on an analysis of the input data range.
File Name and Grid format
The output grid file(s) can be specified as either a single band ERMapper or BIL
format grid. Although both of these formats support multiple bands in a single file,
the grids created by the Large and Multi-file gridding tool can be extremely large,
so we have chosen to output each band (or field) to a separate grid file for
convenience. If multiple fields are selected for interpolation then multiple output
grid files will be created. The name of each file will be the user specified name
(e.g. MY_DEM) with the field name appended to it in square brackets (e.g.
MY_DEM_[elevation].ers).
In addition to the ER Mapper (.ERS) or BIL (.BIL) grid header and data files a
MapInfo .TAB file will also be generated for each output grid if the Auto open
output file(s) option is enabled.
Grid projection
A projection must be assigned to the output grid(s). While it is possible to specify
different projections for the input data and output grid it is not recommended for
very large datasets as it may degrade the performance of the input processing
phase significantly as each point will need to be reprojected into the output grid
coordinate system prior to gridding.
Auto open output file(s)
When enabled the output grid file(s) will be automatically open into MapInfo.
Signed short 2 -32,768 to 32,767
Unsigned int 4 0 to 4,294,967,295
Signed int 4 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Float 4 -3.8e-38 to 3.4e38
19 Working with Surfaces 909
Converting Vector Files to Grids
Surfaces>Convert Vector File to Grid
The Convert Vector File to Grid utility will convert either of the following vector
file types into surface grids:
3D vector surfaces (i.e. TIN or meshes). The Z or elevation value will be
assigned to the grid, when viewed "top down".
2D TAB files containing points, polylines or polygons. The Z or elevation
value can be assigned to either an attributed field or constant value.
To convert a vector file to grid:
1. Select Surfaces>Convert Vector File to Grid.
2. Select the file type as either 2D (i.e. points, polygons, 'flat' contours already
opened in MapInfo) or 3D (i.e. TIN, Mesh, 3D contours).
3. Click the Open button and select the file.
4. Review Processing Options, the Overlay Value and the Background Value.
5. Click Create Grid.
6. If necessary, select a Projection for the output grid file.
7. The grid will be automatically opened in MapInfo Professional.
An interpolated DXF fault plane surface in the left image converted into an ERMapper grid
in the right image. Images from Encom Discover 3D .
The following input vector and output grid file formats are supported by this utility:
910 Encom Discover User Guide
Input 3D Vector Formats
3D Studio .3DS)
AutoCAD .DXF
Datamine wireframe (point and triangle) .DM
ESRI TIN Files .ADF
Gemcom .BT2
GOCAD Vector .TS, .PL and .VS
Surpac wireframe .DTM .STR
Vulcan triangulation .00T
Input 2D Vector Formats
MapInfo Professional .MIF
MapInfo Professional .TAB
Output Grid Formats
Band Interleaved by Line (.BIL including .HDR)
ER Mapper .ERS
ESRI/Arc ASCII .ASC
ESRI/Arc FLT binary .FLT
Geosoft .GRD
GeoTIFF with embedded elevation .TIF
MapInfo Grid .MIG
Minex .XYZ
Surfer Binary .GRD
Vertical Mapper .GRD
19 Working with Surfaces 911
The Vector File to Grid dialog
Interrogating a Grid
Interactive Query
Summary Statistics
Statistics by Polygonal Region
Note To produce an alternate grid view (other than top down or plan view), use the
Discover>Import and Export>Transform Vector File tool to first rotate and
swap the axes of your model. Once the axes have been rotated/swapped,
running the Vector File to Grid tool will provide a different aspect view of the
model.
912 Encom Discover User Guide
Interactive Query
Summary Statistics
Surfaces>Grid Information
The Grid Information menu option enables a user to view a summary of grid
information and statistical parameters. Select the grid using the browse button in
the Grid Information dialog and Discover will populate the fields with the
corresponding grid parameters.
To report grid cell values directly to the screen, click the Grid Info button on the
Surfaces toolbar. When the Grid Info tool is selected, place the cursor over the
surface grid and click with the left mouse button. The cell values for the grid cell
at the selected location plus the surrounding eight grid cell values are displayed
in the Grid Info dialog box.
Note This is similar to the MapInfo Info tool, but provides higher accuracy as well as
the surrounding grid cells location.
Note For large grid files, the Grid cells sampled for statistics calculations may be less
than 100% and therefore an approximation. This reflects the default sampling
settings in Surfaces>Grid Handler Preferences. To increase the accuracy of
the statistics sampling for a grid, use Surfaces>Precompute Grid Statistics to
recalculate the statistics at a higher sampling.
Note The Grid Coords reflects the embedded grid file projection if known. If this is
different to the MapInfo Coords projection, the grid file is registered differently in
MapInfo.
19 Working with Surfaces 913
Grid Information dialog
Statistics by Polygonal Region
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Statistics
Use Grid Utilities>Statistics (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool) to report
grid statistics within one or more polygonal regions.
Grid Colour and Shading
Surfaces>Modify Grid Display
Use the Modify Grid Display menu item or button tool to enhance a grid display.
Change the appearance of a grid by the selection of a new colour look-up table
(LUT) from a list of pre-defined colour table. Re-calculate LUT table colour limits
based on data ranges and create new colour look-up tables using the LUT
Editor. Apply sun-shading to a grid fom a specified direction and elevation angle
or make a grid transparent.
914 Encom Discover User Guide
Grid display colouring options
Use the Select button to choose the surface grid to modify.
Discover ships with a colour look-up table (LUT) library. Use the Select Colour
Table pull-down list to choose another look-up table from this list to modify the
current grid display. To view the colours used in the LUT the colour look up table
is displayed in the preview pane on the right of the Modify Grid Display dialog.
Alternatively, use the Browse button to open an ERMapper (.LUT), MapInfo
(.CLR) or Geosoft (.TBL) colour look-up table from another source.
See the LUT Editor section for more information on creating and modifying colour
look-up tables.
Methods
A number of surface grid colouring methods are available:
Note If multiple grids are selected, the current settings along with the data range and
histogram are loaded from the first selected grid in the list.
19 Working with Surfaces 915
Full Linear Stretch
Apply a linear colour look-up table to the grid between the minimum and
maximum values. By default the minimum and maximum data ranges are
selected but these values can be manually changed under Options. To
return to the original data limits click the Reset to Input Limits button.
Autoclip Linear Stretch
Apply a linear colour look-up table between the middle n% of the data.
Choose from a 99.9% or 99% clip to remove high and low data values and
prevent distortion of the grid display.
The Low Clip and High Clip data values are displayed for each clip
option and can be turned off by checking the appropriate box.
Alternatively, manually enter clip values. The corresponding data value is
displayed next to the clip value. Data values below the minimum and
above the maximum are displayed with those minimum/maximum colours.
Histogram Equalization
Discover analyses the distribution of data in the grid and applies colours
so that there are approximately equal numbers of grid cells displayed in
each colour. By default the minimum and maximum data ranges are
selected but these values can be manually changed under Options. To
return to the original data limits click the Reset to Input Limits button.
Check the Recompute Histogram box to distribute the colour table
evenly over the data range if the input limits are changed.
Colour to Percentile Breaks
With geochemical data, it is often appropriate to show the grid coloured
into just a few ranges, based on the data distribution. For example,
gridded geochemical data may be coloured with ranges of 0, 30, 60, 80,
90, 95, 98 and 100%. Each of these ranges would be shown in a different
colour to highlight the areas of interest.
Enter a percentile and left-mouse click in the Colour box to display the
colour palette. Select a colour and repeat process for each percentile.
Colour to Data Breaks
Similar to percentile ranges, colouring by data ranges allows the grid to be
displayed with a discrete number of colours, specified by data value rather
than percentile value.
Note For Autoclip Linear Stretch the colouring is applied using Percentile Clips,
however within the dialog the corresponding data value is presented as a
Percentage Clip, which is an approximation of the percentile value.
916 Encom Discover User Guide
Enter a data value and left-mouse click in the Colour box to display the
colour palette. Select a colour and repeat process for each percentile.
Selecting ranges for colour to percentile breaks and colour to data breaks
Copy Grid Display Parameters
Use the grid display from another grid to colour the current grid. Select the
grid from the list of currently open grids or use the Browse button to open
a new grid.
Transparency
Use the Transparency slider to set a transparency level for the grid.
Transparencies can be set between 0% (no transparency) through to 100%
(completely transparent).
Transparency Selector
LUT Editor
Colour look-up tables can be created and modified using the LUT Editor. The
look-up tables are stored in the .\ Pr ogr amFi l es\ Encom\ Common\ LUT
(Windows XP) or . \ Pr ogr amDat a\ Encom\ Common\ LUT (Windows Vista or
Windows 7). If an alternate directory exists where the look-up tables reside, the
Settings button opens a dialog which allows the user to browse to the specified
directory.
The format of LUT files varies depending on the saved format type. Supported
types include:
19 Working with Surfaces 917
ER Mapper (.LUT)
MapInfo Professional (.CLR)
Geosoft Oasis (.TBL)
LUT Editor dialog
The LUT Editor dialog is divided into functional areas. On the left is a scrollable
list showing all the available Look-up Tables. Beneath this list are New and
Delete buttons for creating and removing look-up tables (LUT). In the centre of
the dialog the selected LUT is displayed showing the various colour settings for
each of the rows specified in the LUT with descriptive comments if required. At
the top of the dialog is the selected LUT name, an LUT description and the actual
filename. On the right of the dialog is a preview of the entire LUT as it would be
applied to an image, profile or display. The buttons at the base of the dialog are
used to control the distribution of colours in the LUT.
A LUT is comprised of a number of rows generally in the order of 16, 32, 64, 128,
256 etc. Each row can have a colour individually assigned, or a group of rows can
be selected and the colours distributed through the row range.
918 Encom Discover User Guide
Once a LUT has been specified it can be stored using the Save button (into the
LUT directory), or into a different location and with a different format if required
using the Save As button. The above LUT formats are provided as options when
the Save As dialog is displayed.
Create Look-Up Table
To create a new LUT click the New button.
Create new lookup table dialog
Enter a Name and the Number of entries (rows or colours) to be assigned to the
new LUT. Check the Specify the data value corresponding to each colour box
to precisely match data values with a colour from the table. For example, if the
data has a range of 51,000 to 51,500, the colour look-up table can contain 500
definable colours for each of the 500 data values. Note that if this utility is used,
the created LUT cannot be used within ER Mapper.
When a new table is created it is added to the Look-up Tables list and a blank
colour table is displayed in the centre of the LUT Editor dialog. Select HSL or
RGB from the Colour Interpretation pull-down list. Left-mouse click any of the
Colour cells of a row to select a colour from the standard colour palette. Use the
Custom option to create additional colours.
19 Working with Surfaces 919
To create a colour spread over a range of cells colour and select two end member
cells in non-adjacent rows by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. Click the Interp
Selection button to fill the intermediate blank cells with graduated colour. Use the
Clear Cells button to remove colour from highlighted cells. To view the Red,
Green, Blue values for each row check the Show RGB values box.
Selected cells can be all set to match the FIRST selected cell using the Duplicate
button. This always operates from the top-most selected cell down, irrespective
of the order in which the cells were selected. Extra rows can be added or deleted
using the Insert or Delete Rows buttons.
If the Specify the data value corresponding to each colour box was checked
when the LUT was created enter the minimum and maximum data values next to
the corresponding rows in the Data column. Click the Interp Gaps button to
populate each intermediate row with the corresponding data value.
Any nominated LUT files in the displayed list can be deleted using the Delete
button on the bottom left of the dialog.
Sun-Shading
Discover provides the option of adding real-time sun-shading to a gridded
surface to improve the appearance of relief in 2D. Sun-shading works by
brightening areas of the grid that face the direction of the sun and darkening
those areas that face away from the sun, or are in shadow.
920 Encom Discover User Guide
Sun-Shading tab
Sun Shade
Check the Sun Shade box and enter a sun Angle between 0 and 360. Enter a
sun Elevation between 0 and 90. The position of the sun is displayed in the
preview window. Alternatively, click on the sun icon in the preview window and
drag to the desired sun angle and elevation.
The Saturation, Intensity and Shadow levels can also be modified.
Sun Highlight
Check the Sun Highlight box and enter a highlight Angle between 0 and 360.
Enter a highlight Elevation between 0 and 90. The position of the highlight is
displayed in the preview window. Alternatively, click on the light icon in the
preview window and drag to the desired sun highlight angle and elevation.
To view sun shading and highlight modifications automatically in the grid check
the Auto Apply box. Otherwise enter the sun details and click the Apply button
when complete to change the grid display.
19 Working with Surfaces 921
Histogram
The Histogram tab provides an interactive easy-to-use interface to visualize the
data ranges and colour scheme applied to the selected grid.
Histogram tab dialog
The grid Histogram visually represents the distribution and data populations
contained in the grid dataset. The grid Histogram enables the user to instantly
view the effects of changes to the grid using the various colour methods available.
The input data can be clipped to display colour between pre-set ranges or
according to percentile and data breaks created in the histogram window. See the
Colour tab for more information on the grid colour Methods available.
To view the exact number of grid cells and data value on the histogram, place the
mouse cursor within the histogram frame to review values via a screen tip text
box. The Histogram dialog is composed of a movable trend line used to adjust
either the data range or clip colour values. To move the trend line, a drag handle
is docked on both ends of the line. Place your mouse cursor over the handle, hold
down the left mouse button and drag the handle to the desired location. Once you
have moved the trend line into the correct position click the Recompute
Histogram button to refresh the histogram display.
922 Encom Discover User Guide
When the colour input values are modified by moving the trend line handles it is
possible to zoom into the new data extents by clicking the Zoom to Clip button.
Zoomed to the modified data extents
Alternatively, if you wish to zoom back out to the extents of the data limits for the
Histogram press the Zoom to Data button.
Percentile and Data Break Stretch Types
The Histogram graphically displays the position of data and percentile breaks
relative to the histogram data populations. To create a break, double-click at the
desired value position. To adjust the positions of the percentile or data breaks,
place the mouse cursor over the break line until the cursor appears as a double
arrow and then drag the break line to a new position by dragging with the left
mouse button.
Note The Histogram and Colour tabs are directly linked so when values are changed
on one tab they are directly reflected on the other tab.
Note Although data values can be altered using the trend line, manual inputs can be
specified using the text boxes located beneath the Histogram.
19 Working with Surfaces 923
Histogram tab showing data breaks
As data breaks are added, the colour distribution will be altered automatically.To
manually adjust the colour scheme, right click between the data breaks to expand
a selectable colour palette.
Histogram tab Colour Palette
To delete a break line from the histogram select the break line you wish to delete
and drag the line off the edge of the histogram frame.
924 Encom Discover User Guide
Display a Colour Legend
Surfaces>Make Legend for Grid
Grid Legend map window
Filtering Grids
Surfaces>Grid Filter
The Grid Filter is a powerful tool that provides the following functionality:
Apply Convolution grid filters including smoothing, edge enhancement,
statistical weighting, sun-angle, and user-defined filters. These are based
on a kernel matrix.
Display a legend relating the grid colours to data values. A legend appropriate to
the display style is generated and may be added to a layout window for printing.
The legend is created as a table in the same directory as the original grid. The
grid legend annotations are displayed in a separate Labels table.
Note If the grid display has been modified using the MapInfo Map>Modify Thematic
Map utility, the Discover legend will only display the original grid colour
parameters. To create an updated grid legend, select the Make Legend for Grid
menu option again.
19 Working with Surfaces 925
Apply Geophysical FFT filters.
Apply Padding to grid to remove edge effects.
Apply Fill Holes to remove internal holes within the grid, based on the
surrounding grid values.
To access the Grid Filter dialog, a grid must be open in a map window. Select
the Surfaces>Grid Filter menu option to open the Grid Filter dialog:
The Grid Filter dialog with input, raw and filtered grid previews
Additional grids can be loaded from within the dialog using the Browse button.
Specify the grid format from the Files of Type entry in the Open dialog.
926 Encom Discover User Guide
Once loaded, the grid content is displayed in the three preview windows.
Preview Windows
The Full Input Grid window displays the entire original input grid. The Raw and
Filtered windows may show either the entire grid or a portion of the input grid. The
Filtered preview window displays the output grid with the selected filters applied.
To examine the effects of the filtering process more closely position the cursor in
the Raw or Filtered preview window. When the cursor is placed in one of these
preview windows initially it is displayed as a magnifying glass. Click the left-
mouse button to zoom the view inside the Raw and Filtered preview windows. To
return to the previous zoom view, click the left-mouse button again. To pan a
zoomed view, click the right-mouse button and when the cursor hand is shown,
drag the zoomed image to display a new view.
Zoom Cursor Pan Cursor
If the input grid is larger than 400 x 400 rows and columns, a small rectangle is
drawn over the original grid in the Full Input Grid window. This rectangle
indicates the portion of the grid that is being processed in the other preview
windows. The rectangle can be selected by the cursor and moved to a new part
of the input grid if required.
Grid Filter Information
Note The Grid Filter make require up to 5 times the input grid's file size in available
memory on the destination drive. In particular this will be necessary when
applying padding.
Grid information relating to the size, rows/columns and data within each of the
three preview windows is using the Information button. If a preview window is
zoomed or has one or more filters applied the three grids will contain different
grid data content as indicated in the Grid Information dialog:
19 Working with Surfaces 927
Grid Information for three preview windows with zoom and filter applied
Padding
Padding is a preprocessing step prior to performing the Convolution or
Geophysical filters. This is enabled by ticking Pad Grid before filtering.
The padding process consists of two steps:
1. Fill internal holes in the grid based on interpolating the surrounding cell
values by the minimum curvature algorithm, similar to the method used in
Interactive Gridding, to populate the hole's cells.
2. Subtract from this grid a constant value to normalise the dataset (typically
the mean of median is used).
3. Set the nulls surrounding the grid to 0, adding 0 cells to make the grid
square, and a extra buffer padding margin, as set under the Grid Filter
Settings.
Note It is recommended to always use padding, and padding is required for FFT
filters.
928 Encom Discover User Guide
Applying Grid Filters
The Convolution, Geophysical, and Utils buttons provide pull-down lists of
available filters. Selected filters are listed in the window beneath these buttons. A
full list and description of the available grid filters is provided in Grid Filter
Descriptions. The Grid Filter dialog automatically updates to display the effect of
the selected filters. More than one filter can be applied with a cumulative result.
As each filter is selected, it is automatically applied to the portion of the grid
displayed in the Filtered window. The area over which the filters are applied is
indicated by a square drawn in the Full Input Grid. The raw content of this area
is displayed in the Raw preview window. The combined output of the processing
steps is shown in the Filtered window.
The Grid Filter dialog automatically updates to display the effect of the selected
filters. More than one filter can be applied with a cumulative result. The Filter
Properties area details any controls that apply to a highlighted filter. These
controls may include kernels, required wavelengths and filter specifications.
Filling Holes
The Fill Holes grid utility is used to replace nulls in a grid by interpolating the
surrounding data values. For more information, see Fill Holes.
Saving the Filtered Grid
Once the desired combination of filters has been selected and an acceptable
output presented in the Filtered preview screen, press the Save As button to
create an output grid file. By default this will add a suffix to the input grid file name
denoting the filters applied and save it in the source file directory.
Note You cannot mix Geophysical FFT and non-FFT filters in the same filtering run.
Filters are applied in the order listed. The processing is applied such that the
output of one operation is the input of the next. This means that complex
processing can be applied cumulatively. To alter the order of operation, use the
Up and Down button to the right of the operation list. To remove a selected filter,
highlight it in the filter list and click the Delete button.
19 Working with Surfaces 929
All files, including any temporary and optional output grids, will be stored in this
output folder. You may need up to 5 times the input grid size in disk space in this
directory, to include the temporary and optional files. To automatically display the
filtered grid in a new MapInfo map window after saving to the nominated output
file, check the Auto open output grid box.
Grid Filter Settings
Click the Settings button to access preview display, padding options, and Fast
Fourier Transform options.:
The Show preview headings option toggles the text display in the preview
screens on or off.
The Zoom level can be specified as default integer value: an entry of 5 will zoom
the area to 5 rows/columns for each one seen in the original, upper preview
window.
Note File names greater than 30 characters in length can be ambiguous when used
with certain tools in MapInfo (such as the Layer Control). Discover displays a
warning of this limitation if the specified output file name exceeds this limit.
930 Encom Discover User Guide
The Padding Margin is appended to the original grid and can be saved for
examination if required by checking the Save padded grid box.
The Restore nulls in final grid will restore any internal holes from the input grid
in the final output, which is part of the unpad process. If you un-tick this, it will
effectively produced a final output grid which includes the Fill Holes filter result.
The Z offset is a constant number which is subtracted from the input grid during
the padding process. This is necessary as the grid will be padded with 0 cells, and
to remove edge effects typically the input grid needs to be normalised around 0.
For certain grids a more appropriate value to normalise to is the median or
minimum or maximum values. These can be used by select Use Specified Value
and manually entering the appropriate value.
When applying a FFT filter, the transformed Frequency domain grids, both Real
and Imaginary components, can be saved by ticking Save FFT grid.
Contouring a Grid
Creating Contours
Contour Smoothing
Labelling Contours
Creating Contours
Surfaces>Grid Contouring
Discover's Grid Contouring tool can rapidly contour gridded surfaces of any file
size (including multi-gigabtye sized grids). It will generate a MapInfo Professional
vector table of polylines, each attributed with a Z values. The Grid Contouring tool
can process:
All Supported Grid Formats.
Very large (multi-gigabyte) input grid file sizes.
Multiple input grids forming tiled coverage of a region; all input files must
have the same projection (use the Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Batch
Process>Reproject tool (see Reproject) to batch reproject multiple
grids).
Source gridded surfaces do not have to be open in MapInfo Professional.
19 Working with Surfaces 931
The Grid Contouring dialog
Workflow
1. Open the source gridded surface/s into MapInfo Professional (optional)
2. Select the Surfaces>Grid Contouring menu option
3. Three methods of input grid selection are available:
If contouring a single grid open in MapInfo Professional, select the
grid from the top pull-down list.
If contouring multiple tiled grids open in MapInfo Professional, press
the File Open button at the far right of the Input area. In the
following dialog, select each source grid from the pull-down list and
press the adjacent Add (or Add All) button to build a list of grids.
Press OK when finished to return to the main dialog
If contouring one or more grids not open in MapInfo Professional,
press the File Open button at the far right of the Input area. In the
following dialog, select the Open button and locate and open the
required gridded surfaces. This is recommended in particular for
large input grid file sizes.
932 Encom Discover User Guide
4. Specify the Contour Intervals. Two options for contour interval
specification are available:
By specifying Minor and Major contour values; the Major value will
be automatically limited to multiples of the set Minor value.
The grid data range to be contoured can be restricted by enabling
and setting the Minimum and/or Maximum contour values. This
can be extremely useful when contouring data with outliers
(extremely high or low values), as it prevents Discover from
spending extra time generating unwanted contour lines.
By explicitly listing the desired contour values in a text file, either in
a row-, tab-, comma- or space-delimited format, and selecting this
file using the Load contour control. The text file should the list the
contour levels in increasing order, with a normal separator (e.g.
space, comma, row, etc) such as:
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 500
A contour level file is very useful when the sample data is a non-
normal distribution. Contours can be created to show more detail in
one part of the data range than others. For example, a soil grid with
gold values in the range of 0.01 to 25 ppb could have closely
spaced contours in the range 10-25ppb, but be contoured using
more widely spaced values below 10 ppb.
5. Discover can Colour the resulting contours with the options presented in
the Colour section (far right):
Colour by linestyle: allows the selecting of line style/colour/
thickness for the Minor and Major contour values. Click on the Style
control adjacent to the respective contour interval value, and set the
required styles.
19 Working with Surfaces 933
Colour by lnestyle option
Colour from Source Grid: this till use the input grid's colour
scheme (as set by Modify Grid Display [hyeperlink]) for the
resulting contours. If multiple input grids are selected, this option
will be disabled.
Custom Colour Modulation: This enables both Colour Scale and
Colour Mapping Transform buttons, allowing various colour
mappings and interpolations to be applied from the related sub-
controls (e.g. HSL interpolation with Bandpass truncation). In
particular, the Colour Scale button allows the application of user-
created Legend [hyperlink to the Legend Editor], with a discrete
series of specified data sub-ranges and associated colours; this can
be invaluable when contouring tiled grid datasets.
6. Select a Smoothing option. See Contour Smoothing for more information.
7. The output contour file defaults to the input grid location with a '_contours'
suffix; these can be modified the Save As button
8. The output contour file's Projection can changed from the input file/s,
allowing easy reprojection for massive datasets.
9. Press the Process button.
10. A detailed process log will open, indicating the status and time remaining
of the contouring process. This can be paused or stopped at any time.
Upon contouring completion, the contour file will open into a new MapInfo
Professional mapper window.
934 Encom Discover User Guide
Contour Smoothing
There are three options available for smoothing contour:
None - no smoothing interpolation appied
Interpolate - Contour lines are smoothed by sub-dividing the grid using bi-
cubic interpolation This can greatly improve the appearance of the
contours, though the size of the contour table is increased due to a higher
density of nodes. Three levels of interpolation are available; Low
subdivides each cell into 4 sectors (2x2), Medium subdivides each cell
into 16 sectors (4x4) and High subdivides each cell into 64 sectors (8x8)
Decimate - This reduces the density of the input grid, which can
significantly speed up processing for very large input datasets, at the
expense of reduced resolution. Low decimation reduces groups of 4 cells
(2x2) into 1 cell, Medium decimation reduces groups of 16 cells (4x4) into
1 cell and High decimation reduces groups of 64 cells (8x8) into 1 cell.
19 Working with Surfaces 935
Contouring tips
When very large output contour files are generated (exceeding MapInfo
Professional's table file limits), the Grid Contouring file will generate a
series of contour files numerically suffixed. These will not be automatically
opened, but a prompt will indicate these files need to be manually opened.
When processing very large input files, the Grid Contouring tool requires a
significant amount of free memory for processing. If the source file drive
has insufficient available space, a prompt may be displayed requesting a
different drive to utilise for processing operations.
Grid Contouring can handle multiple input grids (e.g. tiled datasets), but all
input grids must be in the same projection. This can be ensured using the
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Batch Process>Reproject tool [hyperlink].
Labelling Contours
Surfaces>Label Contour Lines
Discover can add Z value labels at user-specified intervals to contour lines. The
labels are created as MapInfo text objects in a chosen layer, such as the cosmetic
layer. Discover adds labels to any attributed contour plan that has a column for
contour level value.
This option can also be used to add line-parallel labels to other linework such as
rivers or roads.
936 Encom Discover User Guide
Specifying contour labelling parameters
The contour labels are placed parallel to the contour lines as normal text objects.
If the contour plan and labels are then viewed at a different scale to that specified
in this dialog, the Z value labels appear at a proportionately different size.
The distance between labels along each contour line is controlled via the Place
Annotation every option. The number of labels on any individual polyline can
also be capped to a maximum number.
Positioning Contour Labels
Surfaces>Contour Label Positioner
Contour labels can be custom positioned using a discrete number of intersecting
polylines (generally perpendicular to the contour lines). Contour labels are placed
at the intersection of these label path lines and the contour lines.
19 Working with Surfaces 937
The Contour Label Positioner dialog, configured to only create labels for the 5m and 10m
contour levels.
Using the Contour Label Positioner. The left hand image displays the source contour lines
938 Encom Discover User Guide
(coloured) and 3 intersecting label path lines (blue), the intersection of which will control
label placement. The right hand image shows the resulting labels. Note that only specified
contours were labelled, using the Minor and Major Label Intervals (illustrated in the dialog
image)
This tool requires two tables to be specified: the Contour Lines table (created
using the Surfaces>Contour Grid option) and a Label Path Lines table. The
Label Path Lines table must be a separate table to the contour lines table and
contain one or more lines or polylines that intersect the contours. Label path lines
drawn in the Cosmetic Layer cannot be used (use Map>Save Cosmetic Objects
to save them to a new table).
Label path lines should generally be drawn at a high angle to the contour
lines; this will create labels that are approximately parallel to the contour
lines.
The output labels will be orientated perpendicular to the label path line: a
vertical line will result in horizontal labels). The label path line start point is
used as the label up direction. Drawing label path lines from left to right,
and from top to bottom of the mapper window, will therefore generally
result in logically orientated labels (i.e. upright). Note that line directions
can be reversed using the Discover>Object Editing>Change Line
Direction tool.
To orientate all labels horizontally (i.e. ignore label path line directions),
select all labels, and select the Discover>Map Making>Format Text
menu option. Tick Alter text labels, and set the New Angle to 0. All labels
will be rotated so that they are horizontal.
A small number of label path lines can be quite effective, particularly when
placed along major features such as ridge lines and gullies.
The Contour Label Positioner will label all intersecting contour lines by default.
This option can be disabled, allowing only specific contour levels to be labelled
(the examples pictured label only the 5m and 10m contours). These labels can be
saved to a new or existing table. If a new table is created, it will include a
Cont_Label field attributed with the appropriate contour value.
Note As with all Discover labelling tools, it is recommended to first create labels in the
cosmetic layer in order to refine their size (using the font size and scale controls).
These can be easily cleared using Map>Clear Cosmetic Layer. Once a
satisfactory label size has found, either specify a new table to create the labels
into (from within the tool), or save the cosmetic layer to a new table. Note
however that labels saved to the cosmetic layer do not store the contour value as
an attribute.
19 Working with Surfaces 939
Creating Polygonal Regions by Selection Criteria
A range of tools are provided on the Discover>Surfaces>Grid Query menu for
creating polygons that bound regions of a grid based on selection criteria:
Select Cells by Surface Property
Select Cells by Multiple Value Ranges
Select Cells by Surface Property
Surfaces>Grid Query>Select by Value
The grid query tools provide a convenient method of creating MapInfo polygons
that cover the areas of the grid that meet the grid query criteria.
The Select by Value query tool can be used to select all grid cells greater or less
than a nominated value or between two selected values. Grid cells that match the
selected criteria are combined into a single polygon with non-contiguous grid cells
combined into a multi-polygon (a polygon that is made up of individual polygon
components but contains only one browser record).
Grid Query dialog
The fill and line style for the created polygons can be selected using the Regions
Style buttons. Select an appropriate name and location for the grid query polygon
table. If no name is selected the grids will be named consecutively GridQuery1,
GridQuery2, etc and stored in the default directory location.
Note Multi-polygons may be split into their individual components using the Object
Editing>Split Multi-Polys tool.
940 Encom Discover User Guide
Select Cells by Multiple Value Ranges
Surfaces>Grid Query>Select by Multiple Ranges
Create coloured vector polygons from selected areas in a grid based on grid cell
data ranges or percentiles.
The Select by Multiple Value Ranges query tool can be used to select all grid
cells which fall within entered percentile or data ranges. Grid cells that match the
selected criteria are combined into a single polygon with non-contiguous grid cells
combined into a multi-polygon (a polygon that is made up of individual polygon
components but contains only one browser record).
The created vector polygons may represent percentile ranges from a
geochemical grid or areas from a DTM grid which correspond to selected
elevation intervals.
Open the Select by Multiple Value Ranges dialog and select the input grid from
the Select Grid pull-down list.
Select by Multiple Value Ranges dialog
Vector polygons may be created from the following multi-value range methods:
19 Working with Surfaces 941
Percentile
Create and colour vector polygons from grid cells values according to the
percentile range that each grid cell value falls within. A percentile is a
value on a scale of 100 that represents the percent of a distribution that is
equal to or less than the entered value. For example, gridded geochemical
data may be extracted to regions using percentile ranges of 30, 60, 80, 90,
95, 98 and 100%. Each of these percentile ranges would be shown in a
different colour to highlight the areas of interest.
Enter a percentile into the Levels window and left-mouse click in the
Colour box to display the colour palette. Select a colour and repeat
process for each percentile.
Value
Create and colour vector polygons from grid cells values according to the
data range that each grid cell value falls within. The data values entered
will be used to create polygons from grid cells whose values are equal to
or less than the entered value.
Enter a data value and left-mouse click in the Colour box to display the
colour palette. Select a colour and repeat process for each data range.
Output Options
By default the output vector polygon table is named using the original input grid
name with a _query extension and saved to the same folder. To modify the new
table name or location click on the Save button.
Original input grid Percentiles vector polygon layer
942 Encom Discover User Guide
Creating Grid Profiles
Surfaces>Draw Grid Profile
Profiles over multiple surfaces may be displayed together to show, for example,
topographic relief together with magnetics and soil geochemistry, allowing
relationships between the surfaces to be examined. Additionally, vector data such
as surface geology polygons and fault lines can be draped over the profiles,
further enhancing the analysis.
A single selected polyline profiling 3 individually coloured grids (a DEM and two
geochemical surfaces). Note that the current cursor location in the profile preview is
marked on all three profiles, as well as being indicated spatially by a red star in the mapper
window. The geochemical grids have both been Scaled and Offset using the controls
discussed in step 8 below.
The Draw Grid Profile function provides a powerful tool for identifying and
analysing trends or spatial relationships between gridded surfaces. Profiles for
one or more lines or polylines can be generated across multiple gridded surfaces
or contour plans.
19 Working with Surfaces 943
To create a profile:
1. Open a number of coincident gridded surfaces (e.g. geophysics,
geochemistry and DEM) into the same map window.
2. Make the cosmetic layer editable in this map window, and draw one or
more lines/polylines across the grid regions of interest
3. Open the Profiler tool (select Surfaces>Draw Grid Profile)
4. Select a line in the cosmetic layer: the dialog will refresh, displaying the
profile of the selected line across each underlying grid surface.
5. If multiple lines/polylines are available, use the SHIFT key to select
multiple lines: the tool will refresh to include a profile for each selected line
and each grid.
6. If multiple grids are open, their display in the Profiler can be controlled by
pressing the Options button at the bottom right if the dialog. In the Profiler
Options>Data tab, press the Select Grids to Profile button. The
following controller allows the current mappers grids to be unselected/
selected by moving them left and right.
7. To colour code the profiles (in order to differentiate for example between a
profile of aeromagnetics versus gravity), select the Profiler
Options>Legend tab. Use the browse button to the right of each grid to
set a different colour for each grid.
8. Note that the Profiler Options>Legend tab also provides controls for
Scaling and Offset of each individual grid. This is useful when trying to
control the magnitude and positioning of geochemical/geophysical profiles
with respect to a DEM/topographic profile.
Note If the display does not automatically refresh, ensure that the Auto Update from
Selected Line option is enabled under the Profiler Options>Data tab (accessed
via the Options button).
Note By default, the X:Y axis scaling ratio is automatic, which fits the minimium and
maximum values to the display window. To override this, navigate to the
Options>Display, and clear the X:Y axis scale Auto check box.
Note The X axis units are determined by the distance units set under the Map
window's settings in Map>Options>Distance units.
944 Encom Discover User Guide
9. Click in the Profiler preview area: a marker will be placed on each profile
relating to this horizontal position in the preview. Simultaneously a symbol
(default star) will be placed in the mapper window on the selected line/s
indicating the associated location. This is a dynamically updated interface,
allowing you to easily relate features on the previewed profile to spatial
locations in the mapper window.
10. To create a permanent profile, press the Export button in the main Profiler
dialog. Select a TAB file name and location, and press Save. The profile
as previewed in the dialog will be opened into a new MapInfo map
window.
Data Selection
Profile lines
One or more lines or polylines need to be selected
These can be in a table, or the cosmetic layer
They can be selected before opening the Profiler tool, or once it has been
opened
If multiple lines/polylines are selected, the profile preview will be drawn so
all lines are drawn from the origin (left), regardless of their actual spatial
positions.
By default the profile preview is automatically updated when new lines are
selected. This can be disabled via the Auto Update from Selected Line
option in the Profiler Options>Data tab. To update the preview manually,
press the Update Profile button
Gridded Surfaces and Contours
Ensure that the required gridded surfaces or contour layers (topographic,
geochemical, geophysical, etc) are open in the mapper window (they do
not have to be visible)
To control grids from within the Profiler tool, select the Options button,
and press the Select Grids to Profile button in the Profiler Options>Data
tab. In the following dialog, ensure that the required grids are listed under
the Selected list; move grids not required to the Unselected list. If you are
selecting a contour layers, you may be prompted to select the Z field to
use in the profile.
19 Working with Surfaces 945
Polygon and Polyline Intersections
Profiles can be coloured with coincident polygons, such as surface geology,
regolith mapping, land use or vegetation maps, etc. Profiles will be coloured with
the foreground colour of the overlying polygon.
1. Ensure that the polygon vector map is open in the map window (does not
have to be visible)
2. In the Profiler Options>Data tab, enable the Show Layer Intersections
option, and press the Select layers button.
3. Move the required polygon vector layer to the Selected list.
The intersection of profiles with coincident polyline data such as faults, drainage,
tracks/roads, lineations, etc, can also be displayed:
1. Ensure that the polygon vector map is open in the map window (does not
have to be visible)
2. In the Profiler Options>Data tab, enable the Show Layer Intersections
option, and press the Select layers button
3. Move the required polyline vector layer/s to the Selected list.
4. Intersections will be marked on profiles as square symbols coloured using
the intersecting polylines colour. Therefore using a table of blue drainage
polylines, and another of red lineations, will display the relevant
intersections as blue and red squares.
946 Encom Discover User Guide
Multiple profiles over a DEM, coloured by a coincident polygon geology table, with
drainage polyline intersections indicated by blue squares.
Interrogating Profiles
Profiles can also be visualised in a tabular spreadsheet format, by selecting the
spreadsheet button at the bottom left of the Profiler dialog. This view provides
the following information for each point of a profile: Distance from the profile
start, Value, and X/Y coordinates. Clicking in the profile preview area will
highlight the corresponding points entry in the spreadsheet view.
19 Working with Surfaces 947
Interrogating multiple profiles using the Info tool
The Info tab of the Profiler Options dialog includes a Show Info Tool option. With
this enabled, the cursor will report the profile's Distance, Value and X and Y
coordinates at that point. This report can be either continuous (enable the Mouse
Moves option in the Info tab), or only upon Button Clicks.
Simultaneously, the profile points location in the mapper window can be displayed
if the Show position in MapInfo option is enabled.
To permanently mark a points location in the mapper window, right click on the
location in the preview window, and choose Mark Point. A symbol will be placed
in the mapper window using the style set under the Grid Options>Display
tab>MapInfo mark symbol control.
Navigating the Preview window
The preview window profile can be zoomed in using either the mouse scroll
wheel or by selecting the zoom buttons.
It can be panned by using by holding and dragging the right mouse click, or
selecting the pan hand button.
948 Encom Discover User Guide
Colouring and Controlling Profiles
The initial colour of profiles is controlled by the colour of the selected line/polyline,
which can be a useful way of distinguishing between multiple profiles over a single
gridded surface.
If creating profiles over multiple grids, each profile/grid combination can be
coloured individually using the controls in the Profiler Options>Legend tab.
Select the button to the right of the desired profile; the Base Colour can be
changed in the following dialog.
The Scaling and Offset of each profile/grid combination can also be controlled
from this dialog. This can be useful when trying to display multiple grids with large
differences in the magnitude of their data ranges. For example, base metal soil
sampling grids often have values in the tens of thousands: to display these over
a topographic grid may require a scale factor of 0.1 or 0.05. An offset may then
be applied to ensure that the profiles are presented in the same Y axis range.
Profiles can also be Smoothed in the Profiler Options>Legend tab. This filters
the line by applying a weighted average algorithm across the line. Note that point
values will not necessarily be honoured when smoothed.
Line-of-Sight
The line-of-sight function allows you to determine which areas of profile surface
will be visible from the start of a straight-line profile.
To generate a line-of-sight profile:
1. Select a straight line to profile in the Map Window, along with any grids/
contours surfaces you wish to view.
2. Select the Options buttons. Under the Data tab, select the Line of Sight
option.
3. Enter a height above the start of each profile to view from e.g. The top of a
view tower or building.
You can reset the position of the preview window by clicking the reset button.
You can change back to the normal mouse pointer by selecting the button - this
can display the mark within MapInfo and/or show the profile info at the selected
point.
19 Working with Surfaces 949
4. Each profile will now be coloured, where green is visible and red is not
visible.
Customizing the Preview Appearance
The Display and Axis tabs of the Profiler Options dialog provide controls for the
following:
Axis display
Axis bounds and tick spacing
Grid line display
Background colour
Zero value line display
Y axis value scaling (linear or log10)
X:Y axis ratio scaling
MapInfo position and mark symbol styles
By default, the X:Y axis scaling ratio is automatic, which fits the minimum and
maximum values for the display window. To overriide this, navigate to the
Options>Display, and clear the X:Y axis scale Auto check box.
Output
The Profile Preview can be saved permanently as a MapInfo table, using the
Export button. This table will reflect any customized colours, scaling, offsets,
polygon and polyline intersections, etc displayed in the preview.
Note Only single line profiles are supported. Polyline profiles will not be coloured by
Line of Sight.
Note The X axis units are determined by the distance units set under the Map
Window's settings in Map>Options>Distance units.
950 Encom Discover User Guide
The spreadsheet can be exported either as a MapInfo browser or a .CSV file
using the options at the bottom of the spreadsheet view.
An output map window from the Draw Grid Profile tool
Creating Voronoi Polygons
Surfaces>Create Voronoi Polygons
The Create Voronoi Polygon function generates Voronoi polygons from a set of
input points.
Voronoi Polygons are polygons that enclose one point with the border of each
polygon. The polygon boundaries are located at the midpoint between
neighbouring points. Voronoi Polygons are the inverse of a triangular irregular
network and cover an area that may be thought of as the area of influence for
that data point. The area within the Voronoi polygon boundary is closer in distance
to the central Voronoi polygon data point than any other data point in the table.
Voronoi Polygons provide a method for creating a surface without interpolation
and gridding. In many cases, for example when analysing coal or mineral sands
drillholes, creating a surface of voronoi polygons based on the drillhole locations
may be preferable to gridding.
Profiles can also be visualised and exported in a tabular spreadsheet format, by
selecting the spreadsheet button at the bottom left of the Profiler dialog. This
view provides the following information for each point of a profile: distance from
the profile start, value, X and Y coordinates, intersecting layers, and the selected
attributes from any intersecting layers. Clicking in the profile preview area will
highlight the corresponding points entry in the spreadsheet view.
19 Working with Surfaces 951
When the Voronoi Polygons are created by Discover, all of the attributes of the
points are transferred to the polygons, allowing for quick estimation of volumes or
concentrations.
Example of Voronoi Polygons generated from sample locations
Discover generates Voronoi Polygons from selected points in the front map
window. By default, the created Voronoi Polygons extend no further than the
outer boundary of the group of selected points (the convex hull). However, the
Voronoi Polygons may be extended by any distance outside of the convex hull by
specifying the distance in metres or degrees.
A bounding polygon may also be used to contain the extent of the Voronoi
Polygons. Select the bounding polygon before selecting the Voronoi Polygons
menu item and all points that lie within the selected bounding polygon will be used
to create Voronoi Polygons.
952 Encom Discover User Guide
Create Voronoi Polygons dialog
When the polygons are created, they have the same table structure as the points
table on which they were based. This enables the polygons to be easily coloured,
queried or thematically mapped.
Calculating Surface Properties and Volumes
Calculating the Volume Between Two Grids
Calculating Volumes by Level
Calculating Curvature
Calculating Cut-and-Fill Volumes
Calculating Surface Areas
Calculating the Volume Between Two Grids
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Volume
To calculate volumes between two grids, use Grid Utilities>Volume (see Using
the Interactive Grid Utility Tool). The Grid Utility tool also provides options for
calculating volumes above or below an elevation (by level) and reporting cut-and-
fill volumes between two surfaces.
19 Working with Surfaces 953
Calculating Volumes by Level
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Volume
To calculate volumes between a grid and a horizontal plane, use Grid
Utilities>Volume (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool). The Grid Utility tool
provides options for calculating volumes and reporting cut-and-fill volumes
between two surfaces.
Calculating Curvature
Use Grid Utilities>Curvature (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool) to
calculate the curvature of a grid.
Calculating Cut-and-Fill Volumes
Use Grid Utilities>Cut Fill (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool) to
calculate the volume added and removed between two grids.
Calculating Surface Areas
Use Grid Utilities>Surface Area (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool) to
calculate the.non-planar area, planar area and roughness of a grid.
Computing Cell Values by Expressions
Surfaces>Grid Calculator
The Discover Grid Calculator can apply arithmetic operations, logic,
comparative and Boolean operations directly to grids or between grids in any
supported grid format. It performs the operations directly writing to the disk file,
and does not require the grid to be loaded into memory or opened in MapInfo
Professional.
954 Encom Discover User Guide
Grid Calculator dialog
Grids can be assigned an alias name to enable the shortening of complex file
names for ease of use in the expression line. For example, the grid file
Rockchip_samples_As_210503 can be simplified to the alias name X. This
enables the following simple expression output=X/(X*2) to be entered into the
expression line rather than full grid name. To create a grid name alias, double
click on the relevant cell in the Alias Name column and type the desired alias
name.
Available grids are displayed in the scrollable list at the top of the dialog. This list
is initially populated by all grids currently open. Further grids can be added to the
list using the Load Grid button, and removed from the list using the Delete Grid
button. Use the Information button to obtain details of a selected grid.
Note In the Grid Open dialog a range of supported grid formats are available. The
Grid Calculator can be used to convert grid formats if required. Grid to grid
computation can also be performed irrespective of the input formats or
requested output format.
19 Working with Surfaces 955
The Grid Calculator requires a formula to be specified in the Expression line in
the middle of the dialog. Complex grid operations such a Boolean and decision
functions can also be applied. These grid operations are described in detail in
Creating an Expression and Grid Calculator Syntax.
If the input grids cells are not co-incident, the data is interpolated to create the
same grid geometry between each input grid.
If the input grids have different cell sizes, the largest cell size will be used during
the computation and output grid.
Use the Resample utility to make the cell size of each input grid the same. Use
Grid to Grid Clip utility to make the bounds coincide. If grids have a differing cell
size, they will be resampled using a nearest neighbour method, to the largest cell
size.
Note The Grid Calculator may require up to two-times the input grid file size in
available memory on the destination drive.
956 Encom Discover User Guide
Creating an Expression
The Grid Calculator expression line and button controls are shown below.
Grid Calculator button layout and command line control
An expression must be a correct arithmetic formula of the format:
output =function(input)
A new grid file alias must be entered on the left-side of the expression. By default
this is "output". This alias is automatically used by default for the output grid file
name when the output grid is generated.
Note In the above example, a new grid (named Regolith_Grid) is to be created from
subtracting an existing grid from another (Spot_Heights - Basement).
To add a grid to the expression line, place the cursor at the desired location in
the expression (if not already there), highlight the grid in the grid list and press
the Add Grid button.
19 Working with Surfaces 957
Click the individual operation buttons to enter the operation into the expression
line. Formulas can be entered directly into the expression line by keyboard entry
or by selecting the appropriate fields and buttons via the Grid Calculator.
The Insert Function button enables the construction of complex formulae. A
wide range of arithmetic, logic and Boolean operations are available from within
the Grid Calculator. When a function is selected from the Insert Function
pulldown list a definition of the function and the syntax required is displayed in the
Grid Calculator dialog.
The actual output grid file name can be to be specified when the expression is
computed in the Output section or using the file Save As button. If the output file
name is not changed, the alias name is automatically saved. The Output grid file
type can also be selected from the Format drop down list. The Compute
Summary statistics option enables the calculations of grid statistics which are
used by Discover's Grid Handlers to display the grid in MapInfo Professional.
When the expression is completed, press the Compute button. If the syntax is
correct, a progress window is displayed as the Grid Calculator processes the
expression. If there is a syntax error in the expression line the following dialog is
displayed:
Incorrect expression line syntax dialog
Once the calculation is finished the new grid will automatically be opened in a map
window.
The Recently Used Expression button opens a drop down list of functions last
used in the Grid Calculator.
The Save As button enables an expression to be saved to a text file. Use the
Load button to re-load the saved expression into the Grid Calculator dialog.
958 Encom Discover User Guide
Manipulating Grids
Surfaces>Grid Utilities
Discover Grid Utilities provide numerous tools to simplify common grid
manipulation, processing, and calculation tasks. Grid Utilities can be run in two
modes:
Interactively process a single file with a single tool by selecting the tool
from Surfaces>Grid Utilities (see Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool)
Batch process multiple files with multiple tools by selecting
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Batch Process (see Batch Processing Grids
with Grid Utilities).
Most utilities support processing large multi-gigabyte grid files, without the need
for large amounts of memory (RAM). The tools marked with ml in the list below,
however, are memory limited.
Many utilities support batch mode processing. The tools marked with nb in the
list below, however, are not supported by the Batch Process tool.
For information about the tools available, see Grid Utility Tools.
ml =memory limited
nb =not supported by batch processing
Note To use the Grid Calculator for a simple grid format conversion, use an
expression in the form Newgrid=Oldgrid, and specify the new file format in the
output section. An easier alternative is to use the Surfaces>Grid
Utilities>Convert tool.
Classify Flip
nb
Slope
Grid to Grid Clip
ml
Merge
nb
Split
nb
Clip Outline
nb
Statistics
Convert Overlay Surface Area
nb
Create RGB
ml,nb
Replace Vectorize
ml
Curvature Reproject Viewshed
ml,nb
Cut/Fill
ml,nb
Resample Volume
nb
Edit
ml,nb
Rotate
nb
Fill Holes
ml,nb
Shift
nb
19 Working with Surfaces 959
You can also manipulate grid cell values by expressions with the Grid Calculator
(see Computing Cell Values by Expressions).
Using the Interactive Grid Utility Tool
Grid Utility dialog
The Utilities button displays a pull-down list of the available grid utility tools.
Select a utility to display a description and the control parameters in the main
portion of the Grid Utility dialog.
The upper portion of the Grid Utility dialog displays all available open grids. Use
the Browse button to add a grid to this list. If you wish to apply operations to a
new flat grid, use the Create New Grid button.
960 Encom Discover User Guide
Depending on the grid utility selected, a range of parameters and options may be
required to be entered, altered or selected. These are detailed for each Grid Utility
(see Manipulating Grids for list of tools).
The Information button displays the registration and statistics for the selected full
input grid, and the current preview tile before and after grids.
Preview Window
The two grid windows on the right side of the Grid Utility dialog display Before
and After views of the selected grid. As the grid selection or function is changed,
the After preview window is redrawn and updated with the changes. Note that the
visual changes occur in memory only and are not permanently saved until you
specify and save an output grid using the Save As button.
A number of preview window navigation options are available:
Note Grid Utilities that operate on multiple grids (e.g. Volume, Grid to Grid Clip,
Merge) require all source grids to be in the same projection and have the same
cell size. Use the Reproject tool to change the projection of a grid and the
Resample tool to change the cell size.
To modify the appearance of a grid in the preview window click the Use Colour
Look-Up table button to toggle between a grey-scale or colour grid display. To
toggle between a linear or equal area histogram colour stretch use the
Histogram Equalisation button.
Pointer mode Change the cursor to this mode to select a position or cell value
in a grid. The corresponding coordinates and cell value will be displayed in the
bottom left of the dialog.
Zoom In or Out Select a zoom mode and click in one of the preview panes.
The zoom-in tool will halve the preview window zoom width, and the zoom-out
tool doubles the preview window width.
Pan the image by positioning the cursor in the preview window, and then
(holding down the left mouse button) dragging to a new location. The redrawn
image is centred on the new location.
View the extent of the grid in either Before or After preview pane windows.
1:1 zoom ratio, such that 1 grid cell equals 1 pixel on screen.
19 Working with Surfaces 961
The Column and Row position of the cursor in the preview window is displayed
underneath the navigation tools.
At any time in the processing of a grid, the Stop button can be used to halt
computation and return to the previous state.
Changing the Settings for the Grid Utilities Tool
To change the Grid Utilities settings, click the Settings button on the Grid
Utilities dialog. From this dialog, you can:
Display crosshairs in the After window when using the Edit grid utility.
Cross hair cursor display enabled via Show selected cell in preview Setting
Display the Full Input Grid", "Before and After text in the preview
windows.
When the input and output data are scaled differently, and it is necessary
to apply a new colour stretch to the output grid, select the Use separate
colour stretch for After preview check box.
Automatically load the first grid opened in MapInfo Professional into the
Grid Utility dialog by select the Load default grid without prompting for
grid selection check box. If there is not a grid in the front Map window,
the user is prompted to select a grid file.
Click Reload the preview tile, if the Before preview window has panned or
zoomed outside the currently previewed bounds, and is not automatically
reloaded.
962 Encom Discover User Guide
When panning and zooming outside the bounds of the currently loaded
preview area, select the Automatically load new tile when preview
panned or zoomed to update the Before preview from the full input grid.
To change the maximum grid size that can be loaded into memory, review
the Maximum size of grid for limited utilities setting, in millions of cells,
that can be processed by memory restricted tools. The default 200 million
limit is the upper limit of what can be processed on a typical modern
computer.
Saving the Output Grid
Once a grid utility has been applied to a grid and an acceptable output presented
in the After preview screen, click the Save As button to create an output grid file.
By default the output grid is named using the original grid with an appropriate
suffix based the grid utility applied and saved to the original file directory.
To automatically display a new grid in a map window after saving to the
nominated output file, check the Auto open grid when saved box.
If the input grid file does not have an associated TAB file or an embedded
projection with an EPSG code, a dialog will be displayed with a prompt to choose
a projection for the output grid. This will be used to display the grid within MapInfo
Professional, and if it is a compatible file type, embedded in the grid file for
automatic display in third party applications.
The projection selected must be the same as the original source grid, otherwise
the grid will not display correctly. The only utility which allows the conversion of
grid projections is the utility.
ERMapper Grid Output
If an ERMapper grid is selected as the output grid type for a Grid Utility, a prompt
may be displayed to select the Datum, Projection Type and Projection Member
from a dropdown list. This occurs so that the correct projection information will be
added to the ERS header file, which utilises a different projection library to
MapInfo, and cannot therefore be automatically populated.
19 Working with Surfaces 963
For example, if the gridded point data was located in the projection MGA94
(GDA94) Zone 54 the following parameters will need to be entered:
Datum: GDA94
Projection Type: tranmerc
Projection Member: MGA54
If the gridded point data was located in either in an affine or custom MapInfo
projection, it is most likely that the coordinate system parameters will not be listed
in the dropdown lists. In this instance accept the default parameters and press
OK. No projection information will be recorded in the grid file.
If the input grid is in non-earth, the Datum should automatically be set to None:
simply press OK to continue.
ERMapper coordinate system dialog
Batch Processing Grids with Grid Utilities
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Batch Process
A number of grid utility tools can be run in an automated batch process. There are
four ways the Batch Process tool can be used:
Note
If a projection is not selected, the output grid will still open correctly in MapInfo.
Failure to select a projection will mean that projection details will need to be
entered manually when the output grid is imported into a third party software
program.
964 Encom Discover User Guide
To process multiple files with the same utility and settings. For example,
clipping a number of grid files to a single polygon area.
To script a number of files with different utilities and settings. For example,
if you have a number of large files to process.
To automate repeated processing of a single file across a number of
utilities with the same input file name.
To process a single input file with multiple toolssuch as calculate Slope
and Curvature and then Vectorize.
To run Grid Utilities as a batch process:
1. Select Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Batch Process.
2. Click the Add button.
3. Select the grid files for processing or use the Open button. Select multiple
files by holding the CTRL key. Click OK.
4. Select the grid utility tool to process the files, and click OK.
5. Select a grid and click the Edit button, or double-click to open the utility
settings.
6. Adjust the settings for the selected grid. For more details on each utility
options, refer to the individual tools listed in Manipulating Grids.
7. Use the up and down arrows to reorder the grids, which are executed in
order from top to bottom. Ensure that any intermediate output grids are
created before being processed by another utility. For example, ensure
the grid is reprojected into the correct coordinate system before being
clipped by a polygon vector file.
8. Once settings are configured for each grid, click the Save button to save
the batch settings.
9. Click Run All Utilities to start processing.
Note The input grid file must exist before it can be processed in batch mode. If
necessary, a dummy text file can be created and used as a placeholder.
19 Working with Surfaces 965
Grid Utility Tools
ml =memory limited
nb =not supported by batch processing
Classify
Classify each grid cell into one of a number of ranges.
Grid to Grid Clip
Clip a grid to the non-null area of another grid.
Clip
Define a region using an irregular polygon or rectangle and remove the
portion of the grid that lies within or outside this region.
Convert
Input a data grid in one format and save to another grid format.
Create RGB
ml,nb
Combine separate grids having red:green:blue colour signatures to a
single, multi-banded RGB grid file.
Curvature
Compute curvature of each cell in a grid.
Cut/Fill
ml,nb
Compute the differential volume of material added/removed between two
grids.
Edit
ml,nb
Display and edit a selected grid cell. View surrounding grid cell values.
Fill Holes
ml,nb
Replace nulls within or around a grid by minimum curvature interpolation
using the surrounding call values.
Flip
nb
Invert the rows or the columns of a grid in their location either horizontally
or vertically.
Merge
nb
Merge several grids with different extents to form a new grid.
Note Batch utilities runs sequentially. Processing is not multi-threaded with multiple
CPUs.
966 Encom Discover User Guide
Outline
nb
Create attributed polygons outlining the bounds of multiple grids.
Overlay
Modify grid cell values based on vector object attributes in a specified TAB
vector file.
Replace
Replace grid values within a specified range (such as nulls or nominated
values) with another value or null.
Reproject
Reproject a grid into a new coordinate system.
Resample
Re-interpolate a grid to a new cell size using one of three available
interpolation schemes.
Rotate
nb
Rotate a grid about its origin or centre.
Shift
nb
Apply an easting or northing offset to the origin of a grid.
Slope
Calculate the slope angle or aspect (dip direction) of each cell in a grid.
Split
nb
For multi-banded grids, split the bands into separate, component grids.
Statistics
Compute statistics for a grid, or the cells contained by one or more
overlying vector objects, or by regions in a classified grid.
Surface Area
nb
Compute the 3D surface area, planar area, and roughness of cells ina
grid.
Vectorize
ml
Convert a grid into polygons defining individual cells, non-null regions,
regions of discrete values, or the grid bounds.
Viewshed
ml,nb
Compute the view-shed of one or more towers of a specified height above
the grid to an observer at a specified height above the grid.
19 Working with Surfaces 967
Volume
nb
Calculate the volume between two grids or the volume of a grid above or
below an elevation (Z).
Classify
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Classify
Large grids
Batch processing
The Classify grid utility enables an input grid to have the value of each cell
classified into one of a number of ranges. By default the input grid is automatically
classified into 5 bins. Each bin represents an equal data range spread between
the minimum and maximum grid values. The output cells are assigned a bin value
of 1 to 5 based on the input cell value range.
Click the Auto button to modify the Input classification range and the Number
of classifications or bins in the output grid. By default, the bin or classification
values start at 1 and increase by 1, but can be changed by setting a new Output
value start and Output value step. These settings are saved in the registry and
are used as the defaults next time the Classify utility is run.
You can also define the bin ranges manually:
To edit a bin range, click the From, To, or Value box and type or edit. To
specify a null value, type null.
To append a new row, click Add row.
To insert a new row, select the row after where you wish to insert, and click
Insert row.
To delete a row, select the row and click Delete row. Hold down the SHIFT
or CTRL keys to select multiple rows for deletion.
Grid to Grid Clip
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Grid to Grid Clip
Large grids
Batch processing
Clip a grid to the extents of an overlapping grid.
968 Encom Discover User Guide
To clip a grid to the bounds of another grid:
1. Select the Main grid (i.e. the grid to be clipped) from the listing of available
grids at the top of the Grid Utility dialog.
2. Select the Secondary grid to clip against (i.e. the grid whose extents the
source grid will be clipped to) in the Clip to Grid pull-down list. If this is a
multi-banded grid, select the appropriate band from the adjacent pull-
down.
3. Select a clipping Action:
Select the Clip to extents of secondary grid action to remove the
portion of the main grid that lies outside of the secondary grid.
Select the Blank grid underneath secondary grid action to
remove the overlapping portion of the main grid.
4. The output grid is displayed in the Preview window. Click Save As to
generate the output clipped grid.
Clip
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Clip
Large grids
Batch processing
Clip a grid to a bounding polygon or rectangle.
When a grid is clipped, where possible, the size of the grid is minimised and nulls
and unused whole rows or columns removed. This can substantially reduce the
size of a large grid if only a small portion is extracted.
Clipping is based on the grid cell centre. Hence, cells that are intersected by the
boundary are not necessarily included. To increase the clipping accuracy, use the
Resample tool to reduce the cell size.
Note Both input grids must have the same projection and grid cell sizes.
Note The input grid and vector file (if specified) must have the same projection.
19 Working with Surfaces 969
To clip a grid by a bounding polygon:
1. Select the grid to be clipped from the listing of available grids at the top of
the Grid Utility dialog.
2. Under Clipping region, select Polygonal.
3. To define the polygon, either:
Select the MapInfo table containing the polygon to clip against (a
tenement boundary or project area, for example).
Select a polygon in the grid map window from an existing layer or
the cosmetic layer.
4. Select a clipping Action:
Select the Clip grid to region action to remove the portion of the
main grid which lies outside of the clipping region.
Select the Blank grid underneath region action to remove the
overlapping portion of the grid that lies outside the clipping region.
5. The output grid is displayed in the Preview window. Click Save As to
generate the output clipped grid.
To clip a grid by a a rectangle:
1. Select the grid to be clipped from the listing of available grids at the top of
the Grid Utility dialog.
2. Under Clipping region, select Rectangular.
3. To specify the rectangle, either:
Adjust the polygon displayed in the After preview window by clicking
the +and buttons next to the grid Min and Max X and Y corner
extents.
Select the Pointer mode tool and, in the After preview window, click
at any corner of the desired rectangle and drag the cursor to the
opposite corner.
4. Select a clipping Action:
Select the Clip grid to region action to remove the portion of the
main grid which lies outside of the clipping region.
970 Encom Discover User Guide
Select the Blank grid underneath region action to remove the
overlapping portion of the grid that lies outside the clipping region.
5. The output grid is displayed in the Preview window. Click Save As to
generate the output clipped grid.
Convert
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Convert
Large grids
Batch processing
Selected grids can be converted (or exported) to an alternate grid format. The
formats available are:
Arc/ESRI ASCII
Arc/ESRI FLT binary
BIL
ERMapper
Geosoft
ASEG GXF
MapInfo MIG
Minex
Surfer
Vertical Mapper
To convert a grid to another format:
1. Select the grid to be converted from the listing of available grids at the top
of the Grid Utility dialog.
2. From the Save as type box, select the output grid format.
3. (Optional) The output grid can be changed. Selecting a smaller Datatype
(therefore resulting in a reduced range) will result in a smaller output file
size, but truncation of data may occur. Truncated data will be capped to
the minimum or maximum value of the data type's range. This option
should therefore be used carefully.
4. (Optional) Change the output grid Null value, if required.
5. Click Save As to export the file.
19 Working with Surfaces 971
Create RGB
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Create RGB
Large grids
Batch processing
The Create RGB utility allows three grids (assigned to the primary colour bands
Red:Blue:Green) to be combined to produce a single RGB image. These images
are generally used to display multi-component data such as spectrometry (for
example, Potassium, Uranium and Thorium).
The input grids can be Range Clipped by either a single percentile, multiple
percentiles or multiple value ranges. Data within the specified range will be
assigned a value of between 0 and 255. Input data below the bottom clip will be
assigned a value of 0, whilst data above the top clip will be assigned a value of
255.
The Thresholding option assigns an output value of 255 to all input data within
the specified clipping range. All data outside this range is assigned a value of 0.
This will produce an image of up to 8 colours (black, white, red, green, blue,
yellow, cyan and magenta).
Curvature
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Curvature
Large grids
Batch processing
The Curvature utility calculates the curvature of a surface at each cell centre.
Three types of curvature grids are available:
Profile curvature is estimated along the direction of maximum slope
Plan curvature is estimated across the direction of maximum slope
Surface curvature is computed as the difference between the Profile and
the Plan curvatures.
The method used to create the curvature grids is as follows.
Curvature is computed for the centre cell (e0) within a 3x3 kernel such as:
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, data extents, and grid cell sizes.
972 Encom Discover User Guide
The first step is to estimate the coefficients D through H of a quadratic polynomial
equation that fits the 3x3 window.
z =Ax
2
y
2
+Bx
2
y +Cxy
2
+Dx
2
+Ey
2
+Fxy +Gx +Hy +I
where
D =[(e4 +e5)/2 - e0] / CellSize
2
E =[(e2 +e7)/2 -e0] / CellSize
2
F =(-e1 +e3 +e6 - e8) / 4 x CellSize
2
G =(-e4 +e5) / 2 x CellSize
H =(e2 - e7) / 2 x CellSize
The Profile Curvature is estimated along the direction of maximum slope and is
computed as:
Profile Curvature =-2 [(DG
2
+EH
2
+FGH) / (G
2
+H
2
)]
The Plan Curvature is estimated across the direction of maximum slope and is
computed as:
Plan Curvature =2 [(DH
2
+EG
2
- FGH) / (G
2
+H
2
)]
The Surface Curvature is the difference between the Profile and Plan and is
computed as:
Surface Curvature =-2 (D +E)
A positive curvature indicates that the surface is upwardly convex at that point,
whilst a negative curvature indicates that the surface is upwardly concave. A
value of zero indicates that the surface is flat.
Cut/Fill
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Cut Fill
Large grids
Batch processing
e1 e2 e3
e4 e0 e5
e6 e7 e8
19 Working with Surfaces 973
The Cut/Fill utility calculates the volume difference between two grid files, and
creates a new grid file in which each cell represents the volume difference.
It also classifies the areas where material has been added or removed. For two
grids of the same area at different time periods (i.e. temporally related), a grid or
vector file can be created representing the regions where material has been
added, removed or remained unchanged.
The volume between the two grids is calculated by subtracting each bottom grid
cell Z value from the corresponding top grid cell Z value and then multiplying by
the top grid cell width (X) and height (Y).
To calculate the cut and fill volumes between two grids:
1. Select the first/initial grid in the top grid list - it will be populated in the
Before grid area.
2. Select the final grid from the After Grid pull down list (if a multi-banded
grid is selected, choose the appropriate band from the adjacent pull-
down).
3. Set the Output Type, either:
Cut/Fill Classes an output Grid or Vector file will be created.
Each grid cell or vector region will have a value indicating the
change type:
0 no change in volume
1 material has been added (Fill)
2 material has been removed (Cut)
The output vector file (.TAB, .MIF or .SHP) will also be attributed
with the cell Count, Area and Volume change for each region. The
option Make generated regions hollow will produce uncoloured
vector regions.
Volume Differences an output grid will be created, with each grid
cell indicating the volume difference (negative for volume cut/
removal, positive for volume fill/addition) between the Before and
After grids
Note Both input grids must have the same projection and grid cell sizes.
974 Encom Discover User Guide
4. Press the Save As button and select the output file name, location and
type.
The following additional values will be displayed within the Cut/Fill dialog when
the Before and After grid is selected:
Fill Volume (1) the volume where the After grid is above the Before grid.
Cut Volume (2) the volume where the After grid is below the Before grid.
Volume Change the volume difference between the two grids (the Fill
Volume minus the Cut Volume).
Edit
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Edit
Large grids
Batch processing
Select and modify individual data values in a grid. The Edit utility displays all the
grid cell values in spreadsheet row and column format.
Select the Pointer mode button in the preview area and move the cursor over a
grid cell in the preview window. The spreadsheet is automatically re-displayed to
show the data values of the selected grid cell and the surrounding grid cells. If the
level of zoom is inappropriate, select the magnifying glass zoom in or out buttons
and adjust the view.
To enable more accurate selection of a grid cell check the Show selected cell in
preview box in the Settings dialog. The cursor location in the preview window is
now displayed as a large cross-hair.
To modify a selected grid cell, double-click inside the spreadsheet cell and enter
a new value.
19 Working with Surfaces 975
Selected grid cell and displayed data value available for editing
Right-click on a cell to display the shortcut menu: Copy Selection, Paste, and
Fill Selection. The Fill Selection option allows the currently selected cells to be
populated with either a constant user-defined value or null value.
Fill value dialog
976 Encom Discover User Guide
Fill Holes
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Fill Holes
Large grids
Batch processing
The Fill Holes utility is used to replace nulls in a grid by interpolating the
surrounding data values. Two Fill Holes options are available:
Fill internal holes only
Only internal holes or null grid cells which are not connected by nulls to
the outer edge of the grid are given a new interpolated value.
Fill internal holes and nulls surrounding grid
All null grid cells in the grid are replaced with interpolated values.
The method used to fill holes is based on interpolation the surrounding cell values
by the minimum curvature algorithm, similar to the method used in Interactive
Gridding, to populate the hole's cells. Note that this does not support large grids.
Flip
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Flip
Large grids
Batch processing
Flip a grid horizontally and/or vertically. Two flipping options are available:
Flip horizontally
The order of the columns in the grid is reversed to produce a horizontal
flip.
Flip vertically
The order of the rows in the grid is reversed to produce a vertical flip.
No change is made to the number of rows or columns of a grid in this operation
and the extent and origin of the grid in unchanged.
Merge
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Merge
Large grids
Batch processing
19 Working with Surfaces 977
The Merge grid tool allows multiple grids (overlapping or non-overlapping) to be
combined into a single output grid. A number of data handling options are
provided for overlapping cell values.
Within the Merge grid dialog area, select the source grids from the pull-down list
and use the Add (or Add All) button to add these to the Grids to merge window
below. Selecting grids from this pull-down list will not force a refresh of the
preview screen each time a grid is selected, which is useful when dealing with
large grids. The preview screen can be manually refreshed using the Update
button. Grids can be removed from the Grids to merge window using the
Remove button.
A primary grid must be highlighted in the Grids to merge window; the Merge tool
will use this grids cell dimensions for the output grid.
A range of Overlap combining methods are provided for handling of
overlapping grid cells:
Minimum
Maximum
Average
Sum
Grid order
Grid Order
To adjust the ordering of layers, use the Up and Down arrow buttons next to the
list. The first grid in the list will be the top-most value used if it overlaps with other
grids. The last grid in the list value will only be used when no other grids overlap it.
Interpolation will be used to resample any differing grid cell sizes to the largest
cell size, select from -
Bilinear - the value of a grid cell in the new grid is assigned the weighted
value of the four surrounding grid cells in the original grid.
Bi-cubic - uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in
the original grid to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new grid. This
method requires more processing but is more accurate than bilinear
interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
Note Both input grids must have the same projection. For best results, the grids
should also have the same cell size.
978 Encom Discover User Guide
Nearest Neighbour - simple interpolation whereby the new grid cell value
is taken from the closest grid cell in the original grid.
Outline
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Outline
Large grids
Batch processing
The Outline utility allows the bounds of multiple grids to be outlined as polygons
in a single output vector file. Each bounding polygon is attributed with the source
grid file name, and its minimum and maximum X and Y coordinates.
This is a useful way of visualising the extents of multiple regional airborne
surveys, such as aeromagnetic and gravity surveys.
Overlay
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Overlay
Large grids
Batch processing
The Overlay utility enables grid cells to be classified using points, polygons, and
polylines from a specified MapInfo TAB or MID/MIF vector file. The dialog is
enabled once an appropriate vector file is opened using the Browse button.
The Overlay tool allows both the Overlay value (cells overlayed by the vector file
objects) and the Background value (non-overlayed cells) to be specified to:
Null (i.e.. blank)
Input grid
Constant value
In addition the Overlay Value can be set to a numeric field from the selected TAB
file, by selecting the Overlay Field.
Note Each input grid must have the same projection.
Note The input grid and vector file must have the same projection.
19 Working with Surfaces 979
The method used to determine if a grid cell is located within a polygon, is whether
the centre point of the cell is located within the polygon. Note that some partially
covered cells may not be included due to this. To increase the accuracy you can
use the Resample utility to decrease the cell size.
A Buffer zone may be specified by the user to control how wide these objects
appear in the overlay output. The default buffer zone of 0 means that a polyline
will create an overlay that is approximately one grid cell wide. e.g. A buffer value
of 15 will create a line overlay with a width of 30 metres (15 metres each side of
the line). Points will result in a circular coverage with a radius equal to the buffer
zone. Polygon boundaries are also extended by the buffer amount.
Replace
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Replace
Large grids
Batch processing
Replace all instances of a specified grid cell value with a new value.
This operation is especially useful when manipulating null values within grids. The
value of a Null may differ with different grid formats but the Grid Utility
compensates for this.
The dialog allows a +/- Tolerance to be specified. An entered value allows the
replacement process to vary about a range centred on the substitution value. For
example, if a replacement value of 50,000 was used with a +/- Tolerance of 10,
then all values found in the grid between 49,990 and 50,010 would be replaced
by the defined replacement entry.
Reproject
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Reproject
Large grids
Batch processing
Surface grids can be reprojected between projected (e.g. UTM), geographic (e.g.
lat-long) and custom coordinate systems. This operation relocates the various
pixel locations in the grid through an interpolation method to match the requested
output coordinate system.
980 Encom Discover User Guide
In the .TAB file associated with a registered grid the coordinates for the grid
extents are stored as both real-world coordinates and grid pixel coordinates along
with the coordinate system details. When a grid is reprojected to another
coordinate system, a new grid and .TAB file is created containing the real-world
coordinates in the new projection and the new coordinate system details. The
following example details how to reproject an elevation grid from UTM projection
AMG Zone 55 (AGD84) into MGA Zone 55 (GDA94) projection.
1. Select the source grid from the list of available grids at the top of the Grid
Utility dialog. This will populate the Source coordinate system with the
grids projection.
2. Use the Choose button under the Target coordinate system window to
select the output projection using the Category and Category Members
options.
3. Select an Interpolation Method from the following:
Bilinear - the value of a grid cell in the new grid is assigned the
weighted value of the four surrounding grid cells in the original grid.
Bi-cubic uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell
values in the original grid to interpolate the value a grid cell in the
new grid. This method requires more processing but is more
accurate than bilinear interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also
produces a smoother grid.
Nearest Neighbour - simple interpolation whereby the new grid cell
value is taken from the closest grid cell in the original grid.
4. Click Update after selecting an interpolation method.
Note If the tool cannot recognise the grid projection, use the Choose button to select
the appropriate source projection. Alternatively, ensure that this grid is in the
front mapper window before opening the Reproject tool to automatically
populate this projection.
Note The projection list available in the Discover Grid Reproject utility is stored in a
separate file to the MapInfow.prj file. Therefore not all the projections in the
MapInfow.prj will be available for selection in this utility. If you wish to reproject
grids into a custom coordinate system which has been added to the
MapInfow.prj file then copy the custom projection line into the Encom.prj file
located in the . \ \ Pr ogr amFi l es\ Encom\ Common\ Pr oj ect i ons folder.
19 Working with Surfaces 981
5. Select a name for the reprojected grid file by clicking on the Save As
button.
By default, a new reprojected grid file and .TAB file are created using the
original grid name and a _reproject extension. To change the output file
name, click on the new name and modify. Click Save to create the
reprojected grid files.
Resample
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Resample
Large grids
Batch processing
The Resample utility enables new grid cell dimensions to be calculated for a grid.
Specify a New cell Height or a New cell width for the interpolated cells. The
height and width are the same because Discover can only use square grid cells.
To create a resampled grid three interpolation methods are available:
Bilinear - the value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the
weighted value of the four surrounding grid cells in the original grid.
Bi-cubic uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in
the original grid to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new grid. This
method requires more processing but is more accurate than bilinear
interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
Nearest Neighbour - simple interpolation whereby the new grid cell value
is taken from the closest grid cell in the original grid.
After a cell size and method have been chosen, click the Update button to force
the preview processing to proceed and review the result in the preview pane.
Note Check the Use NTv2 grid-shift method if available box when reprojecting grids
between NAD27 and NAD83 Canadian coordinate systems or AGD66 and
AGD84 Australian systems. If you are not familiar with this method see MapInfo
NTv2 Multiple Vector Reproject for more information about this option.
982 Encom Discover User Guide
Rotate
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Rotate
Large grids
Batch processing
Rotate a grid a specified angle. An angle that is positive causes the rotation to be
clockwise and a negative angle will rotate the grid anti-clockwise. Grids may be
rotated about the grid centre or the bottom-left hand corner. Three interpolation
methods are available for the rotated grid cell values:
Bilinear - the value of a grid cell in the new image is assigned the
weighted value of the four surrounding grid cells in the original grid.
Bi-cubic uses the weighted value of 16 surrounding grid cell values in
the original grid to interpolate the value a grid cell in the new grid. This
method requires more processing and is more accurate than bilinear
interpolation. Bicubic interpolation also produces a smoother grid.
Nearest Neighbour - simple interpolation whereby the new grid cell value
is taken from the closest grid cell in the original grid.
Shift
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Shift
Large grids
Batch processing
The Shift utility enables the origin of a grid to be moved horizontally and/or
vertically. Specify an Offset from the original grid X or Y origin or enter New grid
origin X and Y coordinates manually Once the shift parameters are entered click
the Update button to display the new grid origin in the After preview pane.
Slope
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Slope
Large grids
Batch processing
The Slope utility analyses the eight cells surrounding each grid cell and
determines the slope angle in degrees or the slope direction for each grid cell. The
slope angle or direction is then stored as the cell value for the output grid.
19 Working with Surfaces 983
The slope direction is measured in degrees from the grid Y axis. The slope angle
is the average slope of the surrounding grid cells at each grid cell. The slope
percentage is the change in grid elevation divided by the grid cell spacing
multiplied by 100. A percentage of 100 is equivalent to a slope angle of 45
degrees (the height change across the cell equals the cell width).
To convert the slope direction into a driectional aspecte.g. N, NE, and so forth
use the Classify tool to classify each cell by its slope direction.
Split
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Split
Large grids
Batch processing
The Split utility enables the individual bands of a multi-banded grid (including
RGB grids) to be output to single band grids.
Statistics
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Statistics
Large grids
Batch processing
This tool calculates a range of standard Statistics for either:
The entire grid.
Grid cells enclosed or intersected by any objects in a vector file, either
totally or partially overlying a grid. The vector file can be composed of a
mixture of object styles.
Grid cells within classified regions in another classified (i.e. integer) grid.
The grid statistics which are computed include:
Number of cells
Number of valid (non-null) cells
Number of null cells
Minimum cell value
984 Encom Discover User Guide
Maximum cell value
Mean (average) cell value
Range (minimum to maximum cell value)
Variance (average of the square of the difference between the cell value
and the mean)
Standard deviation (a measure of the spread of cell values equal to the
square root of the variance)
Sum of all grid cell values
Percentage of null cells
For large grids, only the preview tile area statistics will be displayed until the Save
As button is used to process the full grid and save the results.
Any statistical values which can be computed, for example due to no valid cells in
the region or negative values, will be written as -9999.
Integer Grid
An "integer grid" is a grid which has been classified into a set of discrete values,
i.e. by using the Classify tool. Typically these will be integers, but it may also be
decimal numbers and can contain null areas.
The regions used for statistics will be area of the integer/classified grid which have
the same value (including null value).
One selected output property (statistical value) can be created.
When Save As is clicked, or the batch process run, a grid will be created
containing cells attributed by the select property.
Vector File
If a unique identifier field exists for each vector object (e.g. sample number, rock
code, etc), this field can be set as the ID Field. The attributes in this field will be
used as an identifier in the output file for each vector object., The Objects to
process option allows the user to either create statistical output for all object types
in the vector file, or one style in particular (points, lines or polygons).
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, cell size, and should overlap.
19 Working with Surfaces 985
If an object lies partially or entirely outside the grid file extents, this portion of the
object will ignored for the statistics. For example, a polygon which is half area
outside the grid, will still be 0 or 0% null cells, provided there are no null cells in
the grid. Averages etc will be calculated based on the cell count, not the polygon
area.
Clicking the Save As button will create a new MapInfo vector file named
vectortablename_stats), with each input object attributed with its calculated
statistics (as well as the ID Field if specified). These statistics can also be
exported to either a Comma delimited (*.CSV) or Tab delimited (*.TXT) file using
the Export Statistics button.
The method used to determine if a grid cell is located within a polygon, is whether
the centre point of the cell is located within the polygon. Note that some partially
covered cells may not be included due to this. To increase the accuracy you can
use the Resample tool to decrease the cell size.
Surface Area
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Surface Area
Large grids
Batch processing
The Surface Area utility calculates the total 3D surface area and 2D planar area
for a grid. It also calculates the roughness of the surface, which is the surface area
divide by the planar area. A perfectly flat grid (i.e. where every grid cell has the
same value) will have a roughness of 1.
The values for the total grid are reported in the dialog in the same units the grid
is defined in. Individual grid cell surface area or roughness values are saved to
the output grid.
Usage examples of this tool include:
Comparing the relative roughness of different DEM/DTMs.
Calculating the actual topographic surface area of a catchment/drainage
basin, for 'run-off' studies.
Analysing the effects of different filters or gridding techniques on the
'topography' of the grids.
Note The input grid and vector file must have the same projection.
986 Encom Discover User Guide
Vectorize
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Vectorize
Large grids
Batch processing
The Vectorize utility will convert a single grid into a vector file of one or more
polygons, using one of the following modes:
Generate one rectangular region for each grid cell
Each grid cell of the input grid is converted into a square polygon in the
output MapInfo TAB or MID/MIF file, attributed with the grid cell value.
Each output region cell is assigned a grey-scale colour value based on the
input cell value using a simple linear stretch on the data range.
Generate a region for each discrete grid value
Each unique value in the grid is analysed for contiguous areas and a
polygon boundary drawn around these. This will produce a vector map
with polygons bounding areas of homogenous grid values, each attributed
with the unique region valuer. Each output region is assigned a grey-scale
colour value based on the input cell value using a simple linear stretch on
the data range.
Generate a region for each group of non-null values
This produces a separate polygon for each contiguous area of valid (non-
null) grid data. For instance, a series of polygons outlining coastlines
could be generated from a DEM by first using the Classify tool to set all
grid cells with sea level heights (and lower) as 'Nulls', then Vectorizing the
resulting grid using this mode.
Generate a region for the grid extents
Produces a polygon outlining the area covered by the grid cells. This
creates the same result as using the Outline tool, except only for a single
grid.
Note The preview for either the surface area or roughness will look almost identical
with histogram equalization applied, but the value of the grid cells will be
different.
19 Working with Surfaces 987
The option Make generated regions hollow will produce empty vector regions
without any fill colour or pattern.
It is recommended that large grids are resampled (see Resample) to a larger cell
size prior to using the Vectorize utility to reduce the number of vector polygons.
Viewshed
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Viewshed
Large grids
Batch processing
The Viewshed utility computes the view-shed from one or more locations of a
specified height above the grid to an observer at a specified height (terrain offset)
above the grid. The areas of the grid that lie within the line of sight are saved to a
new grid. This is a useful tool when considering, for instance, the spatial coverage
provided by a series of telecommunication or repeater towers, or the positioning
of fire observation platforms.
Note The input grid and vector file must have the same projection.
988 Encom Discover User Guide
Grid Utility Dialog showing Viewshed options
The Height or z-value is the height of the view-point origin above the specified
grid; this may represent a structure such as a transmission tower.
The Maximum distance is the radial extent around the viewshed origin or tower.
The line of sight is calculated for each grid cell within this radius.
The Viewshed origin is the location from which the line of sight is to be
calculated. The X and Y position of the Viewshed origin can be manually
entered or selected by clicking the arrow tool and selecting a location in the
Before or After preview windows. Alternatively, one or more viewshed origins
or tower positions can be specified by using a MapInfo TAB or MIF file containing
point locations. This TAB/MIF file may optionally include the following fields:
sweep azimuth, sweep angle, height, maximum distance and ID field. These
optional fields can be specified for the appropriate parameters (below) allowing
each viewshed origin to have differing values (e.g. different tower heights and
IDs) instead of a single Constant value.
19 Working with Surfaces 989
Sweep Angle and Azimuth controls are available, limiting the view from a
Viewshed Origin to the specified bearing range.
Setting a Terrain offset adds the specified value to each grid cell (e.g. the height
of a receiver or person) and is incorporated into the line of sight calculation.
The curvature of the earth can also be taken into account when calculating the
view-shed by specifying a Curvature Model. If this option is selected, the grid
distance unit needs to be selected to allow the scaling of the earths radius to the
correct units.
A Gaussian smoothing filter can be applied to the line-of-sight grid to eliminate
spurious lines caused by small irregularities in the input grid. The calculated line-
of-sight grid values may also be classified into one of two options:
2 (in/out)
Denotes whether a cell is visible or not from the viewshed origin.
3 (in/fringe/out)
Denotes whether a cell is visible, not visible or on the fringe when viewed
from the viewshed origin.
Two Output types are available:
Grid if multiple viewshed origins are used (via a .TAB or .MIF file), the
tool can Create a separate coverage grid for each viewshed origin.
The output grids will be suffixed with the ID Field (if assigned), otherwise
a 1, 2, 3, etc suffix will be used.
Polygons can only be selected if the Perform Gaussian Smoothing
option is enabled. This will produce a polygon outlining the extent of the
viewshed (or combined viewsheds). The polygon table incorporates a
Coverage field, indicating the percentage of the total input grid (null and
non-null cells) covered by the polygon. If multiple viewshed origins are
used (via a .TAB or .MIF file), the tool can Create a separate coverage
polygon for each viewshed origin. The output table will incorporate an
ID field, which will be populated with either the specified ID Field (if
assigned), or an integer value (1, 2, 3). The Compress polygons option
reduces the number of nodes in the output polygons by applying Tomek
compression (removing details which are smaller than the cell width). This
option is only available for the 2 (In/out) Value Classification.
Note For best results with this tool, it is recommended to enable the Histogram
Equalisation and Look-Up Table options.
990 Encom Discover User Guide
Volume
Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Volume
Large grids
Batch processing
The Volume utility computes the volume between two grids, or between one grid
and a constant Z value. Examples of use include calculating the volume between:
The water table and a mining surface.
A DEM (top surface) and the same DEM after open-cut mining (Overlay a
series of attributed polygons representing mining benches) (bottom
surface).
Upper and lower depth surfaces for a heavy mineral layer in mineral
sands
A DEM and the DEM modified with a new airstrip.
For large grids, only the preview tile area statistics will be displayed until the
Process button is used to process the full grid.
The volume between the two grids is calculated by subtracting each bottom grid
cell Z value from the corresponding top grid cell Z value and then multiplying by
the top grid cell width (X) and height (Y). Each individual grid cell volume is then
added together to compute the final volume. If a constant Z value is used, this is
subtracted from each cell Z value in the grid and used to calculate the volume.
The following volume calculation options are available:
Compute volume of main grid above secondary grid: only those cells
where the main grid lies above the secondary grid are used to calculate
the volume
Compute volume of secondary grid above main grid: only those cells
where the secondary grid lies above the main grid are used to calculate
the volume
Note Each input grid must have the same projection, cell size, and should overlap.
19 Working with Surfaces 991
Compute total volume between the two grids: all overlapping cells are
utilized to calculate the volume, regardless of which grid in is top. The
difference between cell values is treated as absolute i.e. all values are
positive.
Compute volume of main grid above constant Z value
Compute volume of main grid below constant Z value
The planar area calculated for the main grid selected is also displayed. This can
also be calculated using the Surface Area utility.
Dividing Grids into Tiles
Grid Tiler dialog
The Grid Tiler allows large grids to be sub-divided or tiled into a number of equally
sized smaller grids. This is useful when a grid file is either too large to open or
import into MapInfo, or too large to modify or interrogate with the Surfaces menu
tools.
Note To save a calculated volume grid, where each cell represents the volume
difference at the cell, use the Cut/Fill tool.
992 Encom Discover User Guide
To subdivide a large grid:
1. Open the Grid Tiler (the source grid does not have to be open within
MapInfo)
2. Using the File Open button at the top right of the dialog, select the source
grid file (if the grid is already open within MapInfo, select it from the top
pull-down list). A preview of this grid is displayed along with the grid size
information
3. In the Tile Layout section, set the number of tiles to divide the source grid
into in both the East-West and North-South orientations. See Tile Layout
for further information.
4. Ensure that the Create .TAB option is enabled in order to automatically
create a MapInfo .TAB file for output tiled grid. It is also recommended to
enable the Create .GHX option, to allow the precalculation of grid
statistics for more efficient grid handling (see Pre-computing Grid
Statistics for more information)
5. By default the output grid tiles will be created in the same directory as the
source grid: this can be modified in the Tile Naming section.
6. The output tiles will be named by adding a suffix to the input file name. A
number of suffix options exist see Tile Naming below for more
information.
7. Select the output Tile Format (formats available are ERMapper, BIL,
Encom or Surfer grid formats and press Create Tiles. The grid tiles will be
automatically registered in the same projection system as the input grid
file.
Tile Layout
In addition to setting the number of tiles to create along the X and Y axes, you can
instead define the size of the tiles by the distance (width or height) or the number
of cells (rows or columns). An Overlap can also be defined between adjacent tiles
as a percentage of the distance (width or height), or by a number of cells (rows or
columns). The overlap interval is applied to both sides of each tile (east and west
or north and south).
If the size of tiles does not divide evenly into the input grid dimensions, the edge
tiles will extend slightly past the source grid bounds. The Crop to grid option will
crop these tiles to the extents of the input grid. The Origin can be set to the Top
left or Bottom left so that these edge tiles will be located at the Bottom or Top row
of the grid. Cropped are always located at the right side of the grid.
19 Working with Surfaces 993
Tile Naming
The suffix applied to the output tiles can either be a Name-Column-Row or Name-
Row-Column format. For either format, the initial tile Origin (i.e. 01x_01y) must
be specified as either the bottom left or the top left corner tile.
The E-W or N-S components (i.e. Column and Row suffixes) of the output tile
suffix can each independently have either a numeric or character format.
Additionally each component can have individual prefixes and/or suffixes. The
preview of the entire Tile name suffix is shown in the example box.
Assigning Values from a Grid to Map Objects
Surfaces>Assign Values from Grid
The Assign Values from Grid menu option assigns grid cell values from the grid
to map objects that overlie them. Grid values can be assigned to both line and
region object types. This function could be used to assign elevations to sample
points or to drillhole locations from a digital elevation model or to assign mean
geochem values from a geochemistry grid to overlying geology polygons.
To assign grid values to point objects select a column in the table to store the
assigned values.
Assign grid values dialog
To assign grid values to overlying polygon or polyline objects, select the map
objects from the map window first. In the Assign Grid Values dialog select the
column or columns to store the grid values from the pull-down lists. Discover can
assign the mean, minimum or maximum grid cell value to each object.
As well as assigning the values to columns, the values can be reported to the
screen.
994 Encom Discover User Guide
Pre-computing Grid Statistics
Surfaces>Precompute Grid Statistics
The Precompute Grid Statistics dialog with multiple grid processing in progress
When a grid file is first opened by Discover, a summary statistics file (.GHX) is
automatically created. Summary statistics files allow Discover to handle larger
grids (1GB+) efficiently, and also significantly improve the speed of grid
visualisation (i.e. colour /sunshading modification via the Modify Grid Display
tool).
The automatically created .GHX file calculates the summary statistics for a
specified percentage of the grid file (as set under Discover>Surfaces menu>
Grid Handler Preferences). For smaller grids the entire grid is analysed by
default (i.e. 100%), whilst for larger grids a smaller default percentage is used to
allow rapid .GHX file creation. These default sampling percentages should allow
.GHX files to be created for most grids (regardless of size) in less then a couple
of minutes.
If more comprehensive statistics are required for larger grids, it is NOT
recommended to significantly increase the default sampling percentages in the
Grid Handler Preferences, as this will impact on the grid loading time into
MapInfo. GHX file creation time is proportional to the sampling percentage: multi-
gigabyte sized grids may take tens of minutes to a few hours when sampled at
100%.
19 Working with Surfaces 995
Instead, use the Precompute Grid Statistics tool to precalculate detailed GHX
files for one or more large grids prior to opening in MapInfo (e.g. perhaps
overnight)
To calculate statistics for one or more grid files:
1. The Input for the Precompute Grid Statistics tool can be either a single
grid file or a directory path (+/-any subfolders). Use the browse button (top
right of dialog) to select a single grid file. If all files in a directory are to be
sampled, enable the All in Directory option (plus the Subdirectories
option if required), then use the browse button to select the target
directory.
2. If specifying a directory to sample, a number of Criteria can be set. These
include limiting the target grids to a particular grid format, a minimum file
size (MB or column/row count) or age.
3. Sampling sets the proportion of the grid dataset for which summary
statistics will be calculated: the calculation time is proportional to the
percentage set. The sampling is done on a row-by-row basis, for example
50% will sample every second row in the grid file and calculate statistics
based on this. Use Defaults will load the default sampling settings from
the Grid Handler Preferences. All 100% will set complete (100%)
sampling regardless of the grid size. A linear interpolation of the sampling
value is used for grids in each size category. For example a grid with
7500 rows will have a sampling percentage half way between the Medium
and Large sampling percentages
4. When ready, press the Compute Statistics button. The Progress table
will display for each grid being sampled relevant information whilst the
statistics processing is in progress.
5. Once the .GHX file/s have been created, the grid file/s can be opened into
MapInfo/Discover rapidly - the automatic .GHX creation process has been
bypassed.
Note Files will only be added to the progress list once processing has started on the
file.
996 Encom Discover User Guide
Grid Handler Preferences
Surfaces>Grid Handler Preferences
Grid Handler Preferences dialog for reading grid files
The Grid Handler Preferences dialog provides the following:
1. Initial visualisation options when a grid is first loaded into MapInfo/
Discover
2. Sampling proportions used to calculate the summary statistics file (.GHX)
when a grid is first loaded into MapInfo/Discover
3. Toggles for the various Grid Handlers.
4. Default output grid format used by the tools in the Surfaces menu.
19 Working with Surfaces 997
Initial Display
This section controls the initial visualisation of a loaded grid:
Colour defines what colour table (LUT) is applied: select from any
available colour table in the Discover LUT directory
The Stretch is the colour method applied, either histogram or linear.
The Sun Angle and Highlights enables Sun shading and Sun
highlighting.
Preload Zoom will load the higher resolution view for one pyramid level of
the current grid view. This makes zooming in and out quicker but
increases memory usage.
Statistics Sampling
When a grid file is first opened by Discover, statistics sampling is performed to
automatically create a Summary Statistics file (.GHX). Summary statistics files
allow Discover to handle larger grids (1GB+) efficiently, and also significantly
improve the speed of grid visualisation (i.e. colour /sunshading modification via
the Modify Grid Display tool).
Statistics Sampling sets the level of statistics sampling performed based on the
grid size (as defined by the number of rows in the grid). The sampling is done on
a row-by-row basis, for example 50% will sample every second row in the grid file
and calculate statistics based on this. A linear interpolation of the sampling value
is used for grids in each size category. For example a 7500 row grid will have a
sampling percentage half way between the Medium and Large sampling
percentages.
If more comprehensive statistics are required for larger grids, it is NOT
recommended to significantly increase the default sampling percentages in the
Statistics Sampling section, as this will impact on the grid loading time into
MapInfo. To precalculate more accurate .GHX files for larger grid files, utilise the
Precompute Grid Statistics tool.
Default Output Grid Format
This option sets the default grid format to write when using tools in the Surfaces
menu
998 Encom Discover User Guide
Vertical Mapper Colour Support
Enabling the Allow Colour Table Writing to Grid option will force any colour
changes made in the Modify Grid Display dialog to be written directly back to a
Vertical Mapper .GRD file.
Grid Handlers
A grid file can be read using either a:
Grid handler (.GH* file) - allows query and modification of a grid's colour
scheme and statistics to be performed on the grid.
Raster Handler (.RH* file) - displays data as a static layer. Grid data
cannot be queried or modified dynamically. However data rendering is
slightly faster than when using Grid Handler.
Encom-developed handler files are all named with a prefix 'Encom'. To enable or
disable the use of a particular handler file simply tick/un-tick the Use box.
Grid Drivers
Displays debugging information about the current Encom installation.
Note Specific handlers should only be disabled if you experience problems loading or
visualising particular grid formats. We recommend contacting technical support
before doing so.
Note The Encom Grid handlers use a pyramid method to display large grids at a lower
resolution for different zoom levels. The initial single low resolution view of the
grid has a fixed size. When you zoom in, the grid is divided into 4 regions which
are loaded at twice the resolution. This process is repeated until the full
resolution of the grid is displayed by many 'tiles'. A limited number of 'tiles' will
be cached in memory.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 999
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis
The generation of stream network and watersheds from a topographic grid
surfaces (e.g. DEM or DTM) is required in many disciplines including mineral
exploration, environmental monitoring, hydrology and engineering. The Extract
Drainage Features tool in the Discover Surfaces>Hydrology menu can be used
to assist with the planning of new stream sediment sampling programs, or
determine if previous conducted surveys have satisfactorily sampled an area.
They can also be used to normalize the analytical results of a survey to stream
basin area, slope and aspect to determine likely source location for dispersion. In
addition these tools can be used to identify erosion prone areas, wetness indices,
potential fuel accumulation for managing forest fire risk and many other terrain
based analysis.
Hydrology Workflow
Fill Pits and Depressions
Flow Direction and Thresholding
Stream Network and Watersheds
Process Custom Outlets
Hydrology Workflow
The Hydrology tool workflow follows several steps starting from a raw topographic
grid surface. Each step can be run independently or as part of a continuous
process.
This workflow can result in the following attributed TAB vector files:
Stream outlets and stream junctions points.
Stream network polylines attributed with their hierarchical stream order,
stream segment length and junction nodes.
Watershed/catchment polygon boundaries for each stream segment or
each stream outlet.
Custom Watershed/catchment polygon boundaries for user-specified
outlet locations
In addition to outputing vector TAB files, alternatively output can be generated in
grid format, including -
1000 Encom Discover User Guide
Stream networks with value corresponding to their hierarchy.
Watershed/catchments attributed by their ID number.
Distance to the nearest stream.
The Extract Drainage Features tool will automatically extract drainage features
from a DEM grid and output these as vector files. Streams and their
corresponding watersheds can be delineated from a DEM based on a minimum
catchment area threshold and watersheds can be created for each outlet or
stream segment in the network. Catchment areas can also be determined for
custom outlet locations, for example river bed stream samples.
The Hydrology tool is divided into four major steps, which are:
1. Fill Pits and Depressions: Use an existing stream network vector file to
burn-in streams (optional). Remove pits and depressions to ensure
hydraulic connectivity within the watershed.
2. Flow Direction and Thresholding: Compute flow direction (slope aspect)
and slope (gradient) grids.Generate the contributing area (flow
accumulation) grid. Generate a threshold flow grid, based on a defined
minimum catchment area.
3. Stream Network and Watersheds: Automatically generate stream network
vectors, stream junctions and watersheds for each stream outlet and/or
segment. Generate a Distance to the nearest stream grid (optional).
4. Process Custom Outlets: Use Custom outlet points (steam samples) to
generate per-outlet catchments (watersheds) including point attributes.
Optionally generate stream networks, junctions and outlets for the custom
outlet points.
Each step produces a number of processed grids or vectors, which are used as
input to the next step. You can re-run each step, without needing to re-run steps
prior to this.
Within each step's options, each output file is marked with Done, Run and Open
check boxes. Each of these are:
Note A watershed is the upslope area contributing flow to a given location. Such an
area is also variously referred to as a basin, catchment, sub-watershed, or
contributing area. A sub-watershed is simply part of a hierarchy, implying that a
given watershed is part of a larger watershed.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1001
Done indicates the file is already present, and is not required to be re-run
(If parameters have changed in previous steps, you will need to re-run to
update the results)
Run will process the output when the Process button is clicked.
Open will automatically open the output file in MapInfo Professional once
it is completed.
By default, all required steps are selected to Run, but only the Drainage output
vectors will be automatically opened when processing is complete.
At any time the output results can be previewed in the 2000 x 2000 cell preview
window. This can be refreshed at any time by selecting the Update button.
Once the Process button is selected, the status will be displayed in the execution
log.
To pre-process a DEM for hydrological analysis:
1. On the Surfaces menu, select Hydrology>Extract Drainage Features.
2. In the Select DEM box, select the source topography grid from the list.
3. Select the correct Z Units for the DEM (XY units are automatically
determined form the DEM's Projection).
4. Select the Pit Fill Options button.
5. For the _pitfill grid, select the Run and Open check boxes.
6. (Optional) If you have any existing stream vectors, select the Stream.
7. .Select the Centring check box file from the Open button. Enter the
desired Buffer width and Drop (elevation offset or burn depth) values.
8. (Optional) The elevation range to be pit filled can be limited selecting the
Exclude pits if check box. For example, to exclude areas below sea level
in a coastal DEM, set Ignore Elevations <to 0. By default these are set to
the minimum and maximum values for the DEM.
9. (Optional) To preserve any lakes or dams in the DEM, select the Exclude
pits if check box, and enter a Pit depth and/or Pit Area value. This
defines the minimum depth or area of a pit to preserve as a lake or dam.
Then also select Insert NULL cell at the bottom of any unfilled pits. This
will preserve the pits as a drainage point for the DEM.
1002 Encom Discover User Guide
10. (Optional) If any grid regions are to be excluded from the pit-filling process
(such as lakes, dams, etc), tick the Polygon Exclusion Mask box. Select
the polygon table via the Open button. This will clip the areas within the
polygon(s) from the input grid file before processing starts.
11. Click OK to close the Pit Fill Options dialog.
12. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and
progress bars. The pre-processed, pit-filled grid, including stream
burning, will be opened in MapInfo.
To perform flow accumulation and thresholding:
1. On the Surfaces menu, select Hydrology>Extract Drainage Features.
2. In the Select DEM box, select the topographic grid from the list.
3. Select the Flow Options button.
4. Select the Run and Open check boxes for the Flow Direction, Slope
(drop), Accumulate, and Threshold grids.
5. Enter the appropriate Minimum Catchment Area. A smaller minimum
area will result in more detailed streams and smaller watersheds; however
processing time will be increased.
6. (Optional) For comparison against more accurate drainage directions,
select the DInfinity Direction and Slope Run box. The output units for
these grids can also be selected.
7. Click OK to close the Flow Options dialog.
8. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and
progress bars. The Flow grids will be opened in MapInfo.
To generate streams and watersheds (catchments):
1. On the Surfaces menu, select Hydrology>Extract Drainage Features.
2. In the Select DEM box, select the topographic grid from the list.
Note It is important that the minimum catchment area is appropriately defined for your
DEM and analysis needs. Specifying smaller values will result in more stream
segments and significantly longer processing times.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1003
3. Select the Stream Options button.
4. Select the Run and Open check boxes for the Stream, J unction, Outlets
and Watershed vector files.
5. Select the Strahler or Shreve classification (ordering) method
6. Select to generate watersheds for each stream segment (stream
junctions), or for each outlet (where a stream exits the DEM).
7. Select to Remove Edge Contamination. This will remove watersheds
clipped/truncated by the edge of the DEM.
8. Select to Smooth Watershed perimeter for more visually appealing
results.
9. (Optional) Select Run and Open for the distance to stream grid, and also
the units for the distance measurement.
10. (Optional) Select to output the watershed and stream network as a grid file
(only if watershed perimeter is set to Square).
11. Click OK to close the Stream Options dialog.
12. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and
progress bars. The Streams and Watersheds will be opened in MapInfo.
To generate Watersheds (catchments) for Custom Outlets (samples):
1. On the Surfaces menu, select Hydrology>Extract Drainage Features.
2. In the Select DEM box, select the topographic grid from the list.
3. Select the Construct Drainage for custom outlets option.
4. Select the Custom Outlets open button and select the file containing
sample/outlet points.
5. Select the Snap to D8 Streams option, and specify the snap distance or
buffer (in grid cells). This is the distance an outlet point can be moved
during processing to coincide with a stream network. Any outlet points that
do not coincide with a stream polyline after snapping has been applied will
be ignored during the catchment generation process.
Note Only point objects from the custom outlets file are used.
1004 Encom Discover User Guide
6. Selecy Copy attribute fields to output to include any attributes for the
Custom outlets in the output Custom Watersheds. This is useful to identify
the sample number and any sample measurements for each catchment
(watershed) area.
7. Select the Strahler or Shreve classification (ordering) method
8. Select to generate Watersheds for each stream segment (stream
junctions), or for each outlet (where a stream exits the DEM).
9. Select to Remove Edge Contamination. This will remove watersheds
clipped/truncated by the edge of the DEM.
10. Select to Smooth Watershed perimeter for more visually appealing
results.
11. Click Process. Progress will be displayed in the Execution Log and
progress bars. The Custom Watersheds will be opened in MapInfo.
The processing steps involved (some steps have been omitted for clarity) are
shown graphically below:
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1005
1. Source digital elevation model (DEM) 2. Calculation of a flow direction grid surface
3. Generation of a Flow Accumulation grid surface 4. Applying a threshold contributing area value to
generate a Flow Threshold grid surface
5. Vectorisation of steam networks, with hierachial
stream order attributes
6. Delineation of watershed boundaries as polygonal
regions
1006 Encom Discover User Guide
Fill Pits and Depressions
Stream Centering (Burn-in)
Pit Fill
Stream Centering (Burn-in)
Stream centering is a pre-process step to "burn-in" an existing stream network
vector file to the raw topographic surface. The algorithm will overlay the stream
network polylines onto the raw DEM. In addition it also applies a buffer width
around polylines.
Grid Cells that intersect a stream polyline exactly will be offset by the subtracting
Smooth Drop and also subtracting the Sharp Drop value.
Grid cells that fall within the buffer are offset by a linear interpolation across the
Smooth Drop range. For example:
DEM Grid cells are 25 m wide
Buffer Width is 100 m
Smooth Drop is set to 10 m
Sharp Drop is 5 m
The cell which a polyline stream intersects will be offset by (- 10m - 5m).
For a 100 m buffer, either side of this intersecting cell a total of 4 cells either side
will fall within the buffer.
The first cell either side of the centre cell will be offset by (- (1/4) *10m). The
second cell either side is then offset by (- (2/4) * 10m), and so forth,
Note Only polyline vectors are used. Points, polygons and lines are omitted from the
burn-in process.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1007
Pit Fill
Pits or depressions areas in a topographic grid surface that are completely
surrounded by higher terrain and can be a relatively common artefact of the
interpolation methods used to create them. Pits are rare in nature, but do occur
(e.g. lakes or dams), so a pit filling utility must have the capability of filling
unnatural pits or depressions as well as leaving natural ones. Unnatural pits or
depressions must be removed from the topographic grid surface prior to the
creation of drainage networks because they are dead ends to flow and result in a
disconnected drainage network.
A 2D representation of the pit fill routine. The pit is filled to the level of the lowest adjacent
cell.
The pit fill process involves 'flooding', or filling up, depressions in the topographic
grid surface by detecting cells, or groups of cells, that are lower than all
surrounding cells. These cells are then raised to the elevation of the lowest
surrounding cell (known as the 'pour point').
Natural Pits and Depressions
True pits and depressions, such as lakes and dams, can be processed by
inserting a NULL value cell in the centre of them, which acts as an outlet point for
the grid (typically null cells and outlets will only occur on the edge of the grid).
1008 Encom Discover User Guide
A typical topographic grid surface. The grid contains numerous pits (as artefacts of the grid
surface interpolation) which would disrupt the drainage network if not filled. Several pits are
nested inside each other.
The topographic grid surface after pit fill. All the pits are now filled in and drainage can now
flow smoothly through the network..
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1009
Flow Direction and Thresholding
Flow Direction and Slope (D8)
Flow Accumulation
Define Flow Threshold
Flow Direction and Slope (DInfinity)
Flow Direction and Slope (D8)
This step takes a topographic grid surface as input and outputs a new grid which
represents the flow direction from each cell to one of its 8 neighbours (either
adjacent or diagonally). The most common and simplest methodology for
representing the flow direction is to divide each cell into eight segments and
compute the vector of maximum slope to determine the direction of flow into one
of the eight adjacent cells. This approach is generally referred to as the single flow
direction or the 8-direction (D8) flow model. The direction of flow is determined by
finding the direction of steepest slope from each cell. This is calculated as the
change in height value divided by the distance.
An encoding scheme used to represent the flow directions in the output grid. Each cell is
attributed with a code representing the adjacent cell that is in the direction of steepest
slope.
1010 Encom Discover User Guide
A pit filled topographic grid surface prior to flow direction processing.
The flow direction grid created from the topographic grid surface. The value in each cell
represents an adjacent cell in the direction of maximum slope.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1011
There are several limitations to the D8 model, namely that it produces coarse
drainage networks because of the discretization of flow directions at each cell into
only one of eight possible directions. The method is also unable to accurately
represent divergent flows (e.g. on a hill slope with convex curvature) due to the
assumption that each cell can drain to only a single neighbour. These simplifying
assumptions make the process more efficient, so D8 is still the most common
methodology used in GIS applications.
Flow Accumulation
This step calculates the accumulated flow (upslope or contributing area) as the
accumulated weight of all cells flowing into each downslope cell in the output grid.
The accumulated flow area of each cell is taken as its own area (one) plus the
area of upslope neighbours that have some fraction of their flow draining into it.
This is usually calculated recursively starting at each outlet point. The flow from
each cell either drains entirely to one neighbour (if the flow angle falls along a
cardinal or diagonal direction) or proportionally between two cells, according to
how close the flow direction angle is to the direct angle to the upslope cells.
The flow accumulation grid. The value in each cell represents the number of cells that flow
into it.
1012 Encom Discover User Guide
Define Flow Threshold
Stream channels are determined from the flow accumulation grid as cells which
have a large number of upslope cells. Because there can be many cells which
have upstream cells it is standard practice to apply a threshold value to the flow
accumulation grid tracing the stream network to eliminate small or unwanted
streams. Determining an appropriate threshold value for extracting stream
channels is highly dependent on terrain morphology and factors such as
contributing area climate, slope, soil characteristics etc.
The level of detail for which streams are delineated is controlled by the minimum
catchment area threshold. Specify a value which represents the minimum
contributing area you require for your stream network. If you choose to create one
catchment per outlet then no catchment will be smaller than this value. If sub-
catchments are being generated for each stream segment in the network then the
minimum catchment area will only be guaranteed for the source catchments.
Some sub-catchments may be smaller than the threshold in areas where they
enclose downstream junctions.
Flow Direction and Slope (DInfinity)
The DInfinity method can optionally be used to generate a Flow Direction and
Flow slope grid.
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1013
The DInfinity can produced a more accurate Direction and Slope grid, as it
produces a continuous slope and also supports cells out flowing into 2 neighbour
cells.
Stream Network and Watersheds
Stream Classification
Watershed Processing
Distance to Stream
Stream Classification
Stream classification (ordering) is a method of assigning a numeric order to links
in a stream network. This order is a method for identifying and classifying types
of streams based on their number of tributaries. The most common systems used
to determine ordering are the methods proposed by Strahler and Shreve.
Strahler method
Note Currently the DInfinity Flow grids cannot be used to calculate an accumulation or
flow threshold grids. Calculating DInfinity grids will not improve the stream or
watershed vector results from the Hydrology tool.
1014 Encom Discover User Guide
Shrieve method
In both methods, the most upstream stream segments, or exterior links, are
always assigned an order of one. In the Strahler method, stream order increases
when streams of the same order intersect. Therefore, the intersection of two first-
order links will create a second-order link, and the intersection of two second-
order links will create a third-order link. The intersection of two links of different
orders, however, will not result in an increase in order. For example, the
intersection of a first-order and second-order link will not create a third- order link,
but will retain the order of the highest ordered link. The Strahler method is the
most common stream ordering method in use. However, because this method
only increases in order at intersections of the same order, it does not account for
all links and can be sensitive to the addition or removal of links.
The Shreve method accounts for all links in the network. As with the Strahler
method, all exterior links are assigned an order of one. For all interior links in the
Shreve method, however, the orders are additive. For example, the intersection
of two first-order links creates a second-order link, the intersection of a first-order
and second-order link creates a third-order link, and the intersection of a second-
order and third-order link creates a fifth-order link.
Because the orders are additive, the numbers from the Shreve method are
sometimes referred to as magnitudes instead of orders. The magnitude of a link
in the Shreve method is the number of upstream links.
Watershed Processing
The default automatic stream outlets are placed in two locations, either:
20 Hydrological Surface Analysis 1015
Watershed per Stream Outletsimply where a stream exits the edge of
the DEM.
Watershed per Stream Segmentthe outlets are placed at each stream
junction, as well as where the stream exits the DEM.
The watershed polygons are defined for each outlet, and it also exceeds the
minimum catchment area defined for the Flow Threshold grid (see Define Flow
Threshold).
Watersheds (Catchments) which are truncated or clipped by the edge of the DEM
grid can be removed by selecting the Edge Contamination Remove option.
The edges of the Watersheds can be smoothed by selecting the Watershed
Perimeter Smooth option.
Distance to Stream
The Distance to Stream option will generate a grid attributed by the flow distance
to the nearest stream. This distance is based on the results of the Flow Direction
(D8) and the Flow Threshold grids. This can be useful or analysing rain run-off
area/distance, and time.
Process Custom Outlets
Customized catchments can be generated based on Catchment Outlet points
provided by the user. The input locations for catchment outlets can be a river
mouth, dam or lake, or any sample points that may or may not occur near
streams.
There are four types of watersheds that can be generated from custom outlets:
Watershed per Outlet simply generate one complete watershed for
each custom outlet.
Nested watershed the watershed are identical to those as Watershed
per outlet, however any ovelrapping watersheds are "clipped" to remove
the overlap. This is useful to separate catchments for when there is
multiple stream samples along the same stream.
Note To generate custom watersheds, you need to firstly generate automatic
watersheds for the entire DEM. This will define the resolution of the streams and
watersheds generated for your custom outlets.
1016 Encom Discover User Guide
Watershed per Stream Segment the watersheds are generated for
each outlet, and then sub-watersheds generated for any stream segments
within them.
Anywhere The watersheds generated represent to "run-off" area for
each point, which may or may not coincide on a existing stream. This is
useful for points taken on a alluvial plain or a hill slope, that you wish to
know the potential flow, for example proposed drainage channels.
In both cases, the same Watershed processing options are available as for
automatic Watershed Processing.
Note Only the Anywhere mode will allow non-stream based samples. For all other
modes the custom outlet points must occur close to an actual stream, as
automatically calcualted by the tool.
21 Working with Structural Data 1017
21 Working with Structural Data
About Structural Data
Displaying Structural Data as Orientated Symbols
Digitizing Structural Data
Dip and Plunge Angles
Discover Structure Codes
About Structural Data
Structural data, such as bedding, lineations, or synclines, can be displayed as
oriented structural symbols from a symbol library. Discover offers two different
ways to handle structural data.
Table Data
Structural measurements can be read from columns in a native MapInfo
table. This method provides a simple method for creating as many
symbols as necessary in the one pass.
Digitized Data
Structural measurements can be digitized into a map window one at a
time. This is useful when there are measurements on a map that have not
been transcribed to a file. In this case, the measurement location is taken
from the digitized point (using a digitizing table or from the screen) and a
dialog box is displayed requesting input for structural data for that location.
Structural Symbol Fonts
The structure symbols are stored in a TrueType font that is available from the
MapInfo Symbol Styles libraries along with the other TrueType symbol fonts that
ship with MapInfo and Discover. If the symbol font is unavailable Discover will plot
normal text instead of the structure symbols. The True Type fonts are installed
during the Discover installation procedure. If the fonts are unavailable in MapInfo,
check the Windows Control Panel>Fonts directory to see if the fonts are
installed.
For more information about structural symbol fonts, see Styles and Symbol Fonts
1018 Encom Discover User Guide
Displaying Structural Data as Orientated Symbols
Discover>Structure Symbols
The Discover>Structure Symbols utility is designed to display structural data as
oriented structural symbols from a symbol library. The structural measurement
data can be read in from a data file or input directly with the digitizer/mouse and
keyboard.
Select Structure Symbols from the Discover menu. The Structural Data
Manager Dialog Box is displayed, from which you can select the input and output
options.
Structural Data Mapper Dialog Box
Select the required Data Input by option. Choose Process from Table to use an
existing table containing structural information in an appropriate format. Choose
Digitize into Mapper to add structural measurements to an existing table.
Choose Digitize into New Table to automatically create a new table with the
appropriate structural data columns. If you wish to process data from a read-only
Table (e.g Access database) or Mapper layer, select the option Make a native
copy of the selected table.
21 Working with Structural Data 1019
The structural data table must have numeric columns for the following data:
Easting and Northing of measurement location
Dip Direction or Strike of measurement
Dip or Plunge
Discover Structure Code
Example of structural information in a browser
The name and position of the columns in the table are not important.
When digitizing data into a new table, Discover can create a table with the
appropriate columns defined. If there is a map window open the new table is
added to this window and automatically assigned the current map window
coordinate system. If there are no map windows open, nominate the coordinate
system to use for the new table from the Choose Projection dialog.
The input data may also include other useful information such as sample
numbers, site ID, lithology etc. This information is not used by Discover in the
creation of the structural data points.
Select the table to use from the Structural Data Table list. Use Open a table to
open an existing table or to create a new table.
After you have made your selections, click OK to display the Structural Data
Mapper Dialog Box, from which you can select the symbol font, choose how the
azimuth value is used, select columns, and other options.
1020 Encom Discover User Guide
Structural Data Options
Structural Data Mapper Dialog Box
Discover provides three structural symbol font files for Australian, Canadian and
US structural symbols. These are available as symbol libraries from the
Structural Mapping Type pull-down list:
Australian Structural Symbols (modified by AGSO)
Canadian Structural Symbols (modified by the GSC)
USA Structural Symbols (modified by USGS)
21 Working with Structural Data 1021
The MapInfo>Options>Symbol Style also provides access to these symbol
libraries referred to as ET_Structural, ET_Structural_Canada and
ET_Structural_USA respectively. For a full list of the Australian, US and Canadian
symbol sets, together with Discover structural codes and keyboard codes, see
Styles and Symbol Fonts.
Choose the appropriate symbol library to use and if this library is different to the
library used previously, Discover will ask for confirmation that this is the correct
symbol style library to use.
Specify Azimuth Method
Choose how the Azimuth data is to be specified:
Specify azimuth as Dip Direction use this option if the structural data
has been collected using Dip and Dip Direction measurements in the field
Specify azimuth as Strike using right hand rule - use this option if the
structural data has been collected using Dip and Strike measurements. All
strikes are converted to dip directions by adding 90.
Many structural codes measure the direction of plunge rather than a strike or dip
direction (for example lineations and fold axes). For these codes the azimuth
information is always used as plunge direction regardless of whether strike or dip
direction has been selected.
Select Data Columns
Use the pull-down list next to each structure column to nominate which columns
in the structural data table contain the required data. If digitizing new structural
data points, their attributes will be added to these columns.
Symbol and Label Style
Discover provides control over how the structure symbols will be displayed.
Select from the normal symbol formatting options including symbol size, colour
and style (such as bolding). As the structural symbols are TrueType font symbols
the normal text formatting control over the appearance is available. The symbols
are scale invariant so that they remain the same size on the screen (or paper)
regardless of the map scale.
1022 Encom Discover User Guide
The dip/plunge text can be displayed either as MapInfo object labels or as text
objects stored in the cosmetic layer. The Dip/Plunge as MapInfo labels option
uses the normal MapInfo method to produce scale invariant labels. When object
labels are created in this way, they must be saved with a workspace if the labels
are to be used at a later date. The Dip/Plunge as text in cosmetic layer option
enables the text size to be relative to a specified output scale. Therefore, the text
must be resized if the data is to be viewed at a different output scale. The
cosmetic text objects can be saved to a new table using the Map>Save Cosmetic
Objects menu option.
In many instances horizontal (0) and vertical (90) structural measurements are
denoted by different structural symbols, however in some cases the same
structural symbol is used. Check the Show labels at 0 and 90 to display the dip
label for these orientations.
Click the OK button to create the structure symbols. If the Process from Table
option was selected a message window will be displayed detailing how much
processing has been completed. The structural data points are then displayed in
a map window.
Digitizing Structural Data
DigStruct>Plot Symbol
If one of the digitizing options was selected from the Structural Data Mapper
Dialog Box, the DigStruct menu is added to the MapInfo menu bar .
The output table should be in the front map window and be editable. The
structural measurement can be digitized as either a point at the required location
(using the MapInfo Point/Symbol drawing tool) or as a line (using the MapInfo
Line tool).
As a point or line is digitized, the data entry dialog is displayed. If a line is digitized
the Dip Direction, Plunge or Strike azimuth of that line is automatically displayed
in the appropriate box. Only the Structure Type and the Dip need to be entered.
Note When digitizing a line, Discover uses the start point on the line as the location for
the structural symbol on the map.
21 Working with Structural Data 1023
Entering Structural Data for a new Point
The Symbol/Label Style is set to the previously selected options in the Structural
Data Dialog Box. These settings can be modified for individual structural
measurements. The easting and northing of the digitized point, dip direction/
strike/plunge, dip angle and structure code are inserted into as attributes into the
table when the structural symbol is created.
Dip and Plunge Angles
A dip or plunge value may be entered for most of the structural types that Discover
supports. Selected structural types such as wrench faults, trend lines,
monoclines, etc. cannot have a dip value.
Discover expects a value to be entered for dip between 0 and 90. However, there
are instances where a dip has not been measured for a variety of reasons. As dip
values are stored in numeric columns blank dip measurements are stored as
zero, indicating a horizontal structure.
When digitizing structure measurements, leave the dip entry blank to indicate no
dip measurement was taken. Discover will store a value of 99 in the dip column
for blank entries. If processing structural measurements from a table, ensure that
values of 99 have been inserted into blank entry cells in the correct fields. If
Discover finds a null dip value, no dip label is displayed.
1024 Encom Discover User Guide
Discover Structure Codes
Structure symbols are based on those described in the Australian Geological
Survey Organisation (AGSO) mapping style guide with the addition of extra
symbols such as schistosity, L1-L3 lineations and general trend lines. A full table
of symbols for the Australian, US and Canadian symbol sets, together with
Discover structural codes and keyboard codes, is given in Styles and Symbol
Fonts. These codes are provided in both a numerical and alphabetical order.
Note For a number of structure types, such as bedding or cleavage, Discover uses
different symbols to indicate horizontal and vertical dip.
Discover Code Description
1 Bedding
2 Overturned bedding
3 Bedding Facing
4-6 Cleavage s1 - s3
7 Not currently used
8 Lineation (general)
9-11 Lineation L1 - L3
12 Bedding-Cleavage Intersection
13 Crenulation
14 Mineral Alignment
15 Banding/Platy Alignment
16 J oint
17 Foliation
18-20 Anticline f1-f3
21-22 Anticlines (Overturned and Recumbent)
23-25 Syncline f1-f3
21 Working with Structural Data 1025
26-27 Synclines (Overturned and Recumbent)
28-30 Normal Faults
31 Thrust Fault
32-33 Shear Zones
34 Fault Zone breccia
35 Trend Line
36 Parallel lines
37-38 Veins (open and closed)
39-41 Oriented drill collars
42 Fault gouge
43-44 Wrench Faults
45 Columnar J oint
46 Bedding (facing unknown)
47-48 Undulating/Deformed bedding
49-51 Foliation d1-d3
52-54 Bedding/Cleavage parallel s1-s3
55-56 Plunge of Bedding/Cleavage (s1-s2) intersection
57 Plunge of Bedding/Vein intersection
58 Monocline
59-60 Minor Anticline
61-62 Minor Syncline
63-64 Minor Fold
65 Kink Fold
66-67 Asymmetric Fold vergence
Discover Code Description (Continued)
1026 Encom Discover User Guide
Dialog Help
Structural Data Manager Dialog Box
Structural Data Mapper Dialog Box
Structural Data Dialog Box
Structural Data Manager Dialog Box
Data input by
Process from table: Read structural data from columns in a native
MapInfo table.
Digitize into mapper: Digitize one symbol at a time into an existing table
in the active map window using either a digitizing tablet or on-screen with
the cursor and type data values from the keyboard. Adds the DigStruct
menu, from which you can start digitizing points.
68-69 Fold vergence
70-71 Recumbent Fold Vergence
72-74 Minor Fold Vergence
75 Boudin plunge
76 Chert contortions plunge
77 Mylonitic foliation
78 Eutaxitic foliation
79-80 Glacial Striae
81 Dipping Shear Zone
Discover Code Description (Continued)
21 Working with Structural Data 1027
Digitize into new table: Digitize one symbol at a time into a new table in
the active map window using either a digitizing tablet or on-screen with the
cursor and type data values from the keyboard. A structural data table with
the required columns is automatically created and added to the active
map window using the current coordinate system. If there are no open
map windows, you will be asked to select a coordinate system for the new
table. Adds the DigStruct menu, from which you can start digitizing
points.
Structural data table
Select the structural data table you want to add the new points/symbols to, or
select <Open a new table>to add another table to the list and the map window.
Make a native copy of the selected table
Select the check box if you are reading data from a read-only table, such as an
Access database or mapper layer. The data will be copied into a MapInfo table.
See also
...Displaying Structural Data as Orientated Symbols
...About Structural Data
Structural Data Mapper Dialog Box
Select the symbol font, choose how the azimuth value is used, select structural
data columns, and other options.
Structural mapping type
(Symbol font)
Select a symbol library:
Australian Structural Symbols (modified by AGSO)
Canadian Structural Symbols (modified by the GSC)
USA Structural Symbols (modified by USGS)
These correspond to the ET_Structural, ET_Structural_Canada and
ET_Structural_USA fonts respectively, which can be accessed from
MapInfo>Options>Symbol Style. These structural symbol fonts are installed
with Discover and are available as TrueType symbol fonts from the MapInfo
symbol styles library. For more information about structural symbol fonts, see
Structural Symbol Font.
1028 Encom Discover User Guide
Apply azimuth as
Dip direction: Select if structural data has been collected using dip and
dip direction measurements in the field.
Strike using the right-hand rule: Select if structural data has been
collected using dip and strike measurements. All strikes are converted to
dip directions by adding 90.
Structural codes that measure the direction of plunge rather than a strike or dip
direction (for example lineations and fold axes) use the azimuth as plunge
direction regardless of which of these options has been selected.
Columns for (table)
Easting
Click to select the column containing the easting coordinate.
Northing
Click to select the column containing the northing coordinate.
Dip direction/Strike
Click to select the column containing the dip direction or strike (depends on the
azimuth option selection).
Dip angle
Click to select the column containing the dip.
Structure code
Click to select the column containing the structure code.
Symbol and label style
Structural symbols are TrueType font symbols, which can be formatted like
normal text.
Symbol size
Select the symbol size in pts. The symbol size is fixed and independent of the
map scale.
21 Working with Structural Data 1029
(Symbol style)
Click to display the MapInfo Symbol Style dialog box, from which you can change
the symbol style.
Text layer
Dont display dip/plunge: Select to display symbols without dip/plunge
labels.
Show dip/plunge as MapInfo labels: Select to display dip/plunge labels
as MapInfo object labels, which are independent of the map scale. These
labels must be saved in a workspace if you wish to display in a later
session.
Show dip/plunge as text in cosmetic layer: Select to display dip/plunge
labels as MapInfo text objects in the cosmetic layer, which are resized with
the map scale. These labels can be saved to a new table from Map>Save
Cosmetic Objects.
Label size
Type the label size in pts.
Map scale
Type the map scale at which the label size is correct.
Aa (Text style)
Click to display the MapInfo Text Style dialog box, from which you can change the
text style.
Show labels at 0 and 90
Show the dip/plunge label at 0 for horizontal and 90 for vertical structural
measurements.
See also
...Displaying Structural Data as Orientated Symbols
...Structural Symbol Font
Structural Data Dialog Box
Displayed when a new point or line is digitized so that you can record the
structural data values. For lines, the symbol is stored at the first digitized point.
1030 Encom Discover User Guide
Structure type
Click to select the structure type. The corresponding Discover structure code is
recorded in the table (see Structural Symbol Font)
Structural data
Dip direction/Strike
Type the dip direction or strike azimuth. If a line is digitized, the azimuth of the line
is automatically displayed.
Dip
Type the dip angle. If no dip is recorded (trend lines, monoclines, and wrench
faults, for example), leave the Dip box blank. A value of -99 indicating a null value
will be recorded in the table. If blank, no dip label will be displayed.
Symbol and label style
The symbol and label styles default to the settings made in the Structural Data
Mapper Dialog Box but can be modified for individual measurements.
See also
... Digitizing Structural Data
... Structural Symbol Font
Note For a number of structure types, such as bedding or cleavage, Discover uses
different symbols to indicate horizontal and vertical dip.
22 Tenements 1031
22 Tenements
The Tenement module provides an interactive interface for searching existing
tenement data and creating new applications, with a web link for downloading
regular tenement updates.
Download regularly updated Australian tenement data via a web-based
subscription service.
Query tenements by date, licence type and holder information.
Create applications with interactive State and Datum selection.
Create polygonised block and sub-block reference grids.
Create new or modify existing applications by selecting sub-blocks
manually or interactively, including sub-block counter, limit and area
checks.
Generate application reports automatically for entry into standard statutory
application forms.
To open the Tenements menu:
On the Discover menu, click Tenements Menu.
The Tenements menu is added to the MapInfo menu bar.
For information on how to use the Tenements tools, see:
Apply for an Australian Mineral Tenement
Displaying Graticular State Reference Grid
Searching Australian Tenements
1032 Encom Discover User Guide
Downloading Tenement Data
Apply for an Australian Mineral Tenement
Create new or modify existing applications by interactive sub-block selection, and
generate application reports automatically for entry into standard statutory
application forms.
Tenements>Application
To make an application:
1. On the Tenements menu, click Application. The Australian Tenement
Application dialog box is displayed.
2. Under Select State, select a state from the map. When a state is selected
the corresponding datum is also selected. For example, selecting WA will
select the GDA 94 datum.
If a datum is selected that does not comply with the current state
legislation, then the application may be invalid.
22 Tenements 1033
3. If not previously configured, click Configure to set a workspace or table.
On the Configure dialog box, select Load base table or workspace and
type a path for either a MapInfo Table or Workspace. Click OK to save and
return to the main dialog.
4. From the Australian Tenements Application dialog box, click OK. The
table or workspace specified in step 3 is opened, and the Define
Application dialog box is displayed, from which you can define the
method of application and the tables to be used for application (see
Application Tables).
5. In the Application directory box, click the Save button to select (or type
the folder path name) where the application files will be saved. The tables
created during the application process include Application Table, Block
Table and Label table.
6. For a new application, under Application region, select Create new and
type the application region name. For example, typing Darlot creates a
MapInfo table named Dar l ot . TAB.
To modify an existing application, select Modify existing, and click the
browse button to select the application table in the adjacent box.
Note This is the same as using File>Open>Workspace.
1034 Encom Discover User Guide
7. Under Application method, select either:
Define interactively: select sub-blocks from a mapper window.
Manually define: select sub-blocks manually. This method is not
available for Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia applications.
8. Click Settings to turn on and off the auto-labelling of blocks and sub-
blocks.
9. Click OK to create the application. The application tables are created or
updated and placed in the current map window.
For Victoria and Tasmania applications, which use a Universal Transverse
Mercator (UTM) Map Grid of Australia (MGA) grid system, the UTM Zone
dialog box is displayed to select the correct UTM Zone.
10. Depending on the Application method selected, select blocks and sub-
blocks. See Interactive Block Selection or Manual Block Selection.
11. At completion of block selection, for all states except WA, a summary text
report is displayed. The summary report includes the map sheet, block
number, sub-block letter, bounding coordinates, datum, state, total area,
and total subblocks/graticules. These details can be copied and pasted
onto the official application forms, which are typically PDF or Microsoft
Word formats.
For Western Australia, the forms (Form 21 Attachment 1 and Form 21
Attachment 2) are presented as MapInfo tables.
All tables required for the tenement application are stored in the Discover
tenement directory, which is defined with Discover>Configuration>Settings,
typically
C: \ Pr ogr amFi l es\ MapI nf o\ Pr of essi onal \ Di scover \ Tenement s.
22 Tenements 1035
Application Tables
Application table
The application table contains the following fields:
SubBlock: Block Identification method (BIM) letter
Map: Map Sheet name either 1:1,000,000 or 1:100,000
Block: Block Identification Method (BIM) block number
Merged: Defines the record status, N denotes a single sub-block, Y
denotes a merged polygon of all the sub-blocks
Area: Area or sub-block in km
2
Block table
The block table stores application block polygons and gridlines for blocks and
sub-blocks. The block table contains the following fields:
1036 Encom Discover User Guide
BlockNumber: Block number for selected application
RecType: Type of gridlines
Label table
The label table stores application corner points for the total application area. The
Label table contains the following fields:
PointID: Number of point
Latitude: Y coordinate or point
Longitude: X coordinate or point
AreaName: Application Region Name
Map: Blank field for user to update with mapsheet if required
Interactive Block Selection
This selection method is enabled when Define interactively is selected on the
Define Application dialog box. The Select Application Area dialog box is
displayed, which displays the current sub-block selection, sub-block limit and
area selected for the selected state.
Click the selection tool and then select or deselect blocks and sub-blocks in the
map window. The selection information is dynamically updated with the selected
sub-block count and total area selected.
22 Tenements 1037
Click OK to finish block selection. A number of checks are performed for sub-
block count, total area and non-contiguous blocks. Warning messages are
displayed if conditions applicable in the selected state are not met by the
selection.
Manual Block Selection
This selection method is enabled when Manually define is selected on the Define
Application dialog box. The Manually Define Sub Blocks dialog box is displayed,
from which you can select blocks and sub-blocks on a map sheet.
Click the 1:1 million mapsheet box and select the map sheet, type the block
number in the Block number box, and then select the sub-blocks from the matrix.
Click All to select all subblocks in the selected block. Selected sub-blocks are
shown in the Selected sub-blocks box. To add sub-blocks from other sheets
repeat the process until all the desired sub-blocks appear in the Selected Sub-
Blocks box.
To delete a block, select the block in the Selected sub-blocks box and click Delete
Block.
Click OK to finish block selection. A number of checks are performed for sub-
block count, total area and non-contiguous blocks. Warning messages are
displayed if conditions applicable in the selected state are not met by the
selection.
1038 Encom Discover User Guide
Displaying Graticular State Reference Grid
Create polygonised block and sub-block reference grids.
Tenements>Draw State Grid
To display the state graticular reference grid:
1. On the Tenements menu, click Draw State Grid. The State Grid dialog
box is displayed.
2. Under Select State, select a state from the map. When a state is selected
the corresponding datum is also selected. For example, selecting WA will
select the GDA 94 datum.
22 Tenements 1039
If a datum is selected that does not comply with the current state
legislation, a warning message is displayed.
3. Under Region, in the Name box, type the name of the region.
4. In the Folder box, click the Save button to select (or type the folder path
name) where the grid files will be saved.
5. Click Settings to turn on and off the auto-labelling of blocks and sub-
blocks.
6. Click OK to draw the graticular grid.
For Victoria and Tasmania, which use a Universal Transverse Mercator
(UTM) Map Grid of Australia (MGA) grid system, the UTM Zone dialog box
is displayed to select the correct UTM Zone.
Gridline, Block, and Sub-Block layers are created and drawn in the current map
window. The tables created are prefixed with the Region Name and suffixed with
either _Grid, _Block, or _SubBlock.
1040 Encom Discover User Guide
Searching Australian Tenements
Tenements>Tenement Search
Tenement data downloaded with the Download Tenement Data tool (see
Downloading Tenement Data) can be searched with the Tenement Search tool.
To search Australian tenements:
1. On the Tenements menu, click Tenement Search. The Tenement Search
dialog box is displayed.
2. In theTenement Table box, select the tenement table to be searched. The
tenement layers available in the Tenement folder are listed. The Tenement
folder is defined by Discover>Configuration>Settings and is typically
located under C: \ Pr ogr am
Fi l es\ MapI nf o\ Pr of essi onal \ Di scover \ Tenement s.
22 Tenements 1041
3. Under Select holder, select the type of holder search:
None: Do not restrict search by holder.
Individual search: Search by tenement holder name.
Keyword search: Search by keyword or text string. In the Holder
column box, select the search field in the tenement table, or select
<All>.
Alias search: Search by holder group alias. Click Configure to
view or define alias groups (see Manage Tenement Tables and
Holder Aliases).
4. Under Select date select the type of date search (application date,
granted date, or expiry date) and the date range.
Under Licence type option select one or more types of licence to be
searched (application, granted and moratorium).
Under Selection display select how the results of the search will be
displayed:
Browse Selection: display in browser.
Map Selection: display in map window.
Zoom map to Selection: zoom map window to the selected search
results.
Selection Statistics: display search summary in browser, including
number of tenements records returned, total area of tenement
polygons in km
2
, area of smallest tenement polygon in km
2
, and
area of largest tenement polygon in km
2
.
5. In the Name Selection box, type a name for the search.
6. Click Search to start the search.
Manage Tenement Tables and Holder Aliases
On the Tenement Search dialog, click Configure to display the Configure dialog
box, from which you can create, edit and delete tenement tables and holder
aliases.
1042 Encom Discover User Guide
Tenement tables
To create a new table:
Click New to display the Tenement Table dialog box, from which you can
select the folder location and table name.
To edit a table:
Select the table in the Tenement tables box, and then click Edit. The
Tenement Table dialog box is displayed, from which you can edit the folder
location and table name.
To delete a table:
Select the table in the Tenement tables box, and then click Delete.
Holder Aliases
A holder alias allows the selection of multiple holder values from a tenement table
with an alias name.
To create a new alias:
1. Click New to display the Define Holder Alias dialog box, from which you
can select the folder location and table name.
2. Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Edit. The Define
Holder Alias dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Tenement table box, select a tenement table.
4. In the Holder field box, select the field containing holder names.
5. In the Holder alias box, type the holder alias name.
6. Under Select holders, use the controls to move holders from the
Available box to the Selected box, and vice versa.
7. Click OK to save.
To edit an alias:
1. Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Edit. The Define
Holder Alias dialog box is displayed, from which you can edit the alias
settings.
22 Tenements 1043
2. The alias settings are displayed, which can be edited.
3. Click OK to save changes.
To delete an alias:
Select the alias in the Holder alias box, and then click Delete.
Downloading Tenement Data
Tenements>Download Tenement Data
Pitney Bowes Business Insight provides an online subscription service for
Australia-wide mineral tenement data. Before using this service, you must
subscribe and obtain a user name and password. To subscribe, contact PBBI at:
Email: software@encom.com.au
Sydney phone: +61 2 9957 4117
Perth phone: +61 8 9226 0101
To download Australian tenement data:
1. On the Tenements menu, click Download Tenement Data. The
Download Tenement Data dialog box is displayed.
1044 Encom Discover User Guide
2. To setup the web server connection details, click Settings.
Use the Proxy tab for corporate internet access through a Proxy Server:
Use System Settings. Use the Local Area Network (LAN) settings
in the system registry. You can review the current LAN settings from
the Windows Control Panel (Start>Control Panel>Internet
Options>Connections Tab>LAN Settings).
Use Direct Connection. Override the system LAN settings and
connect directly to the Internet (not through a proxy server).
Use Proxy Server. Use the settings defined under Proxy server
settings.
Use the WFS tab to change the connection timeout settings:
Timeout. Increase this value if you are experiencing timeout
problems because of a slow internet connection.
Read/write timeout. Increase this value if you are experiencing
timeout problems when downloading tenement data from the
Envinsa Online Services (EOLS) Server.
3. Click Login to connect to the EOLS server. Type your User name and
Password, and click OK to log in.
When the connection is made, the Download Tenement Data dialog box is
updated.
22 Tenements 1045
4. Under Layers, select a layer. The layer details are displayed under
Coordinate system and Layer description.
5. In the Preferred view box, select how the dowloaded data is displayed.
6. Click Download to download the selected layer to the file specified in the
Table file name box. To change the default download path, use
Discover>Configuration>Settings.
7. You will be prompted to log on to the EOLS server to finalise the download
process.
Note The same tenement data folder is used by the Tenement Search tool.
1046 Encom Discover User Guide
8. The data will either be displayed in a mapper browser or not displayed in
MapInfo following the download process.
23 Replaced Utilities 1047
23 Replaced Utilities
In this section:
Replaced Import and Export Tools
Replaced Drillhole Tools
Replaced Surface Tools
Enhanced Layer Control (ELC)
Replaced Import and Export Tools
DXF Import
Gemcom BT2 Import
Convert v2.1 Grids
DXF Import
Discover>Import and Export>DXF Import
Import layered CAD data into one MapInfo table, writing the CAD layer name as
an attribute for each object. The Z (elevation) value and attribute values are
stored as attributes for each MapInfo map object.
To import a DXF file:
1. On the Discover menu, point to Import and Export, and click DXF
Import.
The DXF Import Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Select the Input file by clicking on the Browse button
3. Select the output .TAB file name by clicking on the Browse button and
selecting an appropriate location. By default Discover will save the Output
file with the same name and in the same location as the source file.
4. Select the required object import method from the Create Object type pull
down list. Two options are available:
1048 Encom Discover User Guide
Points Only - create points for each vertex in the string file. Use
this option to import the string vertices only and preserve the
original string file X, Y, Z coordinate information.
Auto Select - create either point or polyline objects depending on
whether there are single or multiple line entries per block of data.
6. Set the Coordinate Transform options to apply a transform to the data
during import if required. The transform options allow you to Add/
Subtract or Multiply the X, Y coordinates in the DXF file by constant
values during import. This is especially useful if you need to convert the
data from local mine grid coordinates to world coordinates.
7. Choose an Aspect from which to view the DXF file when it is displayed in
MapInfo. View from Top, South or East.
8. If the DXF file is multi-layered select the Output each layer to a separate
file option. This will create a separate MapInfo Table for each layer
present in a DXF. Otherwise, a single MapInfo Table will be created
containing all layers.
Press OK to commence the import process.
Dialog Help
DXF Import Dialog Box
DXF Import Dialog Box
File details
Input file
Click the browse button to select the DXF file to be imported.
Note The X, Y coordinate values will not be imported into the browser for each vertex
and the Z value will be an average of the vertex Z values for each string in the
original file, as MapInfo does not support multiple vertex records per object in a
browser.
5. Select an appropriate MapInfo projection for the data.
23 Replaced Utilities 1049
Output file
Click the browse button to select the output folder and output TAB file name.
Create object type
Auto Select: Create either point or polyline objects depending on whether
there are single or multiple line entries per block of data.
Points Only: Create points for each vertex in the string file. Use this
option if you wish to import the string vertices only and preserve the
original string file X, Y, Z coordinate information.
Set Projection
Click to select a MapInfo projection.
Coordinate transform
Transform the X, Y, and Z coordinates in the form of the equations X =aX+b,
Y =aY+b, Z =aZ+b. For each coordinate, type the constant a in the Multiply by
box and the constant b in the Add/Subtract box. To import the coordinates
untransformed, set a=1 and b=0.
Aspect
View from
Choose to view the imported data in MapInfo from either the top, south or east.
Layers
Output each layer to a separate file
Select to create a separate table for each layer in the imported DXF file. Clear to
load all layers in the same table.
See also
...DXF Import
Note MapInfo does not support multiple vertex records per object in a browser. The X,
Y coordinate values will not be imported into the browser for each vertex and the
Z value will be an average of the vertex Z values for each string in the original
file.
1050 Encom Discover User Guide
Gemcom BT2 Import
Import Gemcom
=
2
,......,
2
H H
i
=
2
,......,
2
W W
j
1128 Encom Discover User Guide
The filter neighbourhood is shifted across the grid and a new value for each grid
node is calculated in the output image according to the filter method selected.
Grid Filter dialog used to select multiple filters and apply them to display the resultant
output.
The Rows and Columns in the Grid Filter dialog box specify the neighbourhood
size for the selected filter. The weights for each grid node in the neighbourhood
are displayed below. Each element of the matrix is used to weight the grid node
that lies below it. The products are computed and then summed, normalized and
assigned to the value below the centre node. The filter is then shifted to the next
node and the process is repeated until all nodes of the input grid have been
processed.
Appendix D Grid Filter Descriptions 1129
Available Grid Filters
Two types of filters are supplied with Discover:
Convolution
Smoothing Filters
Enhancement Filters
User-Defined Custom Filters
Advanced Filters
Geophysical
Geophysical FFT Derivative Filters
Two Dimensional FFT Filter Descriptions
Utils
= =
Appendix D Grid Filter Descriptions 1139
Whence for measurements of a scalar potential field function f1(xi,yj;z=z0)
defined over the 2D grid 1 i Nx , 1 j Ny , the 2D discrete Fourier transform
is defined as a complex Hermitian function F1(k1,k2;z0) defined over the same
size (Nx*Ny) grid, namely,
where x
i
=( i - 1) x and y
j
=( j - 1) y and the discrete k
x
, k
y
wave-numbers
are given by the relations:
k
x
=2(k
1
-1)/N
x
x
; 1 k
1
N
x
and
k
y
=2(k
2
-1)/N
y
y
; 1 k
2
N
y
FFT Continuation Filter
The vertical continuation filter is used to transform a 2D grid of scalar potential
field (magnetic or gravity) measurements from one datum level at z=z
0
to another
datum level at z=z
1
in either an upward or downward direction. The expression
for the vertical continuation operator G
UDC
( k) at a point k = ( kx, ky) in the 2D
wave number domain is given by the following relation (see for example, Blakely,
1995):
G
UDC
( k) = exp{| k| z} z<0 for upward continuation to z
1
( 64)
G
UDC
( k) = exp{| k| z} z>0 for downward continuation to z
1
( 65)
where z = ( z
1
- z
0
) is the change in vertical datum from z
0
to z
1
for the 2D grid
and | k| is the modulus of the 2D wavenumber vector k as defined in equation
(38). Here it is noted that z is measured positive downwards which is in keeping
with both the IGRF and the Encom grid coordinate systems.
FFT Low Pass Filter
The FFT Low Pass Filter applies an operator to remove high frequency content
with wavelengths above (that is, smaller than the defined wavelength cut-off). The
cut-off rate specifies the severity of the filter at its wavelength margins. The higher
the cut-off, the greater and the sharper the cut-off effect of removing a particular
wavelength cut-off.
1140 Encom Discover User Guide
FFT High Pass Filter
This FFT filter is the converse of the Low Pass filter. The High Pass filters pass
frequencies that are higher than the specified cut-off.
FFT Band Pass Filter
Band Pass filters remove wavelengths that lie between two specified wavelength
limits.
A common cut-off is applied for both the high and low ranges of the wavelengths.
Applying a simple cutoff filter to an energy spectrum (such as a Band Pass filter)
almost invariably introduces a significant amount of ringing (referred to as the
Gibbs' Phenomena).
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1141
E Styles and Symbol Fonts
Line Styles
Style Library
Geological Symbol Font
Structural Symbol Font
Hydrographic Symbol Font
Environmental Symbol Font
Line Styles
When Discover is installed a number of custom line styles are automatically
added to the existing MapInfo Pen file.
1142 Encom Discover User Guide
Style Library
Geological Symbol Font
Discover includes a Geological True Type Font (ET GeoExplore) that contains
non-rotatable geological symbols. These symbols may be used with the Discover
Styles Library or from the MapInfo symbol style picker (see Using Object Styles).
Name Symbol ASCII
Petroleum exploration well, proposed site ! 33
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1143
Petroleum exploration well, dry, abandoned " 34
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil # 35
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil,
abandoned
$ 36
Petroleum exploration well with show of gas % 37
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil and gas,
abandoned
& 38
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil ' 39
Petroleum exploration well with show of oil and gas ( 40
Stratigraphic hole for petroleum exploration ) 41
Oil well, shut in or suspended * 42
Oil well, abandoned + 43
Gas well , 44
Gas well, shut in or suspended - 45
Gas well, abandoned . 46
Oil and gas well / 47
Oil and gas well, shut in or suspended 0 48
Oil and gas well, abandoned 1 49
Gas and condensate well 2 50
Gas and condensate well, shut in or suspended 3 51
Gas and condensate well, abandoned 4 52
Fossil locality 5 53
Macrofossil locality 6 54
Microfossil locality 7 55
Trace fossil locality 8 56
Name Symbol ASCII
1144 Encom Discover User Guide
Fossil wood locality 9 57
Oncolite locality : 58
Palynomorph locality ; 59
Plant fossil locality < 60
Stromatolite locality = 61
Vertebrate fossil locality > 62
Sample location for isotopic age determination ? 63
Type locality @ 64
Drillhole A 65
Unworked deposit B 66
Prospect or mine with little production C 67
Abandoned prospect or mine with little production D 68
Mine; may be abandoned E 69
Major mine F 70
Mine abandoned or not being worked G 71
Minor open cut or quarry H 72
Major open cut or quarry I 73
Abandoned open cut or quarry, or not being worked J 74
Minor alluvial workings K 75
Major alluvial workings L 76
Abandoned alluvial workings, or not being worked M 77
Treatment plant N 78
Treatment plant not operating, or abandoned, or
former site
O 79
Main shaft showing number of compartments P 80
Name Symbol ASCII
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1145
Shaft extending above and below plan level Q 81
Accessible shaft extending below plan level R 82
Accessible shaft extending above plan level S 83
Head of rise or winze T T 84
Foot of rise or winze U 85
Rise or winze extending through level V 86
Inclined accessible shaft extending below plan level
(small scale)
W 87
Inclined accessible shaft extending below plan level
(large scale)
X 88
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive; same side of plane
of section as observer
Y 89
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive; opposite side of
plane of section
Z 90
Cross-section of cross-cut or drive extending across
plane of section
[ 91
Ore chute \ 92
Filled workings ] 93
Portal and approach of tunnel or adit ^ 94
Natural surface _ 95
Grab-sample locality ` 96
Costean or trench a 97
Oil seep b 98
Gas seep c 99
Oil and gas seep or show d 100
Oil seep reported (by geoscientist) but not relocated e 101
Name Symbol ASCII
1146 Encom Discover User Guide
Gas seep reported (by geoscientist) but not relocated f 102
Oil and gas seep reported (by geoscientist) but not
relocated
g 103
Mud volcano or mud volcano without with
hydrocarbons
h 104
Mud volcano with hydrocarbons i 105
Relative gravity high k 107
Relative gravity low l 108
Proterozoic symbol m 109
Cambrian symbol n 110
Photo point o 111
Drillhole p 112
Registration cross q 113
Scarp r 114
Inclined drillhole s 115
Inclined drillhole t 116
Inclined drillhole u 117
Inclined drillhole v 118
Major eruptive centre with recorded eruption w 119
Major eruptive centre with no recorded eruption x 120
Minor eruptive centre with recorded eruption y 121
Minor eruptive centre with no recorded eruption z 122
Astrobleme or impact structure or cryptoexplosive
structure
{ 123
Trigometrical | 124
Name Symbol ASCII
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1147
Structural Symbol Font
The Structural True Type symbol fonts should be installed onto your system via
the Fonts folder in Control Panel. They are then available for use with any
software that uses True Type fonts, including MapInfo, Corel Draw and MS Word.
Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code
Structure Symbols Ordered by Name
The symbols may be referred to in one of a number of ways:
Symbol Name - Used with the Discover Structure Symbols>Create
Structure Symbols menu option when placing individual structural
symbols. There are 3 separate structural symbol fonts that are available.
Australian ET Structural Australia
Canadian ET Structural Canada
USA ET Structural USA
Key and ASCII - Use this keystroke to display the appropriate symbol
when entering text.
Discover Code - Used when entering data into a spreadsheet for display
with the Discover Structural Data Map Window.
Astronomical station } 125
Major volcanic centre ~ 126
Volcanic plug residual 127
Basalt capped residual hill 129
Residual hill ? 130
Crater wall ? 131
Pediment ? 132
Landslips ? 133
Name Symbol ASCII
1148 Encom Discover User Guide
AGSO Code - The equivalent code as defined by the Australian
Geological Survey Organisation (AGSO). Not all Discover symbols have
equivalent AGSO codes.
Structural Symbols Ordered by Discover Code
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Bedding ! 33 1 621
Bedding Horizontal " 34 1 624
Bedding Vertical # 35 1 625
Bedding Overturned $ 36 2 626
Overturned horizontal % 37 2 627
Bedding Facing & 38 3 628
Facing vertical ' 39 3 629
Facing overturned ( 40 3 6210
Cleavage (s1) ) 41 4 921
Cleavage (s1) vertical * 42 4 924
Cleavage (s1) horizontal + 43 4 925
Cleavage (s2) "," 44 5 n/a
Cleavage (s2) vertical - 45 5 n/a
Cleavage (s2) horizontal _ _ . 46 5 n/a
Cleavage (s3) / 47 6 n/a
Cleavage (s3) vertical 0 48 6 n/a
Cleavage (s3) horizontal [ [ 1 49 6 n/a
Younging 132 7 641
Lineation 2 50 8 1021
Lineation vertical + + 3 51 8 1022
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1149
Lineation horizontal 4 52 8 1023
Lineation (L1) 5 53 9 n/a
Lineation (L2) 6 54 10 n/a
Lineation (L3) 7 55 11 n/a
Bedding-Cleavage 8 56 12 1031
Bedding-Cleavage Horiz 9 57 12 1032
Crenulation : 58 13 1041
Crenulation horizontal ; 59 13 1042
Mineral alignment _ < 60 14 1051
Mineral alignment Horiz = 61 14 1052
Banding/Platy Alignment > 62 15 1121
Banding/Platy vertical ? 63 15 1124
Banding/Platy horizontal = @ 64 15 1125
J oint A 65 16 721
J oint vertical B 66 16 723
J oint horizontal C 67 16 724
Foliation D 68 17 821
Foliation vertical E 69 17 824
Foliation horizontal F 70 17 825
Anticline (f1) P 80 18 n/a
Anticline (f1) horizontal Q 81 18 n/a
Anticline (f2) - R 82 19 n/a
Anticline (f2) horizontal - - S 83 19 n/a
Anticline (f3) T 84 20 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
1150 Encom Discover User Guide
Anticline (f3) horizontal - U 85 20 n/a
Anticline overturned V 86 21 551
Anticline recumbent W 87 22 571
Syncline (f1) Z 90 23 n/a
Syncline (f1) horizontal [ 91 23 n/a
Syncline (f2) - - - \ 92 24 n/a
Syncline (f2) horizontal - - ] 93 24 n/a
Syncline (f3) ^ 94 25 n/a
Syncline (f3) horizontal _ 94 25 n/a
Syncline overturned ` 96 26 556
Syncline recumbent a 97 27 575
Normal fault - e 101 28 341
Normal fault - Low Ang - f 102 29 344
Normal fault - High Ang g 103 30 345
Thrust fault h 104 31 351
Shear zone \ \ i 105 32 365
Shear zone - Wide j 106 33 366
Fault zone breccia k 107 34 363
Trend line l 108 35 671
Parallel lines = = = m 109 36 n/a
Vein, Dyke no dip n 110 37 n/a
Vein, Sill no dip o 111 38 n/a
Vein, Dyke with dip p 112 37 n/a
Vein, Sill with dip q 113 38 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1151
Oriented drill collar 1 y 121 39 n/a
Oriented drill collar 2 z 122 40 n/a
Oriented drill collar 3 123 41 n/a
Dipping fault gouge s 115 42 n/a
Sinistral wrench fault 71 43
Dextral wrench fault 99 44
Columnar J oint 100 45
Bedding facing unknown 130 46 6211
Bedding facing unk vert 131 46 6212
Undulating bedding dip 133 47 632
Deformed bedding dip 134 48 633
Foliation d1 163 49 831
Foliation d2 164 50 832
Foliation d3 165 51 833
Bedding/Cleavage (S1)
Parallel
72 52
Bedding/Cleavage (S2)
Parallel
- 73 53
Bedding/Cleavage (S3)
Parallel
74 54
Plunge bedding/Cleavage (S2)
intersection
75 55
Plunge bedding/Cleavage (S3)
intersection
76 56
Plunge bedding/Vein
intersection
77 57
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
1152 Encom Discover User Guide
Monocline 79 58
Minor anticline 140 59 n/a
Minor anticline & plunge 141 60 n/a
Minor syncline 142 61 n/a
Minor syncline & plunge 143 62 n/a
Minor fold with dip 144 63 n/a
Minor fold with plunge 145 64 n/a
Kink fold with plunge 146 65 51420
Asymmetric fold verge left 147 66 n/a
Asymmetric fold verge right 148 67 n/a
Fold verge left 149 68 5156
Fold verge right 150 69 5155
Recum fold verge left 151 70 5154
Recum fold verge right 152 71 5153
Minor fold s vergence 153 72 5159
Minor fold z vergence 154 73 51510
Minor fold m vergence 155 74 51511
Boudin plunge 156 75 5157
Chert contortion plunge 157 76 5158
Mylonitic foliation 158 77 n/a
Mylonitic foliation vert 159 77 n/a
Eutaxitic foliation 161 78 n/a
Eutaxitic foliation vert 162 78 n/a
Glacial striae (known) t 116 79 653
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1153
Structure Symbols Ordered by Name
Glacial striae (unknown) u 117 80 654
Dipping shear r 114 81 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Anticline (f1) P 80 18 n/a
Anticline (f1) horizontal Q 81 18 n/a
Anticline (f2) - R 82 19 n/a
Anticline (f2) horizontal - - S 83 19 n/a
Anticline (f3) T 84 20 n/a
Anticline (f3) horizontal - U 85 20 n/a
Anticline overturned V 86 21 551
Anticline recumbent W 87 22 571
Asymmetric fold verge left 147 66 n/a
Asymmetric fold verge right 148 67 n/a
Banding/Platy Alignment > 62 15 1121
Banding/Platy horizontal = @ 64 15 1125
Banding/Platy vertical ? 63 15 1124
Bedding ! 33 1 621
Bedding Facing & 38 3 628
Bedding facing unk vert 131 46 6212
Bedding facing unknown 130 46 6211
Bedding Horizontal " 34 1 624
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
1154 Encom Discover User Guide
Bedding Overturned $ 36 2 626
Bedding Vertical # 35 1 625
Bedding-Cleavage 8 56 12 1031
Bedding-Cleavage Horiz 9 57 12 1032
Bedding/Cleavage (S1)
Parallel
72 52
Bedding/Cleavage (S2)
Parallel
- 73 53
Bedding/Cleavage (S3)
Parallel
74 54
Boudin plunge 156 75 5157
Chert contortion plunge 157 76 5158
Cleavage (s1) ) 41 4 921
Cleavage (s1) horizontal + 43 4 925
Cleavage (s1) vertical * 42 4 924
Cleavage (s2) "," 44 5 n/a
Cleavage (s2) horizontal _ _ . 46 5 n/a
Cleavage (s2) vertical - 45 5 n/a
Cleavage (s3) / 47 6 n/a
Cleavage (s3) horizontal [ [ 1 49 6 n/a
Cleavage (s3) vertical 0 48 6 n/a
Columnar J oint 100 45
Crenulation : 58 13 1041
Crenulation horizontal ; 59 13 1042
Deformed bedding dip 134 48 633
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1155
Dextral wrench fault 99 44
Dipping fault gouge s 115 42 n/a
Dipping shear r 114 81 n/a
Eutaxitic foliation 161 78 n/a
Eutaxitic foliation vert 162 78 n/a
Facing overturned ( 40 3 6210
Facing vertical ' 39 3 629
Fault zone breccia k 107 34 363
Fold verge left 149 68 5156
Fold verge right 150 69 5155
Foliation D 68 17 821
Foliation d1 163 49 831
Foliation d2 164 50 832
Foliation d3 165 51 833
Foliation horizontal F 70 17 825
Foliation vertical E 69 17 824
Glacial striae (known) t 116 79 653
Glacial striae (unknown) u 117 80 654
J oint A 65 16 721
J oint horizontal C 67 16 724
J oint vertical B 66 16 723
Kink fold with plunge 146 65 51420
Lineation 2 50 8 1021
Lineation (L1) 5 53 9 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
1156 Encom Discover User Guide
Lineation (L2) 6 54 10 n/a
Lineation (L3) 7 55 11 n/a
Lineation horizontal 4 52 8 1023
Lineation vertical + + 3 51 8 1022
Mineral alignment _ < 60 14 1051
Mineral alignment Horiz = 61 14 1052
Minor anticline 140 59 n/a
Minor anticline & plunge 141 60 n/a
Minor fold m vergence 155 74 51511
Minor fold s vergence 153 72 5159
Minor fold with dip 144 63 n/a
Minor fold with plunge 145 64 n/a
Minor fold z vergence 154 73 51510
Minor syncline 142 61 n/a
Minor syncline & plunge 143 62 n/a
Monocline 79 58
Mylonitic foliation 158 77 n/a
Mylonitic foliation vert 159 77 n/a
Normal fault - e 101 28 341
Normal fault - High Ang g 103 30 345
Normal fault - Low Ang - f 102 29 344
Oriented drill collar 1 y 121 39 n/a
Oriented drill collar 2 z 122 40 n/a
Oriented drill collar 3 123 41 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1157
Overturned horizontal % 37 2 627
Parallel lines = = = m 109 36 n/a
Plunge bedding/Cleavage (S2)
intersection
75 55
Plunge bedding/Cleavage (S3)
intersection
76 56
Plunge bedding/Vein
intersection
77 57
Recum fold verge left 151 70 5154
Recum fold verge right 152 71 5153
Shear zone \ \ i 105 32 365
Shear zone - Wide j 106 33 366
Sinistral wrench fault 71 43
Syncline (f1) Z 90 23 n/a
Syncline (f1) horizontal [ 91 23 n/a
Syncline (f2) - - - \ 92 24 n/a
Syncline (f2) horizontal - - ] 93 24 n/a
Syncline (f3) ^ 94 25 n/a
Syncline (f3) horizontal _ 94 25 n/a
Syncline overturned ` 96 26 556
Syncline recumbent a 97 27 575
Thrust fault h 104 31 351
Trend line l 108 35 671
Undulating bedding dip 133 47 632
Vein, Dyke no dip n 110 37 n/a
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
1158 Encom Discover User Guide
Hydrographic Symbol Font
Discover includes a Hydrographical True Type Font (ET Water) that contains non-
rotatable hydrographic symbols. These symbols are accessible from the MapInfo
symbol style picker.
The available hydrographic symbols are listed along with their equivalent ASCII
code.
Vein, Dyke with dip p 112 37 n/a
Vein, Sill no dip o 111 38 n/a
Vein, Sill with dip q 113 38 n/a
Younging 132 7 641
Name Symbol ASCII
Waterhole or soak 1 49
Swamp, marsh 2 50
Mangroves 3 51
Stream arrow 4 52
Spring/thermal area 5 53
Salt spring, salinity not measured 6 54
Salt spring, salinity <1500ppm 7 55
Salt spring, salinity 1500-10000ppm 8 56
Salt spring, salinity >10000ppm 9 57
Windpump A 65
Bore with windpump B 66
Bore C 67
Symbol Name Australia Canada USA Key ASCII Discover
Code
AGSO
Code
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1159
Abandoned bore D 68
Artesian bore, flowing E 69
Abandoned artesian bore, flowing F 70
Artesian bore, ceased to flow G 71
Abandoned artesian bore, ceased to flow H 72
Sub-artesian bore I 73
Abandoned sub-artesian bore J 74
Well K 75
Abandoned well L 76
Well, salinity <1500ppm M 77
Abandoned well, salinity <1500ppm N 78
Well, salinity 1500-10000ppm O 79
Abandoned well, salinity 1500-10000ppm P 80
Well, Salinity >10000ppm Q 81
Abandoned well, salinity >10000ppm R 82
Water tank S 83
Dam on stream T 84
Salty bore, salinity not measured U 85
Abandoned salty bore, salinity not measured V 86
Bore, salinity <1500ppm W 87
Abandoned bore, salinity <1500ppm X 88
Bore, salinity 1500-10000ppm Y 89
Abandoned bore, salinity 1500-10000ppm Z 90
Bore, salinity >10000ppm a 97
Name Symbol ASCII
1160 Encom Discover User Guide
Abandoned bore, salinity >10000ppm b 98
Salinity bore, 0-500mg/l c 99
Salinity bore, 500-1500mg/l d 100
Salinity bore, 1500-3000mg/l e 101
Salinity bore, >3000mg/l f 102
Capped artesian bore g 103
Artesian bore, salinity <1500ppm, ceased to flow h 104
Abandoned sub-artesian bore, salinity <1500ppm i 105
Well with windpump j 106
Palaeocurrent k 107
Minor group of springs l 108
Major group of springs m 109
Flow arrow n 110
Groundwater/surface water divide o 111
Group of springs p 112
Recharge site q 113
Desalination plant r 114
Liquid waste site s 115
Rising water table t 116
Palaeodrainage direction u 117
Palaeodrainage trend v 118
Sink hole w 119
Name Symbol ASCII
Appendix E Styles and Symbol Fonts 1161
Environmental Symbol Font
Discover includes an Environmental True Type Font (ET Other) that contains
non-rotatable environmental symbols. These symbols are accessible from the
MapInfo symbol style picker.
The available environmental symbols are listed along with their equivalent ASCII
code.
Name Symbol ASCII
Major eruptive centre with recorded eruption A 65
Major eruptive centre with no recorded eruption B 66
Minor eruptive centre with recorded eruption C 67
Minor eruptive centre with no recorded eruption D 68
Survey station E 69
F 70
G 71
H 72
I 73
J 74
Astrobleme or impact structure or cryptoexplosive K 75
Trigonometrical station L 76
Astronomical station M 77
Major volcanic centre N 78
Volcanic plug residual O 79
Volcanic centre P 80
Basalt capped residual hill Q 81
Residual hill R 82
Slope S 83
1162 Encom Discover User Guide
Pediment T 84
Landslip U 85
Harmful/irritant V 86
Toxic W 87
Radioactive X 88
Flammable Y 89
Corrosive Z 90
Oxidising/supports fire a 97
Explosive b 98
Significant aquatic habitat c 99
Significant fauna habitat d 100
Significant flora habitat e 101
Registration point f 102
Name Symbol ASCII
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1163
F Supported Data File Formats
Supported File Formats by Data Type
Supported File Formats by File Name Extension
Supported File Formats by Data Type
Discover/MapInfo Professional supported data types.
Tabular and Vector Data
Raster Images
Gridded Surfaces
Drillholes
Tabular and Vector Data
Format Extension Import Tool Note
3D Studio files .3DS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Access database .MDB File>Open DBMS Connection a
Access database .MDB File>Open b
Access 2007 .ACCDB File>Open c
acQuire Database Discover>Import and Export>acQuire Database
Import
AMIRA .TEM Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
d
AutoCAD .DWG File>Universal Translator
AutoCAD .DXF File>Universal Translator
AutoCAD .DXF Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import d
AutoCAD .DXF Table>Import e
1164 Encom Discover User Guide
Bentely MicroStation Design .DGN File>Universal Translator
Bentely MicroStation Design .FC1 File>Universal Translator
Bentely MicroStation Design .POS File>Universal Translator
Comma Separated ASCII .CSV File>Open
Comma Separated ASCII .CSV Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Datamine .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Datamine ASCII .ASCII Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII
Import as Points
Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII
Import as Polylines
Datamine wireframe .DM Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
DataSight database Discover>Import and Export>DataSight Import
DataShed database Discover>Import and Export>DataShed
Database Import
dBase .DBF File>Open
Delimited ASCII .TXT File>Open
ERMapper .ASC Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
ERMapper vector .ERV Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
ESRI ArcInfo Export .E00 File>Universal Translator
ESRI ArcSDE File>Open Universal Data b, g
ESRI GeoDatabase .MDB File>Open Universal Data b, g
ESRI shapefiles .SHP File>Open b
ESRI TIN .ADF Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Excel .XLS File>Open b
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1165
Excel 2007 .XLSX File>Open c
Gemcom binary triangulation .BT2 Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
GemSys .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Geographic Markup Language .GML File>Open or Table>Import
Geographic Markup Language .XML File>Open or Table>Import
Geosoft Database .GDB Discover>Import and Export>Geosoft Database
Import
Geosoft XYZ .XYZ Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
GOCAD vector .TS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
GOCAD vector .VS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
GOCAD vector .PL Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
GPS eXchange .GPX Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
ioGAS .GAS Discover>Import and Export>ioGAS Menut
Keyhole Markup Language
(Google)
.KML Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
LIDAR LAS (ASPRS) .LAS Discover>Import and Export>LIDAR LAS
(ASPRS) Import
LizardTech MrSID .SID Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Located Data .LDT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Log ASCII Standard .LAS Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet .WK* File>Open
MapInfo DOS .MBI Table>Import
MapInfo DOS .MMI Table>Import
Format Extension Import Tool Note
1166 Encom Discover User Guide
MapInfo DOS Image .IMG Table>Import
MapInfo Interchange .MIF Table>Import
MicroMine data .DAT Discover>Import and Export>MicroMine Import
MicroMine strings .STR Discover>Import and Export>MicroMine Import
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Spatial File>Universal Translator h
MineSight string .SRG Discover>Import and Export>MineSight SRG
Import
ModelVision Hole files .HOL Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
ModelVision Line files .LIN Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
ModelVision Point files .PTS Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
OS MasterMap .GML Table>Import
Oracle spatial database File>Open DBMS Connection
PostGIS spatial database File>Open DBMS Connection
Spatial Data Transfer Standard *CATD.DDF File>Universal Translator
SQL Server File>Open DBMS Connection
Surpac String .STR Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Surpac Vector .DTM Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Text .TXT File>Open
Text .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Vector Product Format (VPF) .*FT File>Universal Translator
Vulcan Archive .ARCH_D Discover>Import and Export>Vulcan Archive
Import
Vulcan triangulation .00T Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1167
a For the creation of live or refreshable database links
b Read-only
c Read-only in MapInfo Professional 10.0
d Automatically stores attribute elevation data
e Works with most DXF formats, but least flexible
f Import templates, projection assigment, native file creation
g Requires ArcGIS/ArcInfo to be installed
h In MapInfo Professional 10.0
Raster Images
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Adobe Photoshop Version 3.0 .PSD File>Open (Raster Image)
Bitmap .BMP File>Open (Raster Image)
Bitmap .BMP Images>Rectify Image i
Encom PA Located Images .EGB Discover>Import and Export>Encom PA
Located Image Import
Windows Enhanced Metafile (+and
+dual)
.EMF File>Open (Raster Image)
ERMapper Algorithm files .ALG Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
ERMapper Enhanced Compression
Wavelet
.ECW Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
ERDAS Image Web Server .ECWP Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
GeoTIFF .TIFF File>Open (Raster Image) k
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF File>Open (Raster Image)
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF Images>Rectify Image i
J oint Photographic Experts Group .J PG File>Open (Raster Image)
J oint Photographic Experts Group .J PG Images>Rectify Image i
J PEG 2000 .J P2 .J 2K Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
MrSID .SID File>Open (Raster Image)
1168 Encom Discover User Guide
i Accurate 'rubber-sheet' rectification i.e. image is stretched, skemed and warped to accommodate control points
j Automatic image registration
k Imports embedded coordiante registration information
l Support for automatic coordinate registration via .TFW world file
m Truevision File Format Specification 2.0
n GRD files can be treated as either a grid or raster image. If the associated .TAB file contains a RasterStyle 6 entry, the
file will be treated as a grid
Gridded Surfaces
National Imagery Transmission
Format
.NTF File>Open (Raster Image)
PC Paintbrush Exchange .PCX File>Open (Raster Image)
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG File>Open (Raster Image)
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG Images>Rectify Image i
SPOT satellite .BIL File>Open (Raster Image)
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF .TFW File>Open (Raster Image) l
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF Images>Rectify Image i
Targa .TGA File>Open (Raster Image) m
Vertical Mapper .GRC File>Open (Raster Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRD File>Open (Raster Image) n
Windows Media Format .WMF File>Open (Raster Image)
Format Extension Import Tool Note
ASCII Text .TXT Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
ASCII Text .CSV Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
ASCII Text .XYZ Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
ASCII Text .ASC Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
ASEG GXF files .GXF File>Open (Grid Image)
Band Interleaved by Line .BIL/.HDR File>Open (Grid Image)
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1169
DTED .DIR .DT* File>Open (Grid Image) o, q
Encom Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
ER Mapper .ERS File>Open (Grid Image)
ER Mapper multi-banded .ERS Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Split
ESRI/ARC Binary Grid files .ADF File>Open (Grid Image)
ESRI/ARC ASCII Grid .ASC File>Open (Grid Image)
ESRI/ARC FLT Binary .FLT File>Open (Grid Image)
ESRI TIN .ADF Surfaces>Convert Vector File to Grid
GeoPak .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Geosoft .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
GeoTIFF RGB with embedded grid
data
.TIF File>Open (Grid Image)
GeoTIFF files with embedded
elevation data
.TIF File>Open (Grid Image)
GTOPO30 .DEM File>Open (Grid Image) o
HGT data (e.g. SRTM) .HGT Surfaces>Import Grid File>HGT Grid
LIDAR ASCII .TXT .CSV
.ASC .XYZ
Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
p
LIDAR LAS .LAS Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
p
Landmark Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
LizardTech MrSID .MG4 Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
MapInfo grid files .MIG File>Open (Grid Image)
Minex .XYZ File>Open (Grid Image)
IRDSI Binary Grid .FLT .IMG File>Open (Grid Image) o
Format Extension Import Tool Note
1170 Encom Discover User Guide
o Files are imported as read-only; they cannot be used to create grid files with MapInfo Professional's Create Grid The-
matic interpolation process
p Input point datasets are triangulated to create a gridded surface
q) Either the overall header .DIR can be referenced (normally under the Text folder) or subsidary .DT* files.
Drillholes
Surfer ASCII Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Surfer Binary Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
USGS DEM Grid files .DEM File>Open (Grid Image)
USGS DEM SDTS TAR .TAR File>Open (Grid Image)
USGS Grid Files .USG File>Open (Grid Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRC File>Open (Grid Image)
Format Extension Import Tool Note
gINT .GPJ Drillholes>External Data Formats>gINT Importer
WinLog .MDB Drillholes>External Data Formats>WinLoG
Import
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1171
Supported File Formats by File Name Extension
Format Extension Import Tool Note
acQuire Database Discover>Import and Export>acQuire Database
Import
DataShed database Discover>Import and Export>DataShed
Database Import
DataSight database Discover>Import and Export>DataSight Import
ESRI ArcSDE File>Open Universal Data b g
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 Spatial File>Universal Translator h
Oracle spatial database File>Open DBMS Connection
PostGIS spatial database File>Open DBMS Connection
SQL Server File>Open DBMS Connection
Vector Product Format (VPF) .*FT File>Universal Translator
Vulcan triangulation .00T Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
3D Studio files .3DS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Access 2007 .ACCDB File>Open c
ESRI TIN .ADF Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
ESRI TIN .ADF Surfaces>Convert Vector File to Grid
ESRI/ARC Binary Grid files .ADF File>Open (Grid Image)
ERMapper Algorithm files .ALG Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
Vulcan Archive .ARCH_D Discover>Import and Export>Vulcan Archive
Import
ASCII Text .ASC Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
ERMapper .ASC Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
ESRI/ARC ASCII Grid .ASC File>Open (Grid Image)
1172 Encom Discover User Guide
Datamine ASCII .ASCII Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII
Import as Points
Discover>Import and Export>Datamine ASCII
Import as Polylines
SPOT satellite .BIL File>Open (Raster Image)
Band Interleaved by Line .BIL/.HDR File>Open (Grid Image)
Bitmap .BMP File>Open (Raster Image)
Bitmap .BMP Images>Rectify Image i
Gemcom binary triangulation .BT2 Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
ASCII Text .CSV Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
Comma Separated ASCII .CSV Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Comma Separated ASCII .CSV File>Open
MicroMine data .DAT Discover>Import and Export>MicroMine Import
dBase .DBF File>Open
GTOPO30 .DEM File>Open (Grid Image) o
USGS DEM Grid files .DEM File>Open (Grid Image)
Bentely MicroStation Design .DGN File>Universal Translator
Datamine wireframe .DM Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
DTED .DT* .DIR File>Open (Grid Image) o, q
Surpac Vector .DTM Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
AutoCAD .DWG File>Universal Translator
AutoCAD .DXF Table>Import e
AutoCAD .DXF Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import d
AutoCAD .DXF File>Universal Translator
ESRI ArcInfo Export .E00 File>Universal Translator
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1173
ERMapper Enhanced Compression
Wavelet
.ECW Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
ERDAS Image Web Server .ECWP Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
Encom PA Located Images .EGB Discover>Import and Export>Encom PA
Located Image Import
Windows Enhanced Metafile (+and
+dual)
.EMF File>Open (Raster Image)
ER Mapper .ERS File>Open (Grid Image)
ER Mapper multi-banded .ERS Surfaces>Grid Utilities>Split
ERMapper vector .ERV Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Bentely MicroStation Design .FC1 File>Universal Translator
ESRI/ARC FLT Binary .FLT File>Open (Grid Image)
IRDSI Binary Grid .FLT .IMG File>Open (Grid Image) o
ioGAS .GAS Discover>Import and Export>ioGAS Menut
Geosoft Database .GDB Discover>Import and Export>Geosoft Database
Import
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF File>Open (Raster Image)
Graphics Interchange Format .GIF Images>Rectify Image i
Geographic Markup Language .GML File>Open or Table>Import
OS MasterMap .GML Table>Import
gINT .GPJ Drillholes>External Data Formats>gINT Importer
GPS eXchange .GPX Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Vertical Mapper .GRC File>Open (Grid Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRC File>Open (Raster Image)
Encom Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Format Extension Import Tool Note
1174 Encom Discover User Guide
GeoPak .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Geosoft .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Landmark Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Surfer ASCII Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Surfer Binary Grid files .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRD File>Open (Grid Image)
Vertical Mapper .GRD File>Open (Raster Image) n
ASEG GXF files .GXF File>Open (Grid Image)
HGT data (e.g. SRTM) .HGT Surfaces>Import Grid File>HGT Grid
ModelVision Hole files .HOL Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
MapInfo DOS Image .IMG Table>Import
J PEG 2000 .J P2 .J 2K Discover>Import and Export>ALG/ECW/
JPEG2000 Import
j
J oint Photographic Experts Group .J PG File>Open (Raster Image)
J oint Photographic Experts Group .J PG Images>Rectify Image i
Keyhole Markup Language
(Google)
.KML Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
LIDAR LAS .LAS Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
p
LIDAR LAS (ASPRS) .LAS Discover>Import and Export>LIDAR LAS
(ASPRS) Import
Log ASCII Standard .LAS Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Located Data .LDT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1175
ModelVision Line files .LIN Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
MapInfo DOS .MBI Table>Import
Access database .MDB File>Open b
Access database .MDB File>Open DBMS Connection a
ESRI GeoDatabase .MDB File>Open Universal Data b g
WinLog .MDB Drillholes>External Data Formats>WinLoG
Import
MapInfo Interchange .MIF Table>Import
LizardTech MrSID .MG4 Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
MapInfo grid files .MIG File>Open (Grid Image)
MapInfo DOS .MMI Table>Import
National Imagery Transmission
Format
.NTF File>Open (Raster Image)
PC Paintbrush Exchange .PCX File>Open (Raster Image)
GOCAD vector .PL Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG File>Open (Raster Image)
Portable Networks Graphics .PNG Images>Rectify Image i
Bentely MicroStation Design .POS File>Universal Translator
Adobe Photoshop Version 3.0 .PSD File>Open (Raster Image)
ModelVision Point files .PTS Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
ESRI shapefiles .SHP File>Open b
LizardTech MrSID .SID Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
MineSight string .SRG Discover>Import and Export>MineSight SRG
Import
Format Extension Import Tool Note
1176 Encom Discover User Guide
MicroMine strings .STR Discover>Import and Export>MicroMine Import
Surpac String .STR Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
USGS DEM SDTS TAR .TAR File>Open (Grid Image)
AMIRA .TEM Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
d
Targa .TGA File>Open (Raster Image) m
GeoTIFF files with embedded
elevation data
.TIF File>Open (Grid Image)
GeoTIFF RGB with embedded grid
data
.TIF File>Open (Grid Image)
GeoTIFF .TIFF File>Open (Raster Image) k
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF Images>Rectify Image i
Tagged Image File Format .TIFF .TFW File>Open (Raster Image) l
GOCAD vector .TS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
ASCII Text .TXT Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
Datamine .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Delimited ASCII .TXT File>Open
GemSys .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Text .TXT Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Text .TXT File>Open
LIDAR ASCII .TXT .CSV
.XYZ .ASC
Surfaces>Create Grid>Large and Multi-file
Gridding
p
USGS Grid Files .USG File>Open (Grid Image)
GOCAD vector .VS Discover>Import and Export>Vector Import
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix F Supported Data File Formats 1177
a For the creation of live or refreshable database links
b Read-only
c Read-only in MapInfo Professional 10.0
d Automatically stores attribute elevation data
e Works with most DXF formats, but least flexible
f Import templates, projection assigment, native file creation
g Requires ArcGIS/ArcInfo to be installed
h In MapInfo Professional 10.0
i Accurate 'rubber-sheet' rectification i.e. image is stretched, skemed and warped to accommodate control points
j Automatic image registration
k Imports embedded coordiante registration information
l Support for automatic coordinate registration via .TFW world file
m Truevision File Format Specification 2.0
n GRD files can be treated as either a grid or raster image. If the associated .TAB file contains a RasterStyle 6 entry, the
file will be treated as a grid
o Files are imported as read-only; they cannot be used to create grid files with MapInfo Professional's Create Grid The-
matic interpolation process
p Input point datasets are triangulated to create a gridded surface
q) Either the overall header .DIR can be referenced (normally under the Text folder) or subsidary .DT* files.
Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet .WK* File>Open
Windows Media Format .WMF File>Open (Raster Image)
Excel .XLS File>Open b
Excel 2007 .XLSX File>Open c
Geographic Markup Language .XML File>Open or Table>Import
ASCII Text .XYZ Surfaces>Import Grid File>ASCII Grid
Geosoft XYZ .XYZ Discover>Import and Export>Advanced ASCII
Import
f
Minex .XYZ File>Open (Grid Image)
Spatial Data Transfer Standard *CATD.DDF File>Universal Translator
Format Extension Import Tool Note
Appendix G Customising MapShop 1179
G Customising MapShop
The MAPSHOP. I NI file contains parameters controlling the position, look, size and
scale of the many MapShop components, such as scale bars, layout window, grid
referencing system, grid spacing, page margins etc. Many of these parameters
are automatically set from within the various specific MapShop dialogs, but a
number can be set using the MapShop>MapShop Configuration tool (see
Configuring MapShop).
The MAPSHOP. I NI file is located by default in the Mapshop folder, as set under
Discover>Configuration.
MAPSHOP.INI Parameters
Parameter Description
{CMSSet t i ngs] Defines the Custom Mapping System settings for
MapShop.
Al i gnRef ToGr i d =TRUE. Align the Reference Number (if used) to the grid
spacing.
=FALSE. Use regular grid spacing.
CMSEdi t i ng
CMSLabel s
CMSLMSCmds
=TRUE or not specified. Generate New Template,
Configure Map Templates, Generate Line Labels,
Generate Area Labels, and the MapShop Layer
commands. will not appear on the menu.
Coor dAUS
Coor dI SG
Coor dBRI T
Coor dUS
Specifies the coordinate systems to use for the different
map series types when using the Generate Map Series
command.
Pr i nt Scal es This item defines the list of scales which will be used on
the Print Standard Map dialog. This allows the command
to be customised to suit the organizations output
requirements. If this line is not specified, a default set of
scales are used. You can also specify a list of scales in
the Templates tables for each specific map template.
1180 Encom Discover User Guide
Sel ect Br ush This item defines the brush (fill) style used to highlight
selected region/area objects when the Show Selected
Feature options is enabled on the Print setup dialogs. The
format of the brush command is the same as that used for
MapBasic applications. If the user does not have
MapBasic, setting up a layers style override and saving it
as a workspace is good way to determine the required
style. If this line is not specified, then the default style
BRUSH(8,16711681,-1) (red hatch) will automatically be
used.
Sel ect Pen This item defines the pen (line) style used to highlight
selected line type objects when the Show Selected
Feature options is enabled on the Print setup dialogs. The
format of the pen command is the same as that used for
MapBasic applications. If the user does not have
MapBasic, setting up a layers style override and saving it
as a workspace is good way to determine the required
style. If this line is not specified, then the default style
PEN(3,2,16711681) (thick red) will automatically be used.
TempPat h This entry defines the full path specification of a windows
folder to which the user MUST have write access to. If the
item does not appear in the INI file, then the setting is set
to the default value which is the folder from which
MapShop is being run.
Set XXXXX These settings are used to set the various styles for map
series maps and when printing map catalogues. If any of
the settings are omitted then the default value will be
used. A brief description for each is shown below:
Set ShowTi ck = TRUE
Shows grid ticks on the map.
Set ShowNL = TRUE
Shows a neatline around the border of the map.
Set ShowNumb = TRUE
Shows grid numbers on the map at the grid tick positions.
Set ShowJ E = FALSE
Show a join edge on the map (the intersection of
surrounding map sheets).
Parameter Description
Appendix G Customising MapShop 1181
Set ShowCM = FALSE
Shows the corner marks of the map sheet on the map.
Set ShowCMV = FALSE
Shows the coordinates of the corner mark values.
Set ShowCr oss = FALSE
Shows grid crosses at a specified gap width (set using the
SetCrossGap INI setting).
Set ShowFul l = FALSE
Shows the full coordinate values instead of a shortened
two digit version.
Set ShowLi ne = TRUE
Shows grid lines on the map.
Set ShowRef = TRUE
Shows reference numbers on the map. These can be
later used when creating indexes over map sheets.
Set Font CMV = FONT( " Cent ur y Got hi c" , 2, 10, 16776960)
Sets the font to be used for the corner mark coordinate
values (refer Set ShowCMV).
Set Font Numb = FONT( " Ti mes" , 0, 10, 0)
Sets the font for the grid numbers (refer SetShowNumb)
Set Font Ref = FONT( " Ti mes" , 0, 18, 0)
Sets the font for the reference numbers on the map (refer
SetShowRef).
Set PenCr oss = PEN( 1, 2, 16711680)
Sets the pen style for the grid crosses (refer
SetShowCross).
Set PenLi ne = PEN( 1, 3, 255)
Sets the pen style for the grid lines (refer SetShowLine)
Set PenNL = PEN( 2, 2, 0)
Sets the pen style for the map's neatline (refer
SetShowNL)
Set PenTi ck = PEN( 1, 2, 0)
Sets the pen style for the grid ticks (refer SetShowTicks).
Parameter Description
1182 Encom Discover User Guide
Set PenJ E = PEN( 1, 2, 0)
Sets the pen style for the join edge of the map (refer
Set ShowJ E).
Set PenCM = PEN( 1, 2, 0)
Sets the pen style for the corner marks of the map sheet
(refer Set ShowCM).
Set Ti ckLgt h Sets the size of the grid ticks in mm on the map layout
(refer Set ShowTi cks).
Set Cr ossLgt h Sets the size of the grid crosses in mm on the map layout
(refer Set ShowCr oss).
Set CMLengt h Sets the size of the map sheet corner marks in mm on the
map layout (refer Set ShowCM).
Set Cr ossGap Sets the gap interval in ground metres to place grid
crosses at (refer Set ShowCr oss).
Set Ti ckGap Sets the gap interval in ground metres for grid ticks to be
placed at (refer Set ShowTi cks).
Set Li neGap Sets the gap interval in ground metres for grid lines to be
placed at (refer Set ShowLi ne).
Set Lat Uni t Sets the default units to be used when setting the three
gap intervals to be used, when printing maps form map
series that are in Lat/Long coordinate systems.
= 1: Use degrees as the gap interval unit of measure.
= 2: Use minutes as the gap interval unit of measure.
= 3: Use seconds as the gap interval unit of measure.
Set Ti ckGapLat Sets the gap interval for grid ticks using the units specified
by the Set Lat Uni t setting (refer Set ShowTi cks).
Set Cr ossGapLat Sets the gap interval for grid crosses using the units
specified by the SetLatUnit setting (refer Set ShowCr oss).
Set Li neGapLat Sets the gap interval for grid lines using the units specified
by the SetLatUnit setting (refer Set ShowLi ne).
Parameter Description
Appendix G Customising MapShop 1183
Set CMVOf f set Sets the offset from the corner mark in paper mm for the
position of the corner mark values (refer Set ShowCMV).
Set J EOf f set Sets the offset for the position of the join edge in paper
mm.
Set Ref Of f set Sets the offset from the map edge in paper mm for the
position of the reference numbers.
Set NLOf f set Sets the offset for the map Neatline in paper mm.
Scal eBar Wi t hi n = TRUE
Have all scalebar text objects within the extents of the
scale bar edges. Set by Map Making>
MapShop>MapShop Configuration.
Scal eBar Type Sets the scale bar type (1 - 3). (Set by Map Making>
MapShop>MapShop Configuration.
Scal eBar Uni t Sets the scale bar units (1 - 3). Set by Map Making>
MapShop>MapShop Configuration.
= Aut o: This is the default behaviour. If map projection is
cartesian, scale bar units will be in meters or kilometres;
all else use feet or mile (dependent on the map scale).
= I mper i al : Use feet or mile depends on the map scale.
= Met r i c: Use meter or kilometre, depends on the map
scale).
Set I r r egBuf f Sets the buffer in paper cm to have around the border of
an irregular shaped map series sheet.
Set I r r egFi l l = BRUSH( 16, 16776960, - 1)
Sets the fill style for the buffer area around irregular
shaped map series sheets.
Set St dPen = PEN( 1, 3, 255)
Set the pen style to be used for the border on standard
map plots.
Set MaskFi l l = BRUSH( 02, 16777215, 16777215)
Sets the fill style for the TempMapMask temporary layer
created with Map Series Maps.
Parameter Description
1184 Encom Discover User Guide
Set MaskPen
Set MaskPen2
=PEN( 1, 2, 255)
These settings work the same as the Set MaskFi l l . The
first number is the width of the line. The second number is
the patten of the line and the last number is the colour.
The value of the colour is derived from the RGB()
command in MapBasic.
Set MaskPos Sets the position for the TempMapMask temporary layer
created with Map Series Maps in the order of layers with
layer 1 being the top most layer in layer control.
Set Mask2Fi l l = BRUSH( 02, 16777215, 16777215)
Sets the fill style for the TempMapMask2 temporary layer
created with Map Series Maps.
Set Mask2Pos Sets the position for the TempMapMask2 temporary layer
created with Map Series Maps in the order of layers with
layer 1 being the top most layer in layer control.
Set Ref I nwar ds = TRUE
Turn on reference numbers in so that they face the centre
of the map in map series plots (refer Set ShowRef ).
Set Gr i dTo
Set Gr i dFr om
These two settings are used for trimming back AMG type
coordinates.
Set I ndexRangeX The number of divisions to be used for reference numbers
in the X direction. Set by Map Making>
MapShop>MapShop Configuration.
Set I ndexRangeY The number of divisions to be used for reference numbers
in the Y direction. Set by Map Making>
MapShop>MapShop Configuration.
Set I ndMar gi n Set the left, right, top and bottom margin (all the same) for
printed map indexes.
Set I ndFeaWi de Sets the column width for the feature field in map indexes.
Set I ndLocWi de Sets the column width for the locality field in map indexes.
Set I ndNumWi de Sets the column width for the map number field in map
indexes.
Set I ndNamWi de Sets the column width for the map name field in map
indexes.
Parameter Description
Appendix G Customising MapShop 1185
Set I ndRef Wi de Sets the column width for the reference number field in
map indexes.
Set I AMBFont
Set I AMBFi l l
= FONT( " Ti mes" , 1, 10, 0, - 1) and
= BRUSH( 2, 11780496, - 1)
These two settings specify the font and brush styles to be
used for Index to Adjoining Maps boxes when printing
map series maps.
Set KeyFont
Set KeyLi ne
Set KeyFi l l
= FONT( " Ti mes" , 0, 8, 0, - 1)
= PEN( 2, 2, 0)
= BRUSH( 52, 0, - 1)
These three settings specify the font, line and brush styles
to be used for the map sheet polygons boxes when
printing key maps.
Or der ByName Specifies whether to order the printing of map series
maps by their map name when batch printing. A setting of
FALSE will result in the maps being printed in order of their
map number.
Ref NumXY Controls whether X axis or Y axis cord is presented first. .
Set by the MapShop Settings dialog drop-down list (XY
and YX options). Use with Ref NumMode.
Ref NumMode Specifies how to carry out reference numbering. Set by
the MapShop Settings dialog. There are 8 different ways
to carry out reference numbering in MapShop. They are
shown diagrammatically below:
Parameter Description
A A A A
1
1
1
1
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1
A
A
A
A
5 6 7 8
1186 Encom Discover User Guide
Rot at eMaps This item defines whether or not to rotate maps to be
aligned in a vertical position for plotting map series maps.
If this setting is set to FALSE and a map series map is at a
rotated angle (e.g. a four sided map sheet which does not
sit vertically) then the map will be rotated so that it does fit
vertically for the purposes of plotting. This means that for
rotated maps, north will not necessarily be straight up the
page. If the setting is FALSE then maps will not be rotated
to fit vertically before plotting.
Aut oRot at e This setting specifies whether to automatically rotate
maps when the RotateMaps setting is TRUE. If this
setting is set to FALSE then before the map is rotated the
user will be presented with a dialog showing the
suggested rotation angle. The user will then be able to
accept that rotation angle or change it.
Rot Or i ent This setting specifies what orientation maps should be
rotated to when RotateMaps is TRUE.
=P: Rotate the map to a portrait orientation with the map
being taller than it is wide.
=L: Rotate the map to a landscape orientation with the
map being wider than it is high.
ShowNt hPnt This setting specifies whether to automatically generate a
north point onto the map that is being plotted.
Nt hPnt St yl e This setting specifies the symbol style to use for the north
point that will be placed on the map if ShowNthPnt is
TRUE. The symbol clause MUST be of the TrueType font
symbol syntax (6 attributes).
Nt hPnt Rat i oX
Nt hPnt Rat i oY
The above two settings set where the north point should
be placed on the map. The X and Y ratios are a
percentage of the total distance along the X and Y axis of
the paper starting from the bottom left hand corner of the
frame that the map is being inserted into.
Parameter Description
Appendix G Customising MapShop 1187
ZoomLayer i ng Specifies how to handle the zoom layering settings of the
mapper when printing a map. The three possible settings
are:
= Mai nt ai n: Leave the current zoom layering settings
as they are.
= Vi ew: Whatever layers are visible at the current zoom
as a result of their zoom layering, show only these layers
on the final output.
= Of f : Turn all zoom layering off before plotting the map.
Whether to remove the zoom layering from all of the
currently open layer before plotting map series maps,
after the map is printing the zoom layering settings will be
restored
ShowDot t edLi ne This setting allows you to turn on or off the generation of
the purple dashed region on the cosmetic layer when
creating map series. That is, when you generate a map
series a purple dotted line appears to show the region you
selected to insert a grid. ShowDot t edLi ne = TRUE will
show the line.
Rpt Fl dXXXXXX This group of settings allows the System Administrator to
set up how the Print Feature Report command data
section is laid out.
Rpt Fl dDat aMaxChar Sets the maximum number of characters to appear in the
Name column.
Rpt Fl dNameMaxChar Sets the maximum number of characters to appear in the
Name column.
Rpt Fl dDat aSi zeCm Sets the width in centimetres for the Data columns.
Rpt Fl dNameSi zeCm Sets the width in centimetres for the Name columns.
Rpt Li neGapSi zeCm Sets the width between pairs of columns.
Rpt Fi el dFont Sets the font.
Parameter Description
1188 Encom Discover User Guide
Fi t ToPaper Rat i oX
Fi t ToPaper Rat i oY
These two items (X and Y) set a percentage of paper size
to work within. Depending on the paper size selected in
the Print commands, the output from the commands is
generated to a Layout window ready for printing.
Unfortunately, due to the nature of some output devices
(e.g. plotters), the full area of the paper can not be used
and there are wide margins (some times up to several cm)
around the edge of the paper that remain blank.
These settings also allow the System Administrator to set
a percentage of area to use in both the X and Y directions.
For example, on an A3 HP Laser printer you can not print
to within 1 cm of the edge of the paper. In landscape
mode the A3 paper is 21 cm wide so leaving 1 cm clear
on both sides leaves only 19 cm left to draw in. This is
90.47% of the paper area in the X direction. Thus setting
the Fi t ToPaper Rat i oX=. 92 should ensure no detail is
clipped from the map in the printing process (in the X
direction).
[ EPSSet t i ngs] Defines settings for the Enhanced Printing Systems
module commands.
Fi t ToPaper Rat i oX
Fi t ToPaper Rat i oY
These two items (X and Y) set a percentage of paper size
to work within. Depending on the paper size selected in
the Print XXXX command(s), the output from the
commands is generated to a Layout window ready for
printing. Unfortunately, due to the nature of some output
devices (e.g. plotters), the full area of the paper can not
be used and there are wide margins (some times up to
several cm) around the edge of the paper that remain
blank.
These settings also allow the System Administrator to set
a percentage of area to use in both the X and Y directions.
For example, on an A3 HP Laser printer you can not print
to within 1 cm of the edge of the paper. In landscape
mode the A3 paper is 21 cm wide so leaving 1 cm clear
on both sides leaves only 19 cm left to draw in. This is
90.47% of the paper area in the X direction. Thus setting
the FitToPaperRatioX should ensure no detail is clipped
from the map in the printing process (in the X direction).
Parameter Description
Index 1189
Numerics
3D
Coordinate Drillholes 1062
DXF files 157
3D displays 561
3D Scatter plot
GraphMap 603
A
Absolute path name 46
Accept 442
acknowledgments 1103
acquire
Database Import 127
Activate licence 10, 12
Activation Code 9
Actual
Map Size 437
add
frame titles 478
line and point labels 489
scaled frame 458
section to layout 792
shade file button 420
shade file list 418
text labels 479
Add Derived Column
GraphMap 609
Add Group
of ELC 1099, 1100
Add or Delete 468
Additional Text Label Options 486
Adobe Reader 30
Affine
Custom Projection 306
Transformation 305
aggregates
assigning aggregates from points to enclosing
polygons See Assign Values
Align
Objects 352
allow layer
Gouping of ELC 1100
Alter
Map Bounds 236
analytic signal computation 1136
angles
dip and plunge 1023
Animation 547
Create 548, 557
Movie File 555
anisotropy
gridding using elliptical search 856
kriging model variogram 880
Annotation
Line 498
trench 1078
append
multi-table 252
Apply
Grid Filter 928
apply
Colour Map 414
apply density corrections control 848
Apply Styles from List 467
arithmetic operations
of grids 953
ASCII
advanced import 130
supported formats 133
ASCII grid
export 213
import 193
Assign
Values 367
Assign Values from Grid 993
Australian Structural Symbols 1020, 1027
Auto
Data Entry 244
Auto open after save option 929, 962
AutoCad 157
Auto-clip Stretch 915
AUTOGRID 51, 451
Index
1190 Encom Discover User Guide
Autogrid
Map 112
Mask 453
Table 454
Autoload 23
Automatic Legend Generation
described 472, 475
prerequisites 470
specifying the order within a legend 473
Automatically start Discover when MapInfo starts
23, 24
AutoSave
restore workspace 18
workspace 18
Autosave interval 18
autoscaling of Z-axis option 946
Auto-Shade 407
Apply 419
Other Discover Functions 420
saving thematic settings 417
transferring shade settings between Discover
installations 420
Use Other Files 420
Auto-Shadefacility 418
Auto-start modules 23
AVI
movie file format 555
Azimuth 676
Azimuth method
specify 1021
B
background image
GraphMap 621
Band Interleaved by Line 199
Bar chart
GraphMap 603
Bearing and Distance
trench survey table 686
Bi-cubic
resample grid 981
BIL grid
import 199
Bilinear
resample grid 981
Bivariate view
gridding Statistics Explorer 871
block kriging
Gridding Tool 845
boolean field
GraphMap 600, 623
boundary
digitizing 798
Box Border 472
Box plot
GraphMap 604
breaklines
Gridding Tool 839
browser window
GraphMap 612
BT2
Gemcom import 1050
Buffer
Gridding Tool output 860
Build
Objects from Table 332
build
colour table 412
map for colour table 416
Build Objects 332
C
Calculate
Volume for a level 1082
calculate
maximum and EOH values 816
calculate the volume 1082
Calculate Volume for a Level 1082
Canadian Structural Symbols 1020, 1027
cell dimensions
grids 981
cell parameters
grids 857
Change Direction
reversing the direction of polylines and
polygons 363
Change Line Direction 363
Child table
GraphMap 628
Choose New Columns button 419
Classify
GridUtility 967
Clear assignments
GraphMap 600
Index 1191
Clear Cells button 919
Clip
grid 968
clip
grids 967, 976
image 666
Clip to 365
Polygon 365
clipping a grid 965
Clipping Data Tables 366
clipping objects
at a polygon boundary 365
Clipping Options 365
Close
All 225
coincident points
Gridding Tool 840
Collar
trench/costean 683
collar
table 675
colour
build table 412
edit pattems 782
edit table 413
load pattems 789
thematic map 412
Colour cells of a row 918
Colour code sample assay labels 487
colour lookup tables
colouring polygon data See Colour Maps
Colour Map
apply 414
Colour Maps
building colour lookup tables 410, 412
editing colour lookup tables 413
thematic maps using colour lookup tables 414
using standard colour lookup tables 85, 408
colour table 413
ColourMap 408
ColourMaps>Colour Map 420
Column
Multiple Update 248
Column Delimited 334
Column parameter
GraphMap 611
Column Update 248
combine
grids 976
Command Search
configuration 24
hide and show 40
settings 41
using 40
company name 1112
Compatibility mode 23
compositing
downhole 804
Compute
Area Change 374
Slope or Aspect Grid 1083
Compute Area Change 374
Compute Slope or Aspect Grid 1083
Computer
licence transfer 12
Concave Hull
grid clipping 860
Configuration
Configuration File 17
setup and installation 4
Configuration menu option 17, 18, 22, 23, 24
Configure 438
Configure button on the Scaled Output dialog 438
Configuring Discover 16
Contacting Encom 29, 30
Container 368
Contents 368, 369
Contents 369
Container 368, 369
Context sensitive help 27
Contour
DXF export 157
Interval 1084
Level File 1084
Line 1085
contour
grid surfaces 678
contour grid 930
Contour Line
Label 935
contours
generating from a grid 930
convert
grids 970
1192 Encom Discover User Guide
image 668, 670
version 2.1 grid 1052
Convert Vector to Grid File 909
Convex Hull
grid clipping 860
cookie-cutting polygons See Processing Inlying
Polygons
Coordinate
reproject 314
Transform 299
coordinate systems 105
Coordinate Transformation
transforming data between two coordinate
systems 64, 299
Coordinates 296
Node Edit Node 341
Nodes 339
storing/updating current object coordinates
296, 336
Update 296
Copying workspace to CD-ROM 47
Copyright 7
correlation coefficient
geochemistry 290
correlation matrix
geochemistry 84, 290
Cosinus kernel function
density grid 852, 906
costean See trench 1074
Create
A Scalebar 461
Additional Scaled Outputs 444
Animation 548, 557
Drillhole Sections 674
Grid button 959
Map Legend 470
Scaled Output Map 436
Stack Profiles 581
Surface 858
thematic map layer 415
Voronoi Polygons 950
World file 546
create
Colour table 410
custom title block 1107
grid 829
new drillhole project 692, 695, 1066
New Legend 784
section collar plan 797
structure symbols 1018
Create Expression 956
Create Licence File dialog box 9, 11, 12
Create tab
GraphMap 597
creating
a trench view 1075
Current Mapper Projection 105
Cursor Position
Position 56, 118
curvature
grids 971
curvature utility 971
cusstom projections
Drillhole section plans 795
Custom
Re-Order Mode 473
Custom coordinate system 114, 455
Custom option 918
Custom scheme
GraphMap 639
Customer number 9
Customising MapShop 1179
cutting objects
with a selected line See Line Cut
D
Data
Digitizing 241
Entry (Auto) 244
Manual Attribute Entry 244
data
handling 259
data columns
select 1021
data coverage
grids 858
Data Format 572
Temporal Trends 572
data handling 259
Data handling options
GraphMap 608
data handling options
GraphMap 608
data levelling
Index 1193
Geochem 280
data selection
GraphMap 622
Data tab
GraphMap 622
data window
GraphMap 605
Datamine
Import 144
import 144, 145
Datamine ASCII
export 146
Datashed database
import 148
DataSight
import 148
DBMS 227
Auto Refresh 227
decimal degrees
grid spacing 452
Default map window Status Bar
overriding 18
define
log display 778
new section or plan 724
Delaunay triangulation
Gridding Tool 850
Density and Orientation 495
density correction
inverse distance weighting 848
Density grid
Gridding Tool 851
Depth 676
Depth From and Depth To 677
Dervied Columns, creating
GraphMap 609
Destination hardware ID 12
desurvery
drillholes 1062
DeviationSurvey
WinLoG Import 218
Dialog
GridUtility 959
DigData 241
digitize
Structure Symbols 1022
Digitizing
Data 241
digitizing
boundary 798
Dip 676
dip and plunge
angles 1023
direction
changing direction of a line See Change
Direction Direction
storing direction of a line See Line Direction
Discover
automatic start 22
configuring 16
Getting Started guide 1
help 27
map Status Bar 18
menus 37
network 25
start manually 24
starting 22
starting on a network 25
structure codes 1024
toolbars 38
workspace AutoSave 18
Discover Code 1024
Discover Help 1
Discover Mobile
export 417
Discover User Guide 1
DISCOVER.Prj 104
DISCOVER.WOR 18
display
log 776
log parameters 779
options 1058
display options 1058
Display order 1090
Distance and Bearing 106
Location Display 106, 107
Distance Calculator 293
Distance grid
Gridding Tool 853
Distance, Bearing 339
Document
Link Setup 431
Link to Map Object 432
Linking 430
Open Linked 434
1194 Encom Discover User Guide
Documentation
Getting Started 1
User Guide 1
donutting polygons See Processing Inlying
Polygons
downhole
compositing 804
info tool 797
survey table 676
downhole data
trench/costean 1079
downhole data tables 677
downhole survey table 676
downhole table
trench/costean 688
download
data table 677
draped
vector layers 946
Draw
Grid Profile 942
Line 338
Object 336
Polyline/Polygon 339
Pont 337
draw
section grid 795
Draw Arc, Ellipse and Rectangle 340
draw grid labels 453
Draw Grid option 437, 440
drillhole
collar table 675
create new project 692, 695, 1066
Create Sections 674
data format 675
project setup 690, 715, 719
drillhole collar 675
Drillhole Display
collar location 675
drillhole project
create new 692, 695, 1066
Drillholes 673
3D coordinates 1062
Costean 1074
desurvey 1062
Saved Settings 820
Subset Project 721
Trench 1074
Drillholes >Sectional Resource Calculator 800
Drillholes subsystem
and resource computation 799
Drillholes>Add section to layout tool 446, 447
drive wall
creating a section or plan 1074
Duplicate button
of LUT Editor 919
DXF 155
export contours as 157
import 1047
DXF file 157
Dynamic ScaleBar 109
E
Easting and Northing 675
ECW
import 183
edge detection filters 1127
edge ticks 452
Edit
Node Coordinates 341
edit
colour pattems 782
colour table 413
grids 974
edit colour table 414
Edit Map 468
Edit Node Coordinates 341
Editor
Workspace 45
Elevation 676
ellipitical shell 848
ellipse
and resource calculation 803
elliptical search
Gridding Tool 848
elliptical weighting
inverse distance weighting 848
Encom Discover
introduction 1
enhance
image 663
Enhanced Layer Control 23, 1085
Environmental Symbol Font 1161
Index 1195
Epanechnikov kernel function
density grid 852, 906
Equal Angle See Stereogram
Equal Area See Stereogram
ER Mapper 199, 200, 202
ER Mapper grid
import 200
ER Mapper grids 202
ERS
ER Mapper grid header 200
ESRI ASCII grid
import 202
ET Str font 499, 503
ET_Structural 1021, 1027
exact hit distance
inverse distance weighting 849
Exit 447
experimental variogram
kriging 845
Exponential scheme
GraphMap 640
Exponential weighting model
inverse distance weighting 847
export
ASCII grid 213
boundaries XE 157
colours pattems 790
DATAmine ASCII 146
Discover Mobile 417
graph as MapInfo table 588
graph as raster image 588
MineSight SRG 168
multiple MID/MIF 253
Profile Analyst Located Image 189
Surpac string 172
Vulcan archive 175
Export grid 213
Extract Nodes 372
F
F1 key 27
Favourite
MapBasics 42
Tables 221
Workspaces 44
Favourite Mapbasics 42
Favourite Projections 102
Favourite Workspaces 44
FFT Filter
band pass 1140
continuation 1139
high pass 1140
low pass 1139
field
add 253
comparison 253
delete 253
rename 253
reorder 253
type 253
field assignments
GraphMap 598
File>Print 444
Files of Type entry 925
fill
grid holes 976
fill internal holes 976
filter
GraphMap 600
image 664
Filter field assignment
GraphMap 600
Filter Properties 928
filter types 1129
filter, saved selection
GraphMap 623
Filtered Grid
Save 928
Filtering of gridded surface data 1127
Filters
available grid 1129
averaging 1130
enhancement 1131
Gaussian 1130
Geophysical FFT Derivative 1135
Laplacian 1132
laplacian of Gaussian 1132
line and edge enhance 1132
roberts cross 1133
sharpening 1131
smoothing 1129
sobel 1133
sun angle 1134
1196 Encom Discover User Guide
user-defined custom 1134
Fit Map Window to Selected Object 116
Fixed extents 117, 120
in map linking 117, 120
Fixed scale 117, 120
in map linking 117, 120
flip
grids 976
flip a grid 976
flow accumulation 1011
Flow arrows See Vector View
flow direction 1009
Folder locations
changing 17
Font Size defaults 484
Format 484
grids 965
Text 484
format
drillhole data 675
grids 970
formula
of Grid Calculator 955
Frame
Configure 438
Settings 438
Setup 437
Frame Settings 438
Frame Setup 437
frame setup 437
Frame Titling 478
Function pull-down list 959
G
Gaussian
filters 924
Gaussian kernel function
density grid 852, 906
Gaussian smoothing filter 860
Gaussian weighting model
inverse distance weighting 848
Gemcom BT2
import 1050
generate a profile 946
Geochem
data levelling 280
point classification 272
statisics 285
geographic locations
of maps 56
geological maps
colouring See Colour Maps
inlying polygons See Processing Inlying
Polygons
Geological Symbol Font 1142
geological symbols 1142, 1158, 1161
geology
surface 679
Geometry tab
Gridding Tool 857
geophysical point data
trench downhole data 677, 689
Geosoft
grid format 204
Geosoft database
import 158
Geosoft grid
import 204
Getting started 1
global
settings 781
Graph Builder
GraphMap 598
Graph Colouring 576
Graph Display 574
Graph Query 576
graph types
GraphMap 602
GraphMap 587, 625
Advanced Colour Options 638
Advanced Size Options 641
altering symbol display 637
colour by group 638
colour by RGB value 645
Column parameter 611
Create tab 597
Data Handling Options 608
data selection 622
Data tab 622
data window 605
Dervied Columns, creating 609
export 588
filter 600
Index 1197
Global Properties 646
graph window tools 589
Group field 600
Legend Window 645
Load Workspace 588
MapInfo polygons, importing 626
Modify tab 637
Multi-Table Relationships 627
navigation 619
Open dataset 588
overlay 625
Permanent Selection Region, creating 625
Permanent Selection Region, importing 626
precondition data 607
preconditioning data 607
quick access toolbar 589
Regression Line 621
remove selection 624
Reset Layout 647
Residuals Graph 621
Save Data 588
Save Workspace 588
selection in MapInfo 624
Selection Statistics 636
size by group 641
statistics 636
Value parameter 611
window tools 614
Grid
cell 826
definition 825
file formats 829
Function 960
Line Intersection 453
Method 849
Utilities 958
grid
contour Surfaces 678
draw section 795
grid calculation function 1083
Grid Calculator 953
description 953
Grid Calculator Syntax 1119
Grid Filter 924
Apply 928
Information 926
Settings 929
Grid Filters
Descriptions 1127
process 1127
grid format conversion 970
grid information 912
grid offset 966
Grid Open button 954
Grid Open dialog 954
grid parameters
sections 802
grid passes
Gridding Tool 856
Grid Profile
Draw 942
grid query tools 939
grid resampling 966, 981
grid rotation 966
Grid Spacing 452
Grid spacing 114, 455
Grid style 114, 456
grid style 452
Grid to Grid Clip 967, 976
Grid Utilities 958
grid value editing 974
gridding
input tab 833
gridding methods 840
Gridding Tool 829, 830
Geometry Tab 857
Input Tab 833
Method Tab 840
Output tab 859
Preview Display 831
Gridding Wizard 1098
grids 823
Auto-Apply 831
cell dimensions 981
clip 968
clipping 967, 976
combine 976
contouring 930
convert format 970
convert to vector 909
create 829
create legend 924
create LUT 918
1198 Encom Discover User Guide
create RGB 971
curvature 971
edit 974
fill holes 976
flip 976
Gaussian smoothing filter 860
grid information 912
gridding methods 840
Histogram application 921
import grid 191
LUT editor 916
merge 976
modify display 913
projection 827
replaced utilities 1080
reproject 979
resample 981
Rotate 982
Shift 982
Slope 982
smoothing 860
Split 983
sun highlight 920
sun shade 920
transparency 916
Vectorize 986
Viewshed 987
Volulme 990
GridUtility
Classify 967
Dialog 959
Overlay 978
Preview Window 960
Replace 979
Rotate 982
Save output Grid 962
Settings 961
Shift 982
Slope 982
Split 983
Vectorize 986
Viewshed 987
Volulme 990
Group field
GraphMap 600
Group field assignment
GraphMap 600
Group field use
GraphMap 601
Group scheme
GraphMap 640
Group, saved selection
GraphMap 624
Grouped View button 1094, 1095
H
handling
data 259
Hatching
transparent hatching See See-Thru Shading
Help 1, 27
sources available 27
Help buttons 27
Hide and show menus 37
high frequency noise
removing from grids 860
high-pass filters 1127
Hints 446
Histogram
GraphMap 603
Modify Grid Display 921
histogram equalisation
GriddingTool 832
Histogram Stretch 915
Hole ID 677
HoleID 675, 676
horizontal plan
section 724, 1057
Hydrographic Symbol Font 1158
hydrology 999
extract drainage features 1000
fill unnatural pits 1007
generate catchments 1014
workflow 999
I
IDW
Gridding Tool 846
IGRF calculator 1137
image
clip 666
convert 668, 670
enhance 663
Index 1199
filter 664
properties 662
rectify 651
reproject 659
rotate 668
save control points 656
selection 651
tool dialog 661
image tool
rectify 653
Images 649
imperial
scale bars 464
scalebars 461
Import
ASCII File 131
import
Acquire database 127
advanced ASCII 130
ASCII grid 193
BIL grid 199
Datashed database 148
ER Mapper grid 200
ESRI ASCII grid 202
Gemcom BT2 1050
Geosoft database 158
Geosoft grid 204
MicroMine 165
MineSight SRG 168
Minex grid 205
multiple MID/MIF 252
Profile Analyst Located Image 188
Surfer grid 207
Surpac grid 205
Surpac string 170
USGS DEM grid 209
Vertical Mapper grid 208
Vulcan archive 175
Import and Export 123
import grid 191
Importing
layered DXF data 1047, 1050
lines from coordinates on one row 335
Micromine files 170
Polylines delimited by row or column 333
XYZ grids 336
importing
tables from multiple directories 224
inclination 1137
Increment and Constant Values 243
info tool
downhole 797
Information
Grid Filter 926
in GridProcessor 926
Information button
of Grid Calculator 954
inlying polygons
processing See Processing Inlying Polygons
Input Tab
Gridding Tool 833
Insert Nodes 360
Installation folders 7
Installing Discover 4
Interp Selection button 919
Inverse Distance Weighting
Gridding Tool 846
ioGAS
import 160
J
J PEG2000
import 183
K
Key in shapes 336
keying in
object coordinates 336
object descriptions by distance bearing 336
Knowledge Base 28
kriging
equation 845
Gridding Tool 843
nugget 844
range 845
semivariance 844
sill 845
L
Label
Contour Line 935
Label Creator 479
1200 Encom Discover User Guide
LABELLER.MBX 487
Labels
creating at an angle 485
Line and Point 489
labels
Add Text 479
on grids 453
LAS 164
layer
create thematic map 415
Layer Control Options dialog 1092
Layers
Profile 946
Layout
Add Scaled Frame 458
Local Grid 318
layout
section options 794
Layout, use existing as title block template 466
Layout>Align 446
Legend
Box Boarder 472
Create Map 470
Order 473, 477
Style 472
Tables and Columns 470
legend
create grid legend 924
create new 784
properties 785, 788
reordering 477
legend border style 476
legend creation 471
Legend from objects within map window only
option 473
Legend Order 473, 477
Legend Style 472
Legend style 476
legend text style 476
Legend Window
GraphMap 645
Library
Maintain Styles 468
Styles 466
library
SeeThru Shde 495
Licence
activation 10, 11, 12
new 9
transferring 12
upgrading 11
Licence information
displaying 14
Licence Manager 9, 14
License serial number 9
Licensing 5, 7
new installation 9
procedures 8
upgrade 11
Licensing menu option 14
LIDAR LAS 881, 883, 885
import 164
Line 338
Annotation 498
Change direction 363
Concatinate 358
Orientation 371
Line and Point 489
Line Annotation 498
Line Concat 358
Line Cut 358
cutting objects with a selected line 358
Line Direction
storing as an attribute 371
Line graph
GraphMap 603
Line on One Row 335
Linear scheme
GraphMap 639
Linear Stretch 915
Linear weighting model
inverse distance weighting 847
Lineations
plotting See Stereogram
Lines graph
GraphMap 603
Link
Document 430
Document Setup 431
Document to Map Object 432
Open Document 434
Link Document 432
Link this map option 117
Index 1201
Linking 430
Document 430
Fixed extents 117, 120
Fixed Scale 117, 120
Map 116
List
Apply Styles 467
load
colour pattems 789
Local Grid
converting from See Coordinate
Transformation
generating 64, 318
Layout 318
Local Grid Layout 318
Location Display 106, 107
log
define display 778
display 776
display parameters 779
log display
define 778
parameters 779
Log scheme
GraphMap 640
logo tablename 1110
look-up table
grids 918
low magnetic latitudes 1136
LUT
create for grids 918
editor for grids 916
M
Maintain Styles 468
major axes
of search ellipse 856
Make Affine Custom Projection 306
Make Custom TitleBlock 460
manager
secton 747
Manual
Data Entry 244
Manual Attribute Data Entry 244
Manual start 24
Map
Accept Position 442
Actual Size 437
Alter Bounds 236
Autogrid 112
Position 441
Position Scaled 440
Scale 437
Map Autogrid 112
map frame
titles 478
Map Frame Position offsets 439
Map graph
GraphMap 602
Map Grid 451, 452
drawing to a map window 451
on printed maps See scaled hardcopy output
overlaying grids based on different projections
454
saving 454
Map Link option 118
Map Linking 116
Map Making Tools 435
Map making tools
creating legends See Automatic Legend
Generation
Styles Library See Styles Library
Map Making>Add scaled frame to layout tool 446,
447
Map Position 441
Map projection 113, 455
Map Scale 437
Map Styles 1142
Map Window Tools 37, 97
described 53
map with no map grid 437, 440
Map>Previous View menu option 447
MapBasics 42
Favourite 42
MapGrid 454
MapInfo Professional 1
MAPINFOW.PRJ 105
Mapper State 98
mappers linked 56, 116
MapShop
configuration file 1179
MAPSHOP.INI 1179
MapSize rectangle 441
1202 Encom Discover User Guide
Margins
Non-Printing 439
mask
around grid 453
Match Window Sizes 119
maximum and EOH values
calculate 816
MBX 42
Mean scheme
GraphMap 640
Menus 37
Merge
grids 976
Method Tab
Gridding Tool 840
Methods
transformation 658
methods
Modify Grid Display 914
metric
scale bars 464
scalebars 461
MI Label Angles 485
MicroMine
import 165
Micromine
importing files from 170
MicroStation 157
MineSight
import 168
MineSight SRG
import 168
Minesight SRG
export 168
Minex grid
import 205
Minimum angle factor 1137
Minimum Curvature
Gridding Tool 842
minor axes
of search ellipse 856
model variogram
kriging 877
Modfy tab
GraphMap 637
Modify
MI Label Angles 485
Modify Grid Display 913
Histogram 921
LUT Editor 916
methods 914
transparency 916
Modify Hotlinks
of ELC 1099
Modify Theme
of ELC 1099
Move toolbars 38
Movie File 555
multi-banded grid 983
Multiple
Column Update 248
multiple line plots See Lines graph
multiple MID/MIF
export 253
import 252
multiple scatter plots See Scatter Matrix
multi-segment pie chart See Pie chart
multi-table
append 252, 253
comparison 253
field editing 253
open 224
pack 251
reproject 253, 317
Structure Manager 253
Multi-Table Relationships
GraphMap 627
N
natural neighbour interpolation 850
Near/Far
grid clipping 860
Nearest Neighbour
resample grid 981
negative values
display as hole logs 780
Network
starting Discover on 25
New button
for LUTs 918
New grid origin 982
new section or plan
define 724
New Shade File
option 418
Index 1203
No List option 443, 463
Nodes 339
Coordinates 339
Distance, Bearing 339
Insert 360
Node Edit Coordinates 341
nodes
editing object nodes 341
keying in object nodes 336
Non-Printing Margins 439
normal probability plot See Probability plot
normalize
geochemical data 84, 280
nugget
inverse distance weighting 847
kriging 844
nulls in grids 976
Number of entries 918
O
Object
Align 352
Colouring 422
Cut 358
Offset 349
Transform 350
Object Editing>Key In Shapes 116
Object Information
GraphMap 624
Object Offset function 445
Object Style Entry
Add or Delete 468
Edit Map 468
objects
keying in object nodes 336
offset a grid 966
Offset Object 349
Offset Objects
creating copies of objects at a specified offset
349, 428
Online Knowledge Base 28
Open 434
Linked Document 434
open
multi-table 224
Open branches for all windows
of ELC 1101
Open Layout Template from workspace 463
opening
tables from multiple directories 224
operator
AND 1119
arithmetic 1123
boolean 1124
comparison 1124
IF 1122
NOT 1120
OR 1120
trigonometric 1125
XOR 1121
Options
Profile 946
options
display 1058
output 273
section layout 794
structural data 1020
ordinary kriging
Gridding Tool 846
Orientation control
of search ellipse 856
origin of a grid 982
Other Discover Functions 420
Other Discover Funstions
Auto-Shade 420
output
options 273
output format
of Grid Calculator 954
output options
output type 274
point styles legend 275
set point styles 275
Output tab
Gridding Tool 859
output type
output options 274
Overlay
GridUtility 978
Map Grid 454
overlay
GraphMap 625
Overriding default map Status Bar 18
1204 Encom Discover User Guide
P
pack
multi-table 251
Packaging workspaces 47
panning
GraphMap 619
parameters
log display 779
Title block 1111
Parent table
GraphMap 628
pattems
edit colours 782
export 790
load colour 789
Pattern 488
Colour Text Labels 488
Pattern Density 495
Pattern Library 495
Pattern Type 494
SeeThru Shadding 494
Pattern Width 495
patternsfor see-thru 495, 497
PDF 2
viewing and printing 30
PDF documentation 28
Percentile Ranges 915, 941
Percentile scheme
GraphMap 640
permanently
Colour Map objects 415
Pie chart
GraphMap 604
Plan curvature 971
Plane Transformation 303
Plot
Vectors 424
Plot Vectors 424
Point 337
point classification
Geochem 272
point kriging
Gridding Tool 845
point style legend
output options 275
Poles to Planes
plotting See Stereogram
PolyBuilder 379
Additional Utilities 404
Attribute Polygons 402
Check Linework 389
Correct Linework 392
Create Polygons 399
Digitise Linework 385
Extend and Break Linework 392
Preferences 383
PolyClip
clipping objects at a polygon boundary 365
Polygon Drape 946
polygonal grid clipping 969
Polygonize 379
PolyBuilder 379
Polygons
Clip to 365
Clipping Data Tables 366
Clipping Options 365
Donut 363
Split-Multi 366
Polyline
Smoother- 355
Thin 356
Polyline Smoother 355
Polyline/Polygon 339
Polylines
Column Delimited 334
Line on One Row 335
Row Delimited 333
position of the Scaled Output map 441
Position Scaled 440
Map 440
Power weighting model
inverse distance weighting 848
precondition data
GraphMap 607
preview display
Gridding Tool 831
Preview Window
GridUtility 960
Previous View function 1088
Print PDF document 30
Printer Setup 438
Printing 444
Scaled Output Layout 444
Index 1205
Probability plot
GraphMap 604
Processing Inlying Polygons
and geological maps 363
cutting polygons from surrounding polygons
363
Profile
Layers 946
Options 946
Profile Analyst Located Image
export 189
import 188
Profile curvature 971
profile information
and drillholes 678
Profile See Surface Analysis 946
Profiles
Create Stack 581
Proimity
Search 341
Projections
display details 105
favourite 102
Make Affine custom 306
Map Grid 452
Properties
GraphMap 591
properties
image 662
legend 785, 788
Proximity Search
selecting objects based on distance from other
objects 65, 341
Q
Quartic kernel function
density grid 852, 906
Querying
based on proximity to selected objects See
Proximity Search
Querying tables
searching for particular text See Text Search
and Replace
R
radial search
in gridding 849
range
inverse distance weighting 847
kriging 845
Rank scheme
GraphMap 640
rectangular region
clipping 965
rectify
image 651
image options XE 657
image tool 653
Reduction-To-the-Pole 1136
reformat grids 965
register the shade file 420
Registered Raster 543
Convert Map 543
Create World File 546
Regression Line
GraphMap 621
Relative path name 46
Replace
GridUtility 979
Text 229
Replaced Utilities 1047
replaced utilities
grids 1080
Reproject 979
reproject
coordinates 314
image 659
NTv2 method 1115
tables 253, 317
Requirements
hardware 3
MapInfo Professional 4
resample
grids 981
resample grids 966
resampling a grid 981
Residuals Graph
GraphMap 621
resource grid 800
resource parameters
setup 800
resources from cross-sections 798
Restore
Mapper State 98
1206 Encom Discover User Guide
Restore Autosave workspace 18
Restore Mapper State option 98
RGB
formula 645
grids 971
RGB Colourizer 422
RGB values
GraphMap 645
use in colour lookup tables See Colour Tables
roll-up
of the ELC 1086
Rose diagram
GraphMap 605
Rotate
grids 982
GridUtility 982
rotate
image 668
rotate grids 966
rotation
GraphMap 620
rounded grid spacing 452
Row Delimited 333
Rows and Columns
of filters 1128
RTP filter 1136
S
Save
Filtered Grid 928
Map Grids 454
Mapper State 98
save
Drillhole Settings 820
graoh data as MapInfo table 588
graph data as CSV file 588
graph legend as MapInfo table 589
image control points 656
Save and Overlay Map Grids 454
Save Mapper State tool 98
Save Output Grid
GridUtility 962
Save Plane 305
Save tables to workspace folder 47
scale bar style 464
Scale Factor 304
scalebar
dynamic 109
Title Block 1114
scalebar format 461
SCALEBAR.TAB 466
scaled hardcopy output
configuring frame settings 438
determining coverage 440
hints 446
scalebar format 461
using an existing workspace as a template
463
with standard map sheets 445
Scaled Output 435, 451
Creating Additional 444
Exit 447
Hints 446
Printing 444
TitleBlock 442
Scaled Output button 436
Scaled Output>Accept Map Position 442
Scaled Output>Quit Scaled Output 447
Scaled Output>ReSpecify Parameters 444
Scaled Output>Respecify Parameters 441, 442
Scaled Output>Restore Map Window 442, 444,
447
Scatter matrix
GraphMap 604
Scatter plot
GraphMap 602
Search
Proimity 341
Text 229
Search all holes
required 799
search distance
Gridding Tool 855
Search Distance controls 855
search ellipse 803
in Grid Tool 802
search expansions
Gridding Tool 855
search orientation
for sectional resources 803
Search tab
Gridding Tool 854
Section
Index 1207
display options 1058
draw grid 795
grid parameters 802
horizontal plan 724, 1057
layout options 794
vertical 727, 1054
section
manager 747
section collar plan
create 797
section to layout
add 792
Sectional Resource Calculator 798, 799
sections
Create Drillhole 674
sector search ellipse 857
SeeThru
Shading 493
See-Thru Pattern Library 495
See-Thru patterns 494
See-Thru Shading
applying to selected regions 494
SeeThru Shading 493
Density and Orientation 495
Pattern Library 495
Pattern Type 494
SEETHRU table 495, 498
Select
Group 231
select
data columns 1021
Select by Graphical Styles 345
Select by Group 231
Select by Style dialog 345
Select Object to Draw 336
selection
image 651
selection region
GraphMap 625
Selection Statistics
GraphMap 636
semivariance
kriging 844
Send TitleBlock to Back checkbox 463
Set Clip Region 446
Set Default Table 97
Set default table view
setting 54, 97
set point styles
output options 275
Set Selection Overlay
GraphMap 621
Settings
Grid Filter 929
GridUtility 961
settings
global 781
Setup 573
Frame 437
setup
drillhole project 690, 719
resource parameters 800
shade file (SHD) 418
shade files 418
Shade Quickview option 415
Shading
See Thru 493
Sharing workspaces 47
Shift
grids 982
GridUtility 982
Show all windows in workspace
of ELC 1100
Show and hide toolbars 38
sill
kriging 845
simple kriging
Gridding Tool 846
Slope
grids 982
GridUtility 982
smooth curved grid lines 457
smoothing
in Grid Wizard 846
Sort
Tables 234
Sort Table 234
Spatial Neighbour
Gridding Tool 849
Spatial Neighbour tab 849
spatial neighbours
gridding 849
Spatial view
gridding Statistics Explorer 873
1208 Encom Discover User Guide
special symbol fonts 499, 503
specify
Azimuth method 1021
Specify Order option 471
Specify the data value
of colours 918, 919
spline interpolation
for contours 1085
Split
grids 983
GridUtility 983
Split Multi-Polys 366
splitting
multi-section polylines and regions 366
spreadsheet
Gridding Tool 863
Stacked Profile
Create 581
standard
filters 924
Standard Deviation
GraphMap 640
Standard Map Sheets 445
Standard Views 98
Starting Discover 22, 24
unlicensed 5
Starting Discover on a network 25
statisics
Geochem 285
statistics
GraphMap 636
Statistics Explorer 840, 862
Gridding Tool 862
Stereogram
GraphMap 605
Store Resource in column 802
stractureal
data options 1020
stream analysis 999, 1013
structural codes 1021, 1028
structural data
displaying as symbols See Structural Data
Mapper
Structural Data Mapper
digitizing structural symbols 1022
Overview 1017
symbol codes 1024
structural measurements
plotting See Stereogram
structural symbols 1017, 1018
Structural True Type symbol fonts 1147
structure
symbols 1017
Structure Symbol Font 1147
Structure Symbols
digitize 1022
structure symbols
create 1018
Style
Legend 472
Style button
for legends 472
Styles
Library 466
Styles Library 466
storing and applying standard object styles
466
Sun Highlight
grids 920
sun illumination
GriddingTool 832
sun shade
grids 920
sun-angle filters 924
sun-shading 919
surface
geology 679
grid and contour 678
Surface Analysis
Profile over a grid or contour plan 946
Surface curvature 971
Surface menu 420
Surface Profile See Surface Analysis 946
Surfaces
replaced utilities 1080
Surfaces See grids
Surfer
grid import 207
Surpac grid
import 205
Surpac string
export 172
import 170
survey table
download 676
Index 1209
trench/costean 684
Symbol and Label Style 1021
symbol fonts 503
symbol picker 1017
symbology
GraphMap 637
symbols
structure 1017
T
Table
Multiple Utilities 251
Set Default 97
Split 237
Transformation 300
table
append 252, 253
build colour 412
collar 675
comparison 253
create look-up for grids 918
download data 677
download survey 676
edit colour 413
editing 253
open 224
pack 251
reproject 253, 317
structure 253
table of symbols 1021
Table Split 237
Table Utilities
described 79, 85, 408, 649
Table window
GraphMap 603
table window
GraphMap 612
Tables
absolute and relative path names 46
Build Objects 332
Columns 470
Legend 470
remove unused 46
resolve missing 46
save to workspace folder 47
tables
sort 234
Tables and Columns 470
taper
inverse distance weighting 849
Technical support 29
Temporal Trend View
Data Format 572
Introduction 571
Temporal Trends 571
Data Format 572
Graph Colouring 576
Graph Display 574
Graph Query 576
Setup 573
Tenements 1031
Ternary diagram
GraphMap 604
Text
Add Labels 479
Additional Label Options 486
Colour Labels from Pattern 488
Format 484
Replace 229
Search 229
sizing for a given map scale 484
text label string into a column 62, 487
Text Labels 479
Text Search and Replace 229
searching for and/or replacing particular text
229
Thematic 418
Auto-Shade 418
Mapinfo 418
thematic map layer
create 415
Thematic map settings
saving and re-applying See Auto-Shade
Thin
Polyline 356
Thin Polyline
Node Number 356
Node Position 357
Thin Polyline by Node Number 356
Thin Polyline by Node Position 357
Thin Polylines 356
thinning polylines and regions
by node position 357
Title Block
1210 Encom Discover User Guide
insert Company Logo 1107
Make Custom 460
placeholders 1112
scalebar 1114
Title block 442
add scale bar 465
create 1107
parameters 1111
position 465
saving 465
scale 465
send to back 465
Title Line placeholder 1113
Title Lines 462
TITLEBLK.TAB 442, 463, 465
TitleBlock List 440
Titleblock Position 463
Titles 478
Layout Window frame 478
tool dialog
image 661
Toolbars 38
Cursor Position 95
Discover 90
Drillholes 94
Enhanced Layer Control 95
GraphMap 95
large buttons 38
Map Making 92
moving 38
Object Editing 93
show and hide 38
show tool tips 38
Surfaces 93
Tools
Distance and Bearing 106
ToolTips 38
topographic elevation 825
topographic grid
trench/costean 690
Total Depth 676
Transfer licence 12
Transform 299, 350
Coordinate 299
Coordinates now 304
Object 350
Transformation
Affine 305
NTv2 1115
Plane 303
Save Plane 305
Scale Factor 304
Table 300
transformation
Methods 658
Transformation Table 300
transparency
grids 916
Trench
creating view 1075
Drillholes 1074
trench
annotation 1078
Bearing and Distance survey table 686
collar table 683
downhole data table 688
plan creation 1075
section creation 1076
setup 716
survey table 684
topography grid 690
Triangle kernel function
density grid 852, 906
triangular irregular network 950
Triangulation
Griddding Tool 850
Triweight kernel function
density grid 852, 906
Troubleshooting 14
True Type Fonts
of structural symbols See Structural Data
Mapper
True Type fonts 1147
TrueType font symbols 1021, 1028
TrueType symbol fonts 1017
tunnel wall
creating a section or plan 1074
U
Uniform kernel function
density grid 852, 906
Univariate view
gridding Statistics Explorer 866
Index 1211
unroll the ELC 1086
Update 487
Coordinates 296
Table from Text Labels 487
Text Labels from Table 487
Update Coordinates
storing coordinates from multiple projections
298
update coordinate columns from objects 297
update object position from coordinate
columns 297
update the text in text objects 62, 487
Updates 29
updating text labels 486
Upper Tail scheme
GraphMap 640
US structural symbols 1020
Use layer name aliases
of ELC 1100
Use layer name aliases option 1092
Use nearest neighbours
Gridding Tool 857
Use Other Files 420
User Guide described 28
USGS DEM grid
import 209
Utilities
Grid 958
Multiple Table 251
Utils 928
V
Value parameter
GraphMap 611
Values
Assign 367
Constant 243
Increment 243
Variogram view
gridding Statistics Explorer 875
Vector View 424
Vectorize
grids 986
GridUtility 986
Vectors
Plot 424
version 2.1 grid
convert 1052
Vertical Mapper 208
toggle grid support 212
Vertical Mapper grid
import 208
vertical section 727, 1054
View PDF document 30
viewing individual records
GraphMap 624
viewing multiple records
GraphMap 612
Views
Set Default Table 97
Standard 98
Viewshed
grids 987
GridUtility 987
Volulme
grids 990
GridUtility 990
volume
of grids 1082
Voronoi Polygons
Create 950
Vulcan archive
export 175
import 175
W
watershed 999
weight model
inverse distance weighting 847
weight power
in Grid Tool 803
weight the grid node 1128
whiskers (box plot)
GraphMap 604
Windows 7 3
Windows Vista 3
Windows XP 3
Workspace
AutoSave 18
autosaving and restoring 18
Editor 45
make table path names absolute or relative 46
packaging and sharing 47
1212 Encom Discover User Guide
resolve missing tables 46
resolving missing files 19
restore AutoSave 18
Workspace Editor 45
Workspaces
Favourite 44
Worspace
remove unused tables 46
X
X axis asssignment
GraphMap 600
X-axis label 457
XY point plot See Scatter plot
Y
Y axis assignment
GraphMap 600
Y-axis label 458
Z
Z axis assignment
GraphMap 600
Zoom to Extents of Selected Object 116
zooming
GraphMap 620
zooms
in GridProcessor 926